791723
82
Zoom out
Zoom in
Previous page
1/156
Next page
RCS-77H
SX-SW77
S-ST770
HDD DVD Recorder Home Cinema System
Speaker System
Operating Instructions
Audio Multi-channel Receiver Subwoofer
Discover the benefits of registering your product online at www.pioneer.uk
(www.pioneer-eur.com)
DVR-530H-AV
DVD Recorder
®
Introduction.book Page 1 Wednesday, April 27, 2005 5:54 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
D3-4-2-1-1_En-A
The exclamation point within an equilateral
triangle is intended to alert the user to the
presence of important operating and
maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the appliance.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol,
within an equilateral triangle, is intended to
alert the user to the presence of uninsulated
"dangerous voltage" within the product's
enclosure that may be of sufficient
magnitude to constitute a risk of electric
shock to persons.
CAUTION:
TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR
BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS
INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED
SERVICE PERSONNEL.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
IMPORTANT
WARNING
This equipment is not waterproof. To prevent a fire
or shock hazard, do not place any container filed
with liquid near this equipment (such as a vase or
flower pot) or expose it to dripping, splashing, rain
or moisture.
D3-4-2-1-3_A_En
WARNING
To prevent a fire hazard, do not place any naked
flame sources (such as a lighted candle) on the
equipment. D3-4-2-1-7a_A_En
Operating Environment
Operating environment temperature and humidity:
+5 ºC – +35 ºC (+41 ºF – +95 ºF); less than 85 %RH
(cooling vents not blocked)
Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in
locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or
strong artificial light) D3-4-2-1-7c_A_En
CAUTION
This product is a class 1 laser product, but this
product contains a laser diode higher than Class 1.
To ensure continued safety, do not remove any covers
or attempt to gain access to the inside of the product.
Refer all servicing to qualified personnel.
D3-4-2-1-8_A_En
CAUTION
ATTENTION
CLASS 3B VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION
WHEN OPEN, AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM.
DRW2247 - A
RADIATIONS LASER VISIBLES ET INVISIBLES DE CLASSE 3B
QUAND OUVERT. ÉVITEZ TOUT EXPOSITION AU FAISCEAU.
ADVARSEL
KLASSE 3B SYNLIG OG USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLING VED ÅBNING.
UNDGÅ UDSÆTTELSE FOR STRÅLING.
VARNING
KLASS 3B SYNLIG OCH OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING NÄR DENNA
DEL ÄR ÖPPNAD. UNDVIK ATT UTSÄTTA DIG FÖR STRÅLEN.
VARO!
AVATTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA NÄKYVÄLLE JA
NÄKYMÄTTÖMÄLLE LUOKAN 3B LASERSÄTEILYLLE.
ÄLÄ KATSO SÄTEESEEN.
PRECAUCIAÓN
CUANDO SE ABRE HAY RADIACIÓN LÁSER DE CLASE 3B VISIBLE
E INVISIBLE. EVITE LA EXPOSICIÓN A LOS RAYOS LÁSER.
VORSICHT
BEI GEÖFFNETER ABDECKUNG IST SICHTBARE UND UNSICHTBARE
LASERSTRAHLUNG DER KLASSE 3B IM GERÄTEINNEREN
VORHANDEN. AUGEN NICHT DEM LASERSTRAHLAUSSETZEN!
The following caution label appears on your unit.
Location: inside of the unit
This product is for general household purposes. Any failure
due to use for other than household purposes (such as long-
term use for business purposes in a restaurant or use in a
car or ship) and which requires repair will be charged for
even during the warranty period. K041_En
WARNING
The voltage of the available power supply differs
according to country or region. Be sure that the
power supply voltage of the area where this unit
will be used meets the required voltage (e.g., 230V
or 120V) written on the rear panel. D3-4-2-1-4_A_En
Before plugging in for the first time, read the following
section carefully.
This product incorporates copyright protection technology
that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents
and other intellectual property rights owned by
Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of
this copyright protection technology must be authorized
by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and
other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise
authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
This product complies with the Low Voltage Directive
(73/23/EEC, amended by 93/68/EEC), EMC Directives
(89/336/EEC, amended by 92/31/EEC and
93/68/EEC).
D3-4-2-1-9a_En
Introduction.book Page 2 Wednesday, April 27, 2005 5:54 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
VENTILATION CAUTION (Receiver subwoofer)
When installing this unit, make sure to leave space
around the unit for ventilation to improve heat
radiation (at least 5 cm at top, 5 cm at rear, and 5
cm at each side).
VENTILATION CAUTION (DVD Recorder)
When installing this unit, make sure to leave space
around the unit for ventilation to improve heat
radiation (at least 10 cm at top, 10 cm at rear, and
10 cm at each side).
WARNING
Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for
ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the
product, and to protect it from overheating. To
prevent fire hazard, the openings should never be
blocked or covered with items (such as newspapers,
table-cloths, curtains) or by operating the
equipment on thick carpet or a bed.
D3-4-2-1-7b_A_En
CAUTION
The STANDBY/ON switch on this unit will not
completely shut off all power from the AC outlet.
Since the power cord serves as the main disconnect
device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from
the AC outlet to shut down all power. Therefore,
make sure the unit has been installed so that the
power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC
outlet in case of an accident. To avoid fire hazard,
the power cord should also be unplugged from the
AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time
(for example, when on vacation).
POWER-CORD CAUTION
Handle the power cord by the plug. Do not pull out the
plug by tugging the cord and never touch the power
cord when your hands are wet as this could cause a
short circuit or electric shock. Do not place the unit, a
piece of furniture, etc., on the power cord, or pinch the
cord. Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other
cords. The power cords should be routed such that they
are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord
can cause a fire or give you an electrical shock. Check
the power cord once in a while. When you find it
damaged, ask your nearest PIONEER authorized
service center or your dealer for a replacement.
S002_En
If the AC plug of this unit does not match the AC
outlet you want to use, the plug must be removed
and appropriate one fitted. Replacement and
mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of
this unit should be performed only by qualified
service personnel. If connected to an AC outlet, the
cut-off plug can cause severe electrical shock. Make
sure it is properly disposed of after removal.
The equipment should be disconnected by removing
the mains plug from the wall socket when left
unused for a long period of time (for example, when
on vacation). D3-4-2-2-1a_A_En
This product includes FontAvenue® fonts licenced by NEC
corporation. FontAvenue is a registered trademark of NEC
Corporation.
Do not connect either wire to the earth terminal of a
three pin plug.
NOTE
After replacing or changing a fuse, the fuse cover in
the plug must be replaced with a fuse cover which
corresponds to the colour of the insert in the base
of the plug or the word that is embossed on the
base of the plug, and the appliance must not be
used without a fuse cover. If lost replacement fuse
covers can be obtained from your dealer.
Only 5 A fuses approved by B.S.I or A.S.T.A to
B.S.1362 should be used.
D3-4-2-1-2-2_En
The wires in this mains lead are coloured in
accordance with the following code:
Blue : Neutral
Brown : Live
If the plug provided is unsuitable for your socket
outlets, the plug must be cut off and a suitable plug
fitted.
IMPORTANT
FOR USE IN THE UNITED
KINGDOM
The cut-off plug should be disposed of and must
not be inserted into any 13 amp socket as this can
result in electric shock. The plug or adaptor or the
distribution panel should be provided with 5 A fuse.
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this
appliance may not correspond with coloured
markings identifying the terminals in your plug,
proceed as follows ;
The wire which is coloured blue must be connected
to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or
coloured black.
The wire which is coloured brown must be
connected to the terminal which is marked with the
letter L or coloured red.
Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be performed only by qualified
service personnel.
5 cm
5 cm 5 cm
10 cm
10 cm 10 cm
Receiver subwoofer DVD Recorder
English
Introduction.book Page 3 Wednesday, April 27, 2005 5:54 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Section One
01
4
En
Thank you for buying this Pioneer product.
Please read through these operating instructions so that you will know how to operate your model properly. After you
have finished reading the instructions, put them in a safe place for future reference
.
Features
1 Home cinema system with the latest features
This unit is equipped with a variety of the latest features
for DVD recording.
Extended recording time
Up to 455 hours recording on 160GB HDD (page 154)
24 hours recording (DVD-R DL)
High speed copy
DVD-R: 12x, DVD-RW: 6x (page 42)
Ease of use
Help function
EPG (Guide plus+) (page 68)
ShowView / Video Plus (page 75)
Advanced Disc Navigator (moving thumbnail)
(page 92
,
111)
Digital Jukebox
Record your favorite music CDs to the hard disk and
produce your own library of favorites (page 120)
2 Subwoofer with 5.1ch receiver function
This unit includes a subwoofer equipped with 5.1
channel amplifier and FM/AM tuner with RDS support.
The receiver is equipped with Dolby Digital, Dolby Pro
Logic II, and DTS decoders for the ultimate in live
listening presence.
Advanced surround modes are also provided to allow you
to select your own uniquely designed listening
environment (page 24).
3 Includes a separate display for greater freedom
in installation layout.
The separate display makes it easy to choose the
optimum layout for your installation location. Choose the
setting that provides the best storage and viewing
position.
The separate display is provided with control buttons,
allowing you to perform basic operations at the display
alone, without using the remote. On the other hand, the
separate display is also equipped with a remote control
receiver, allowing you to operate the unit by pointing the
remote at the display instead of at the DVD recorder or
subwoofer (page 22).
4 Three-spot front surround setting allows two
kinds of speaker placement
In addition to the conventional 5.1ch speaker placement,
the rear (surround) speakers can be placed in the front if
desired, thus producing a 3-spot front surround setting
with the same kind of sound field as the normal 5.1ch
arrangement. This provides greater freedom in speaker
placement to match different sound environments and
room conditions.
For example, the 3-spot front setting can be used in cases
where the listening room has no space for the placement
of surround (rear) speakers, or in cases where speaker
wiring to the rear would be particularly difficult.
To produce the most lifelike ambience from the 3-spot
front setting, original surround modes (Front Surround
Movie / Front Surround Music / Extra Power) are provided
thus allowing you to create genuine 5.1ch audio
ambience and a sense of spatial movement not possible
with conventional virtual surround systems (page 6).
5 Full input/output connector systems
Three digital input connector systems and one analog
input connector system are provided, allowing you to
connect sound from a variety of television monitors,
satellite tuners and other components (page 31).
6 Environmentally conscious design
The sub-woofer with its 5.1ch amplifier consumes less
than 0.5W of energy in standby mode, providing
economic, environmentally conscious operation.
Introduction.book Page 4 Wednesday, April 27, 2005 5:54 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
5
En
Section One
Contents
Section One
01 Features ...........................................................
4
02 Contents ..........................................................
5
What’s in the box
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
03 Speaker Setup Guide ......................................
6
Safety precautions when setting up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Home theater sound setup
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Wall mounting the surround speaker system
. . . . . . . 8
Attaching the brackets
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Before mounting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
04 Connecting up .................................................
9
Basic connections
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Using this system for TV audio
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
05 Remote control .............................................
14
Using the remote control
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Putting the batteries in the remote control
. . . . . . . 16
06 Before you start ............................................
17
Switching on
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Setting up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Basic operation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Watching a DVD
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Listening to a CD
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Watching a title recorded on the HDD
. . . . . . . . . 19
Listening to the radio
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Section Two
Operating instructions for the Audio
Multi-channel Receiver Subwoofer and
Speaker System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Section Three
Operating intructions for the DVD
Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
What’s in the box
Please confirm that the following items are all supplied.
Receiver subwoofer (SX–SW77) box:
Remote control (page 14)
AA/R6P dry cell batteries x2 (page 16)
Display unit (page 22)
Power cord (page 11)
AM loop antenna (page 9)
FM wire antenna (page 9)
Control cable (page 9)
Display cable (page 9)
Audio cable (red/white) (page 9)
Optical cable (page 9)
These operating instructions
Warranty card
DVD recorder (DVR–530H-AV) box:
Audio/video cable (red/white/yellow) (page 11)
G-LINK™ cable (page 49)
RF antenna cable (page 11)
Power cord (page 11)
Speakers (S–ST770) box:
Speakers (front x2, surround x2, center x1) (page 11)
Speaker cables x5 (page
12)
Non-skid pads (small) x4 (page 6)
Non-skid pads (large) x4 (page 6)
Front speaker stand bases x 2 (page 6)
Screws (for bases) x 6 (page 6)
Brackets
x 2 (page 7)
Screws (for brackets)
x 4 (page 7)
Mounting Brackets x 2 (page 8)
Screws (for mounting brackets) x 2 (page 8)
Introduction.book Page 5 Wednesday, April 27, 2005 5:54 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Speaker Setup Guide
6
En
Speaker Setup Guide
Safety precautions when setting up
When assembling the speakers, lay them down flat on
their side to avoid accidents or injury. Make sure to use a
stable surface when assembling, setting up, and placing
the speakers.
Caution
Please don’t use the any attachments with the front
speakers other than the brackets provided.
1 Attach the front speaker stand bases to the
stems using the screws provided.
Before securing the base to the stand, thread the speaker
wire through the holes provided on the base as shown
below. Then, once you have aligned the stem and base,
secure with the small screws at the points shown at right.
2 Attach the smaller non-skid pads to the base of
the center speaker. The four large non-skid pads are
for the receiver subwoofeer (as shown).
Use the supplied adhesive to attach 4 pads to the base of
each speaker.
Home theater sound setup
Depending on the size and characteristics of your room,
you can place your speakers in one of two ways using this
system:
1
Standard surround 5-spot setup
– This is a
standard multichannel surround sound speaker
setup for optimal 5.1 channel home theater sound.
Connect the speaker system.
Refer to
Connecting up
to connect the speakers properly.
Place them as shown in the diagram above for optimal
surround sound.
After placing your speakers, complete
Channel level
setting
on page 29 then refer to
Speaker distance setting
on page 29 to complete your surround sound setup.
Non-skid pads
(large) x 4
Non-skid pads
(small) x 4 Center speaker
Receiver
subwoofer
Note
1 See
About the listening modes
on page 24 for more on using the different listening modes with each speaker setup.
Front
left
Receiver subwoofer
Front
right
Surround
left
Surround
right
Center
Listening position
Introduction.book Page 6 Wednesday, April 27, 2005 5:54 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Speaker Setup Guide
7
En
English
Front surround 3-spot setup
– This setup is ideal
when rear surround speaker placement isn't possible
or you want to avoid running long speaker cables in
your listening area. Use this setup together with the
Front Surround modes to take advantage of wall and
ceiling reflections for a very realistic surround effect.
1 Place the surround speakers on top of the front
speakers, turn the surround speakers towards the
closest wall, lining the arrows up for optimal Front
Surround.
Turn each surround speaker so that the
arrow at the
base is lined up with the
FRONT SURROUND
arrow on
the front speaker. This is only necessary with the
FRTMOVIE
or
FRTMUSIC
modes. With
EXTPOWER
(Extra Power), the surround speakers should be in the
same direction as the front speakers (as shown below).
See
Using Front Surround
on page 25 for more
informations.
2 Secure in position with the brackets provided.
Line up the holes in the bracket with the holes in the
speakers, then secure with two screws at the points
shown below. Make sure you’ve matched the right and
left brackets with the speakers (as shown).
Please don’t use any attachments with the front
speakers other than the brackets provided.
3 Connect the speaker system.
Refer to
Connecting up
to connect the speakers properly.
4 Secure the speaker wire.
When you’re finished, thread the surround speaker cords
through the outlet on the back of the speaker stand and
through the base of the brackets as shown below.
Front
left
Receiver subwoofer
Front
right
Surround
left
Surround
right
Center
Listening position
EXTPOWER
FRTMOVIE / FRTMUSIC
EXTPOWER
FRTMOVIE / FRTMUSIC
Introduction.book Page 7 Wednesday, April 27, 2005 5:54 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Speaker Setup Guide
8
En
Wall mounting the surround speaker
system
Attaching the brackets
Make sure to tighten the supplied screw as securely
as possible when attaching the bracket to the back of
the speaker.
Please do not attach the brackets to the center
speakers.
Please do not attach the brackets to the tall front
speakers supplied with the S-ST770 speaker system.
Before mounting
Remember that the speaker system heavy and that
its weight could cause the wood screws to work
loose, or the wall material to fail to support it,
resulting in the speaker falling. Make sure that the
wall on which you intend to mount the speakers is
strong enough to support them. Do not mount on
plywood or soft surface walls.
Mounting screws are not supplied. Use screws that
are suitable for the wall material and that will support
the weight of the speaker.
If you are unsure of the qualities and strength of the
wall, consult a professional for advice.
Pioneer is not responsible for any accidents or
damage that result from improper installation.
Additional notes on speaker placement
Install the main front left and right speakers at an
equal distance from the TV.
For optimum effect, install the rear speakers slightly
above ear level.
Install the center speaker above or below the TV so
that the sound of the center channel is localized at
the TV screen.
When installing the center speaker on top of the TV,
be sure to secure it with suitable means. Otherwise,
the speaker may fall from the TV due to external
shocks such as earthquakes, endangering those
nearby or damaging the speaker.
This system’s speakers supplied with this system are
magnetically shielded. However, depending on the
installation location, color distortion may occur if the
speaker is installed extremely close to the screen of a
television set. If this happens case, turn the power
switch of the television set OFF, and turn it ON after
15 to 30 minutes. If the problem persists, place the
speaker system away from the television set.
Do not fix the front or center speakers, or the receiver
subwoofer to the wall or ceiling; they could cause
injury if they fell.
5 – 7 mm
Mounting screw (not supplied)
Bracket screw (supplied)
5 mm
10 mm
Introduction.book Page 8 Wednesday, April 27, 2005 5:54 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Connecting up
9
En
English
Connecting up
Basic connections
Important
When connecting this system or changing connections, be sure to switch power off and disconnect the power
cord from the wall socket.
After completing all connections, connect the power cord to the wall socket.
SYSTEM
CONNECTOR SPEAKERS DVD/DVR 2
(OPTICAL)
SUB WOOFER
AC IN
CENTER
SURROUND DVD/DVR 1
(COAXIAL)
DIGITAL
AUDIO INPUT
ANTENNA
FM
UNBAL AM
LOOP ANTENNA
75
ANALOG
DIGITAL
(OPTICAL)
RL
R
L
FRONT
RL
CONTROL
OUT
USE ONLY WITH
DISPLAY UNIT
DIGITAL
OUT
CONTROL
G-LINK
IN
OPTICAL
AV 1 (RGB) – TV
AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
L
R
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
YP
B
P
R
ANTENNA
IN OUT
AC IN
OUTPUT
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
L
R
INPUT 3
AM loop antenna
Display unit
Receiver subwoofer (SX-SW77)
3
Displa
y
cable
2
FM antenna
4
DVD Recorder
(DVR-530H-AV)
Optical cable Control cable
1
a b
Audio cable (red/white)
c
1
Introduction.book Page 9 Wednesday, April 27, 2005 5:54 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Connecting up
10
En
1 Connect the DVD recorder to the receiver
subwoofer.
a. Plug the control cable into the control jack on the
rear of the receiver subwoofer.
Plug the other end of the cable into the control jack
on the rear of the DVD recorder.
b. Plug the optical cable into the
DIGITAL AUDIO
INPUT (DVD/DVR 2)
jack on the rear of the receiver
subwoofer.
Plug the other end of the cable into the
OPTICAL
DIGITAL OUT
jack on the rear of the DVD recorder.
c. Plug the red/white audio cable into the
ANALOG
AUDIO INPUT
jack on the receiver subwoofer.
Plug the other end of the cable into the
AUDIO
OUTPUT
jack on the rear of the DVD recorder.
2 Connect the display unit to the receiver
subwoofer.
Plug the L-shaped end of the display cable into the
connector on the rear of the display unit.
Plug the other end of the display cable into
SYSTEM
CONNECTOR
jack on the receiver subwoofer.
3 Assemble the AM loop antenna.
a. Bend the stand in the direction indicated by the
arrow.
b. Clip the loop onto the stand.
c. If you want to fix to a wall or other surface, perform
step b after first securing the stand with screws.
It is recommended that you determine the reception
strength before securing the stand with the screws.
4 Connect the AM and FM antennas
1
.
a. Twist off the plastic insulation on the end of each
strand of the AM antenna.
b. Connect one wire of the AM loop antenna to each AM
antenna terminal.
For each terminal, press down on the tab to open;
insert the wire, then release to secure.
c. Push the FM antenna
2
plug onto the center pin of the
FM antenna socket.
Note that unless the audio and control
cables are connected, you can’t use the
remore control with the DVD recorder.
a b c
Note
1• Keep antenna cables away from other cables, the display unit, receiver subwoofer and DVD recorder.
• If reception with the supplied antenna is poor, See
Connecting external antennas
on page 32.
2• To ensure optimum reception, make sure the FM antenna is fully extended and not coiled or hanging at the rear of the unit.
2
1
Introduction.book Page 10 Wednesday, April 27, 2005 5:54 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Connecting up
11
En
English
Receiver subwoofer (SX-SW77)
SYSTEM
CONNECTOR SPEAKERS
DVD/DVR 2
SUB WOOFER
AC IN
CENTER
SURROUND DVD/DVR 1
DIGITAL
AUDIO INPUT
ANTENNA
FM
UNBAL AM
LOOP ANTENNA
75
ANALOG
OPTICAL
RL
R
L
FRONT
RL
CONTROL
OUT
USE ONLY WITH
DISPLAY UNIT
Front right
(Red)
Front left
(White)
Surround left
(Blue)
Surround right
(Gray)
Listening position
Center (Green)
8
5
6
To AC outlet
To AC outlet
DIGITAL
OUT
CONTROL
G-LINK
IN
OPTICAL
AV 1 (RGB) – TV
AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
L
R
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
YP
B
P
R
ANTENNA
IN OUT
AC IN
OUTPUT
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
L
R
INPUT 3
VIDEO
IN
7
6
TV
Antenna/cable TV
wall outlet
ANTENNA IN
ANTENNA IN
ANTENNA
OUT
DVD Recorder
To AC outlet
DIGITAL
OUT
CONTROL
G-LINK
IN
OPTICAL
AV 1 (RGB) – TV
AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
YP
B
P
R
ANTENNA
IN OUT
AC IN
OUTPUT
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
L
R
AUDIO
L
R
INPUT 3
8
7
VIDEO
IN
TV
Antenna/cable TV
wall outlet
ANTENNA IN
RF antenna
cable
RF antenna
cable
ANTENNA IN
ANTENNA
OUT
Audio/video cable*
(red/white/yellow)
DVD Recorder (DVR-530H-AV)
* Use just the yellow plug
of the three-pin audio/video
cable for this connection.
Introduction.book Page 11 Wednesday, April 27, 2005 5:54 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Connecting up
12
En
5 Connect each speaker.
Each speaker cable has a color-coded connector at one
end and two wires at the other end.
Twist and pull off the protective shields on each wire.
Connect the wires to the speaker. Match the colored
wired with the color-coded label (above the tabs),
then insert the colored wire into the red (
+
) side and
the other wire into the black (
) side.
Connect the other end to the color-coded speaker
terminals on the rear of the receiver subwoofer. Make
sure to insert completely.
The small lug at the wire-end of the speaker plug
should face up or down depending on whether it’s
being plugged into one of the upper or lower speaker
terminals. Please make sure to connect correctly.
6 Connect the suboofer cable.
Just below the subwoofer speaker, to the left of center,
you should see the subwoofer connecting cable. Plug
this into the
SUBWOOFER SPEAKER
terminal.
Caution
These speaker terminals carry
HAZARDOUS LIVE
voltage
. To prevent the risk of electric shock when
connecting or disconnecting the speaker cables,
disconnect the power cord before touching any
uninsulated parts.
Do not connect any speakers other than those
supplied to this system.
Do not connect this speaker system to any amplifier
other than the one supplied with this system.
Connection to any other amplifier may result in
malfunction or fire.
7 Connect the DVD recorder to your TV.
1
Connect the
VIDEO OUTPUT
jack to a video input on
your TV.
Use the yellow jack of the supplied audio/video cable
for the video connection.
8 Connect the power cord.
2
Connect the power cords to AC inlets on the receiver
subwoofer and DVD recorder.
Connect the power cords to a wall socket.
Color-coded wire
(Connect to speaker)
Color-coded connector
(Connect to rear panel)
Upper terminal Lower terminal
Note
1 Other types of video connection are possible. See page 47-page 51 for more information.
2• Do not use any power cord other than the one supplied with this system.
• Do not use the supplied power cord for any purpose other than connecting to this system.
Introduction.book Page 12 Wednesday, April 27, 2005 5:54 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Connecting up
13
En
English
Using this system for TV audio
If your TV has a stereo audio output you can connect it to
this system and enjoy surround TV sound.
1Connect the AUDIO OUTPUT jacks on your TV the
ANALOG AUDIO INPUT jacks on the receiver
subwoofer.
Use the supplied red/white stereo audio cable for this
connection. Make sure you match the left and right
outputs with their corresponding inputs for correct
stereo sound.
2Connect the VIDEO OUTPUT jack to a video input
on your TV.
Use the yellow jack of the supplied audio/video cable for
the video connection.
3 Connect the AUDIO OUTPUT jacks to the
corresponding audio inputs on your TV.
Use the red and white jacks of the supplied audio/video
cable for the audio connection. Make sure you match the
left and right outputs with their corresponding inputs for
correct stereo sound.
TV
DIGITAL
OUT
CONTROL
G-LINK
IN
OPTICAL
AV 1 (RGB) – TV
AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
L
R
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
YP
B
P
R
ANTENNA
IN OUT
AC IN
OUTPUT
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
L
R
INPUT 3
SYSTEM
CONNECTOR SPEAKERS
DVD/DVR 2
SUB WOOFER
AC IN
CENTER
SURROUND DVD/DVR 1
DIGITAL
AUDIO INPUT
ANALOG
OPTICAL
RL
R
L
FRONT
RL
CONTROL
OUT
USE ONLY WITH
DISPLAY UNIT
VIDEO
INPUT
AUDIO
INPUT
AUDIO
OUTPUT
2
1
3
Introduction.book Page 13 Wednesday, April 27, 2005 5:54 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Remote control
14
En
Remote control
Important
Functions printed in green on the remote control are
accessed by pressing the button indicated while
holding down the
SHIFT
button.
1 MUTE
Press to mute all audio from the speakers. Press again to
cancel and restore the sound.
2
RECORDER
Press to switch the recorder on or into standby.
3
RECEIVER
Press to switch the receiver on or into standby.
4 VOLUME +/–
Use to adjust the volume.
5 Function select buttons
HDD
(page 60)
Press to select the hard disk (HDD) for recording or
playback. The receiver subwoofer’s audio input is
also switched to
DVD/DVR2
.
1
DVD
(page 60)
Press to select the DVD for recording or playback.
The receiver subwoofer’s audio input is also switched
to
DVD/DVR2
.
1
FM/AM
(page 27)
Press to select the built-in radio tuner.
AUDIO INPUT
(page 31)
Press repeatedly to select one of the receiver
subwoofer’s audio inputs (
DVD/DVR1
,
DVD/DVR2
,
DIGITAL
or
ANALOG
).
6 CHANNEL +/–
(page 61)
Press to change the channel of the built-in TV tuner.
7 Numeric buttons and CLEAR
Use the number buttons for track/chapter/title selection;
channel selection, and so on.
Use
CLEAR
to clear an entry and start again.
8 VIDEO INPUT
(page 87)
Press to change the DVD recorder input for recording
and playback.
9 HELP
Press for help on how to use the current GUI screen.
10 GUIDE Plus+™ system controls
GUIDE
Press to display the GUIDE Plus+™ screen; press
again to exit.
+ SHIFT: INFO
Press to see additional information for the
highlighted item in GUIDE Plus+™.
11 DISC NAVIGATOR
(page 92, 111)
/ TOP MENU
(page 63)
Press to display the Disc Navigator screen, or the top
menu if a DVD-Video disc is loaded.
+ SHIFT: RDS DISP
Changes RDS displays (page 28).
VOLUME
+
MUTE
RECORDER RECEIVER
TOP MENU
RDS DISP
SYSTEM
SETUP
DISPLAYTEST TONE
ST +ST –
TUNE +
TUNE –
RETURN
DISC NAVIGATOR DVD MENU
HOME
MENU
AUDIO
SURROUND ADVANCED SOUND TIMER REC
SUBTITLE ANGLE PLAY MODE
SHIFT
VIDEO INPUT
INFO
GUIDE
HDD DVD
FM/AM AUDIO INPUT
HELP
TV/DVD
TV DIRECT
REC
INPUT
TV
ENTER
CLEAR
TV CONTROL
CHANNEL VOLUME
REC
PREV NEXT STEP/SLOW
STOP REC REC MODE ONE TOUCH
COPY
CHANNEL
SKIPCMBACK
1
3
6
12
15
2
4
9
11
13
14
16
17
21
5
19
10
8
18
20
22
7
Note
1 If the recorder is set to remote mode 2 or 3, the subwoofer’s audio input will not be switched. See also
Remote Control Mode
on page 136.
Introduction.book Page 14 Wednesday, April 27, 2005 5:54 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Remote control
15
En
English
12 DVD MENU
(page 63)
Press to display the disc menu if a DVD-Video disc is
loaded.
When in the GUIDE Plus+™ system, use to jump
directly to the Menu bar.
+ SHIFT: SYSTEM SETUP
Use to access the menu system for surround sound
setup, tuner settings and so on (page 23, 27, 28, 33).
13
///
(cursor buttons) and ENTER
Use to navigate all DVD recorder on-screen displays.
Press
ENTER
to select the currently highlighted
option.
Use together with the
SHIFT
button to navigate the
receiver subwoofer menus.
14 HOME MENU
(page 65)
Press to display the Home Menu, from which you can
navigate many the functions of the system.
+ SHIFT: TEST TONE
Use to output the test tone (for speaker setup)
(page 30).
15 RETURN
Press to go back one level in the on-screen menu or
display.
+ SHIFT: DISPLAY
(page 65)
Displays/changes the on-screen information
displays.
16 Playback controls
(page 62)
/
(page 94)
Press to start reverse or forward scanning. Press
again to change the speed.
Press to start playback.
Press to pause playback or recording.
Press to stop playback.
CM BACK (commercial back)
Press repeatedly to skip progressively backward
through the audio or video playing.
CM SKIP (commercial skip)
Press repeatedly to skip progressively forward
through the audio or video playing.
PREV / NEXT
Press to skip to the previous or next title/chapter/
track/folder; or to display the previous or next menu
page.
When GUIDE Plus+™ is displayed, use to display the
previous/next page.
STEP/SLOW
(page 94)
During playback, press to start slow-motion
playback; while paused, press to show the previous
or next video frame.
When GUIDE Plus+™ is displayed, use to display the
previous/next day.
17 Recording controls
(page 60)
REC
Press to start recording. Press repeatedly to set the
recording time in blocks of 30 mins.
STOP REC
Press to stop recording.
REC MODE
(page 81)
Press repeatedly to change the recording mode
(picture quality).
18 ONE TOUCH COPY
(page 101)
Press to start One Touch Copy of the currently playing
title to DVD or the HDD.
19 GUIDE Plus+™ Action buttons, DVD playback
functions and surround sound mode/sound
enhancement buttons
When in the GUIDE Plus+™ system, these buttons
act as the Red, Green, Yellow and Blue Action
buttons (the functions of these buttons change
according to the GUIDE Plus+™ Area). (page 68)
AUDIO
(page 61, 99)
Changes the audio language or channel. (When no
disc is playing or recording, press to change the
tuner audio.)
+ SHIFT: SURROUND
Use to select a Surround mode (page 24).
SUBTITLE
(page 98)
Displays/changes the subtitles included in
multilingual DVD-Video discs.
+ SHIFT: ADVANCED
Use to select an Advanced Surround mode (page 25).
ANGLE
(page 100)
Switches camera angles on discs with multi-angle
scenes.
Introduction.book Page 15 Wednesday, April 27, 2005 5:54 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Remote control
16
En
+ SHIFT: SOUND
(page 26)
Press to access the sound menu, from which you can
adjust bass and treble, etc.
PLAY MODE
(page 95)
Press to display the Play Mode menu (for features
such as search, repeat and program play).
+ SHIFT: TIMER REC
(page 69)
Press to set a timer recording from the GUIDE
Plus+™ system.
20 TV CONTROL
(page 139)
After setting up, use these controls to control your TV.
21 SHIFT
Press to access functions on the remote printed in green.
22 TV DIRECT REC
(page 82)
Press to start recording whatever channel your TV is
set to.
+
SHIFT
:
TV/DVD
(page 62)
Press to switch between ‘TV mode’, in which you get
the picture and sound from the TV’s tuner, and ‘DVD
mode’, in which you get picture and sound from the
system’s tuner (or an external input).
Using the remote control
Please keep in mind the following when using the remote
control:
Make sure that there are no obstacles between the
remote and the remote sensor on the unit.
Remote operation may become unreliable if strong
sunlight or fluorescent light is shining on the unit’s
remote sensor.
Remote controllers for different devices can interfere
with each other. Avoid using remotes for other
equipment located close to this unit.
Replace the batteries when you notice a fall off in the
operating range of the remote.
When the batteries run down or you change the
batteries, the TV preset codes are automatically reset.
See
Setting up the remote to control your TV
on
page 139 to reset them.
If you changed the remote control mode, this will also
be reset when you change the batteries. See also
Remote Control Mode
on page 136.
Use within the operating range in front of the remote
control sensor on the display unit, as shown.
Putting the batteries in the remote
control
1 Open the battery compartment cover on the
back of the remote control.
2 Insert two AA/R6P batteries into the battery
compartment following the indications (
,
) inside
the compartment.
3 Close the cover.
Caution
Incorrect use of batteries can result in hazards such
as leakage and bursting. Please observe the
following:
Don’t mix new and old batteries together.
Don’t use different kinds of battery together—
although they may look similar, different batteries
may have different voltages.
Make sure that the plus and minus ends of each
battery match the indications in the battery
compartment.
Remove batteries from equipment that isn’t going to
be used for a month or more.
When disposing of used batteries, please comply
with governmental regulations or environmental
public instruction’s rules that apply in your country or
area.
30 30
7m
Introduction.book Page 16 Wednesday, April 27, 2005 5:54 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Before you start
17
En
English
Before you start
Switching on
The DVD recorder and receiver subwoofer have separate power switches. The power switch for the receiver subwoofer
is located on the display unit.
The table below shows what needs to be switched on for
various system functions:
Setting up
After connecting and installing the DVD recorder and
receiver subwoofer, complete the steps below to set the
system up for use.
DVD recorder
Set the date and time, TV channel tuning and the type
of TV in the Setup Navigator (page 55).
Receiver subwoofer
Switch off the display demo mode (page 23).
Complete the Room Setup to optimize the surround
sound (page 23).
DVD Recorder
PULL-OPEN
REC
STANDBY/ON
HDD/DVD
ONE TOUCH COPY
OPEN/CLOSE
Remote control
VOLUME +
MUTE
RECORDER RECEIVER
TOP MENU
RDS DISP
SYSTEM
SETUP
DISPLAYTEST TONE
ST +ST –
TUNE +
TUNE –
RETURN
DISC NAVIGATOR DVD MENU
HOME
MENU
AUDIO
SURROUND ADVANCED SOUND TIMER REC
SUBTITLE ANGLE PLAY MODE
SHIFT
VIDEO INPUT
INFO
GUIDE
HDD DVD
FM/AM AUDIO INPUT
HELP
TV/DVD
TV DIRECT
REC
INPUT
TV
ENTER
CLEAR
TV CONTROL
CHANNEL VOLUME
REC
PREV NEXT STEP/SLOW
STOP REC REC MODE ONE TOUCH
COPY
CHANNEL
SKIPCMBACK
Display unit
STANDBY/ON
– VOLUME + AUDIO INPUT SURROUND
Function
Display unit
DVD
recorder
DVD playback On On
CD playback On On
HDD playback On On
Radio On Off
Timer recording Off On
Introduction.book Page 17 Wednesday, April 27, 2005 5:54 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Before you start
18
En
Basic operation
This manual is split into to parts, one covering using the
receiver subwoofer, the other using the DVD recorder.
Below are some common operations and where to find
them explained in this manual.
Watching a DVD
Remember that when using the remote to control the
DVD recorder, you should point the remote towards the
display unit, not the recorder itslelf.
1 Switch on the display unit (receiver subwoofer).
2 Switch on the DVD recorder.
3 Switch on your TV.
Turn on your TV and make sure that it is set to the correct
video input.
4 Press DVD.
5 Press
OPEN/CLOSE on the DVD recorder to
open the disc tray.
6 Load a disc.
Load a disc with the label side facing up, using the disc
tray guide to align the disc (if you’re loading a double-
sided DVD disc, load it with the side you want to play
face-down).
7 Press
(play) to start playback.
See
Basic playback
on page 62 for more on playing discs.
8 Adjust the volume.
9 Adjust the sound using the surround effects
See
Listening to your system
on page 24 for details.
VOLUME
+
MUTE
RECORDER RECEIVER
TOP MENU
RDS DISP
SYSTEM
SETUP
DISPLAYTEST TONE
ST +ST –
TUNE +
TUNE –
RETURN
DISC NAVIGATOR DVD MENU
HOME
MENU
VIDEO INPUT
INFO
GUIDE
HDD DVD
FM/AM AUDIO INPUT
HELP
ENTER
CLEAR
REC
PREV NEXT STEP/SLOW
STOP REC REC MODE ONE TOUCH
COPY
CHANNEL

SKIPCMBACK
Press to stop playback.
You can resume playback from the same
point by pressing
. (Press
again to
cancel the resume function.)
Pauses playback, or restarts playback
when paused.
Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly
to increase the scanning speed.
Introduction.book Page 18 Wednesday, April 27, 2005 5:54 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Before you start
19
En
English
Listening to a CD
1 Switch on the display unit (receiver subwoofer).
2 Switch on the DVD recorder.
3 Press DVD.
4 Load a CD and start playback
(page 64)
.
5 Adjust the volume.
6 Adjust the sound using the surround effects
(page 24)
.
Watching a title recorded on the HDD
1 Switch on the display unit (receiver subwoofer).
2 Switch on the DVD recorder.
3 Switch on your TV.
4 Press HDD.
5 Start playback of the HDD title
(page 63)
.
6 Adjust the volume.
7 Adjust the sound using the surround effects
(page 24)
.
Listening to the radio
1 Switch on the display unit (receiver subwoofer).
2 Tune to a station
(page 27)
.
3 Adjust the volume.
4 Adjust the sound using the surround effects
(page 24)
.
Introduction.book Page 19 Wednesday, April 27, 2005 5:54 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
20
En
SX-SW77.book Page 20 Wednesday, April 27, 2005 6:05 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
21
En
Section Two
Contents
01 Controls and displays
Display unit
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Display
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
02 Getting started
System demo setting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Using the Room Setup
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
03 Listening to your system
About the listening modes
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Auto listening mode
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Listening in surround sound
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Using Front Surround
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Using Advanced Surround
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Listening in stereo
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Enhancing dialogue
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Adjusting the bass and treble
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Boosting the bass level
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
04 Listening to the radio
Listening to the radio
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Improving poor FM reception
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Improving poor AM sound
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Memorizing stations
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Listening to station presets
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
An introduction to RDS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Displaying RDS information
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Searching for RDS programs
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
05 Surround sound settings
Using the System Setup menu
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Channel level setting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Speaker distance setting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Dynamic Range Control
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Dual mono setting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Adjusting the channel levels using the test tone
. . . 30
06 Other connections
Connecting auxiliary components
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Listening to an external audio source
. . . . . . . . . . . 31
Connecting external antennas
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
07 Additional information
Setting the sleep timer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Dimming the display
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
DTS CD setting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Resetting the system
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Installation and maintenance
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Hints on installation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
General
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Tuner
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Error Messages
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Glossary
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Specifications
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
SX-SW77.book Page 21 Wednesday, April 27, 2005 6:05 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Controls and displays
01
22
En
Chapter 1
Controls and displays
Display unit
1
STANDBY/ON
Press to switch the system on/into standby.
2 Front panel display
See below for details.
3 VOLUME buttons
Use to adjust the volume.
4 AUDIO INPUT
(page 31)
Press repeatedly to select one of the external audio
inputs (
DVD/DVR1
,
DVD/DVR2
,
DIGITAL
or
ANALOG
).
5 SURROUND
Use to select a Surround mode (page 24).
6 IR remote sensor
(page 16)
Display
1
DTS
Lights during playback of a DTS source (page 24).
2
F.SURR.
Lights when the Front Surround listening mode is
selected (page 25).
3 Tuner indicators
– Lights when a broadcast is being received.
– Lights when a stereo FM broadcast is being
received in auto stereo mode.
– Lights when FM mono reception is selected.
– Lights when in one of the RDS display or search
modes.
4 kHz / MHz
Indicates the frequency unit shown in the character
display (
kHz
for AM,
MHz
for FM).
5 Character display
6
Lights when sleep timer is active (page 33).
7
2
PL II
Lights during Dolby Pro Logic II decoding (page 24).
8
2
D
Lights during playback of a Dolby Digital source
(page 24).
STANDBY/ON
– VOLUME + AUDIO INPUT SURROUND
1 4 652 3
2PL
2DkHz
MHz
DTS F.SURR.
4 3
2
678 5
1
SX-SW77.book Page 22 Wednesday, April 27, 2005 6:05 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Getting started 02
23
En
English
Chapter 2
Getting started
System demo setting
Switches the automatic demo feature on or off (this
starts when you plug in for the first time):
1 Switch the system into standby.
2Press SHIFT + SYSTEM SETUP.
3Hold SHIFT and use the
/
buttons to select
DEMO from the menu, then press SHIFT + ENTER.
4Hold SHIFT and use the
/
buttons to select a
setting, then press SHIFT + ENTER
.
Select from:
DEMO ON
– Switches the demo feature on.
DEMO OFF
– Switches the demo feature off.
Using the Room Setup
After you have set up your speakers to your liking (see
Home theater sound setup
on page 6), make sure you
calibrate your system for surround sound. This is a quick
and easy way to get good surround sound for your room.
For a more detailed surround sound setup, see
Using the
System Setup menu
on page 29.
1 If the system isn’t already on,
RECEIVER to
switch on.
2Press SHIFT + SYSTEM SETUP.
3Hold SHIFT and use the
/
buttons to select
ROOM SET from the menu, then press SHIFT +
ENTER.
4Hold SHIFT and use the
/
buttons to select a
room size setting, then press SHIFT + ENTER
.
Select from:
ROOM S
– Smaller than average room (approx. 3.5 x
4.5m)
ROOM M
– Average room (approx. 5.5 x 6.0m)
ROOM L
– Larger than average room (approx. 7.5 x
9.0m)
5Hold SHIFT and use the
/
buttons to select a
seating position setting, then press SHIFT + ENTER.
Select from:
SEAT FWD
– If you are nearer to the front speakers
than the surround speakers
SEAT MID
– If you are equal distance from the front
and surround speakers
SEATBACK
– If you are nearer to the surround
speakers than the front speakers
TOP MENU
RDS DISP
SYSTEM
SETUP
DISPLAYTEST TONE
ST +ST –
TUNE +
TUNE –
RETURN
DISC NAVIGATOR DVD MENU
HOME
MENU
AUDIO
SURROUND ADVANCED SOUND TIMER REC
SUBTITLE ANGLE PLAY MODE
SHIFT
VIDEO INPUT
INFO
GUIDE
HELP
TV/DVD
TV DIRECT
REC
INPUT
TV
ENTER
CLEAR
TV CONTROL
CHANNEL VOLUME
REC
PREV NEXT STEP/SLOW
STOP REC
REC MODE ONE TOUCH
COPY
SKIP
CM
BACK
SX-SW77.book Page 23 Wednesday, April 27, 2005 6:05 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Listening to your system
03
24
En
Chapter 3
Listening to your system
About the listening modes
As explained in
Home theater sound setup
on page 6,
there are two basic surround speaker setup options
available. You can select any of the listening modes
regardless of speaker placement, but you will get the best
surround effect by using the listening modes in
conjunction with your speaker setup:
Standard surround 5-spot setup
– Use the
Standard (
Listening in surround sound
below) and
Advanced (
Using Advanced Surround
on page 25)
surround listening modes with this setup.
Front surround 3-spot setup
– See
Using Front
Surround
on page 25 for the options available with
this speaker setup.
Auto listening mode
The Auto listening mode is the simplest way to listen to
any source as it was mastered: the output from the
speakers mirrors the channels in the source material.
Press SHIFT+SURROUND to select the AUTO
listening mode.
If the source is Dolby Digital or DTS, the front panel
2
D
or
DTS
indicator lights.
You can also use the
SURROUND
button on the
display unit to change the listening mode.
Listening in surround sound
You can listen to stereo or multichannel sources in
surround sound. Surround sound is generated from
stereo sources using one of the Dolby Pro Logic
decoding modes.
Press SHIFT+SURROUND repeatedly to select a
listening mode.
You can also use the
SURROUND
button on the
display unit to change the listening mode.
The choices that appear in the display will vary according
to the type of source that’s playing.
If the source is Dolby Digital or DTS, the front panel
2
D
or
DTS
indicator lights.
AUTO
– Auto listening mode (see above)
PROLOGIC
– (Dolby Pro Logic) 4.1 channel surround
sound for use with any two-channel source
MOVIE
– (Dolby Pro Logic II Movie) 5.1 channel
surround sound, especially suited to movie sources,
for use with any two-channel source
MUSIC
– (Dolby Pro Logic II Music) 5.1 channel
surround sound, especially suited to music sources,
for use with any two-channel source
STEREO
– See
Listening in stereo
on page 25
AUDIO
SURROUND ADVANCED SOUND TIMER REC
SUBTITLE ANGLE PLAY MODE
SHIFT
TV/DVD
TV DIRECT
REC
INPUTTV
TV CONTROL
CHANNEL VOLUME
REC STOP REC
REC MODE ONE TOUCH
COPY
AUDIO
SURROUND ADVANCED SOUND TIMER REC
SUBTITLE ANGLE PLAY MODE
SHIFT
TV/DVD
TV DIRECT
REC
INPUTTV
TV CONTROL
CHANNEL VOLUME
REC STOP REC
REC MODE ONE TOUCH
COPY
SX-SW77.book Page 24 Wednesday, April 27, 2005 6:05 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Listening to your system 03
25
En
English
Using Front Surround
The Front Surround modes are effective when you are
using the Front surround 3-spot speaker setup as
described in
Home theater sound setup
on page 6. The
surround speakers should be placed on top of the front
speakers and oriented either towards the walls, or
straight ahead, depending on which mode you are using
(see below).
Press SHIFT+ADVANCED to select a Front
Surround mode.
Press repeatedly to select
FRTMOVIE
,
FRTMUSIC
or
EXTPOWER
.
If you have selected
FRTMOVIE
or
FRTMUSIC
, turn
each surround speaker so that the
arrow at the
base is lined up with the
FRONT SURROUND
arrow on the front speaker. With
EXTPOWER
(Extra
Power), the surround speakers should point in the
same direction as the front speakers. (as shown
below)
Using Advanced Surround
The Advanced Surround effects can be used with any
multichannel or stereo source for a variety of additional
surround sound effects.
1
Press SHIFT+ADVANCED to select an Advanced
Surround mode.
Press repeatedly to select
ADVMOVIE
,
ADVMUSIC
,
EXPANDED
,
TV SURR.
,
SPORTS
,
GAME
or
5 STEREO
.
Listening in stereo
You can listen to any source—stereo or multichannel—in
stereo. When playing a multichannel source, all
channels are downmixed to the front left/right speakers
and the subwoofer.
Press SHIFT+SURROUND repeatedly until STEREO
shows in the display.
You can also use the
SURROUND
button on the
display unit to change the listening mode.
AUDIO
SURROUND ADVANCED SOUND TIMER REC
SUBTITLE ANGLE PLAY MODE
SHIFT
TV/DVD
TV DIRECT
REC
INPUTTV
TV CONTROL
CHANNEL VOLUME
REC STOP REC
REC MODE ONE TOUCH
COPY
EXTPOWER
FRTMOVIE / FRTMUSIC
Note
1 The 5-spot setup described in
Home theater sound setup
on page 6 should be used with these effects.
AUDIO
SURROUND ADVANCED SOUND TIMER REC
SUBTITLE ANGLE PLAY MODE
SHIFT
TV/DVD
TV DIRECT
REC
INPUTTV
TV CONTROL
CHANNEL VOLUME
REC STOP REC
REC MODE ONE TOUCH
COPY
AUDIO
SURROUND ADVANCED SOUND TIMER REC
SUBTITLE ANGLE PLAY MODE
SHIFT
TV/DVD
TV DIRECT
REC
INPUTTV
TV CONTROL
CHANNEL VOLUME
REC STOP REC
REC MODE ONE TOUCH
COPY
SX-SW77.book Page 25 Wednesday, April 27, 2005 6:05 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Listening to your system
03
26
En
Enhancing dialogue
The Dialogue Enhancement feature is designed to make
the dialogue stand out from other background sounds in
a TV or movie soundtrack.
1Press SHIFT+SOUND.
2Hold SHIFT and use the
/
buttons to select
DIALOGUE then press SHIFT+ENTER.
3Hold SHIFT and use the
/
buttons to select the
amount dialogue enhancement then press
SHIFT+ENTER to confirm.
Select between
OFF
,
MID
or
MAX
.
Adjusting the bass and treble
Use the bass and treble controls to adjust the overall
tone.
1Press SHIFT+SOUND.
2Hold SHIFT and use the
/
buttons to select
BASS or TREBLE then press SHIFT+ENTER.
3Hold SHIFT and use the
/
buttons to adjust
the sound then press SHIFT+ENTER to confirm.
Boosting the bass level
There are two bass modes you can use to enhance the
bass in a source.
1Press SHIFT+SOUND.
2Hold SHIFT and use the
/
buttons to select
BASSMODE then press SHIFT+ENTER.
3Hold SHIFT and use the
/
buttons to adjust
the sound then press SHIFT+ENTER to confirm.
Select between
OFF
,
MUSIC
or
CINEMA
.
TOP MENU
RDS DISP
SYSTEM
SETUP
DISPLAYTEST TONE
ST +ST –
TUNE +
TUNE –
RETURN
DISC NAVIGATOR DVD MENU
HOME
MENU
AUDIO
SURROUND ADVANCED SOUND TIMER REC
SUBTITLE ANGLE PLAY MODE
SHIFT
INFO
GUIDE
HELP
TV/DVD
TV DIRECT
REC
INPUT
TV
ENTER
CLEAR
TV CONTROL
CHANNEL VOLUME
REC
PREV NEXT STEP/SLOW
STOP REC
REC MODE ONE TOUCH
COPY
SKIP
CM
BACK
SX-SW77.book Page 26 Wednesday, April 27, 2005 6:05 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Listening to the radio 04
27
En
English
Chapter 4
Listening to the radio
Listening to the radio
The tuner can receive both FM and AM broadcasts, and
lets you memorize your favorite stations so you don’t have
to manually tune in every time you want to listen.
1 Press
FM/AM
to switch to the tuner, then press
repeatedly to select the FM or AM band.
The display shows the band and frequency.
2 Tune to a frequency.
There are three tuning modes—manual, auto, and high-
speed:
Manual tuning
: Press
SHIFT+TUNE +/–
repeatedly
to change the displayed frequency.
Auto tuning
: Press and hold
SHIFT+TUNE +/–
until
the frequency display starts to move, then release.
The tuner will stop on the next station it finds. Repeat
to keep searching.
High-speed tuning
: Press and hold
SHIFT+TUNE +/
until the frequency display starts to move rapidly.
Keep the button held down until you reach the
frequency you want. If necessary, fine tune the
frequency using the manual tuning method.
Improving poor FM reception
If you’re listening to an FM station in stereo but the
reception is weak, you can improve the sound quality by
switching to mono.
1 Tune to an FM radio station then press
SHIFT+SYSTEM SETUP
.
2 Hold
SHIFT
and use the
/
buttons to choose FM
MODE then press
SHIFT+ENTER
.
3 Hold
SHIFT
and use the
/
buttons to select
FM
MONO
then press
SHIFT+ENTER
.
The mono indicator ( ) lights when the tuner is in mono
reception mode.
Select
FM AUTO
above to switch back to auto-stereo
mode (the stereo indicator ( ) lights when receiving a
stereo broadcast).
Improving poor AM sound
The simplest way to improve the sound quality of AM
radio is to make sure that the TV in the room is switched
off. Also try changing the position and direction of the
AM loop antenna.
Changing the noise cut mode
If you find that the sound quality is bad even after trying
the above, you may be able to improve it using a different
noise cut mode. Just choose the one that sounds best.
1 Tune to an AM radio station then press
SHIFT+SYSTEM SETUP.
2
Hold
SHIFT
and use the
/
buttons
to choose
NOISECUT then press SHIFT+ENTER.
3
Hold
SHIFT
and use the
/
buttons
to select a
Noise cut mode (1, 2 or 3) then press SHIFT+ENTER.
Memorizing stations
You can save up to 30 station presets so that you always
have easy access to your favorite stations without having
to tune in manually each time.
1 Tune to an AM or FM radio station.
For the FM band, select mono or auto-stereo reception as
necessary. This setting is saved along with the preset.
VOLUME
+
MUTE
RECORDER RECEIVER
TOP MENU
RDS DISP
SYSTEM
SETUP
DISPLAYTEST TONE
ST +ST –
TUNE +
TUNE –
RETURN
DISC NAVIGATOR DVD MENU
HOME
MENU
AUDIO
SURROUND ADVANCED SOUND TIMER REC
SUBTITLE ANGLE PLAY MODE
SHIFT
VIDEO INPUT
INFO
GUIDE
HDD DVD
FM/AM AUDIO INPUT
HELP
TV/DVD
TV DIRECT
REC
INPUT
TV
ENTER
CLEAR
TV CONTROL
CHANNEL VOLUME
REC
PREV NEXT STEP/SLOW
STOP REC
REC MODE ONE TOUCH
COPY
CHANNEL

SKIP
CM
BACK
SX-SW77.book Page 27 Wednesday, April 27, 2005 6:05 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Listening to the radio
04
28
En
2 Press
SHIFT+SYSTEM SETUP
.
3 Hold
SHIFT
and use the
/
buttons to choose
ST.MEM. then press
SHIFT+ENTER
.
4 Hold
SHIFT
and use the
/
buttons to select the
station preset you want then press
SHIFT+ENTER
.
Listening to station presets
1 Make sure the tuner function is selected.
2 Use the
SHIFT
+
/
buttons to select a station
preset.
You can also use the number buttons (while holding
SHIFT
) to do this.
An introduction to RDS
Radio Data System (RDS) is a system used by most FM
radio stations to provide listeners with various kinds of
information—the name of the station and the kind of
show they’re broadcasting, for example.
One feature of RDS is that you can search by type of
program. For example, you can search for a station that’s
broadcasting a show with the program type,
JAZZ
.
You can search the following program types:
1
Displaying RDS information
Use the
SHIFT+RDS DISP
button to display the different
types of RDS information available.
2
Press
SHIFT+RDS DISP
for RDS information.
Each press changes the display as follows:
Radio Text (
RT
) – Messages sent by the radio station.
For example, a talk radio station may provide a phone
number as RT.
Program Service Name (
PS
) – The name of the radio
station.
Program Type (
PTY
) – This indicates the kind of
program currently being broadcast.
SEARCH
– PTY search (see below)
Current tuner frequency
Searching for RDS programs
You can search for a program type listed above.
1 Press the
FM/AM
button for the FM band.
3
2 Press
SHIFT+RDS DISP
repeatedly until SEARCH
appears in the display.
3 Hold
SHIFT
and use the
/
buttons to select the
program type you want to hear.
4 Press
SHIFT+ENTER
to start the search.
The system searches the station presets for a match. If it
finds one, searching stops for 5 sec.
5 If you want to keep listening to the station, press
SHIFT+ENTER
within the 5 seconds.
If you don’t press
SHIFT+ENTER
, searching resumes.
NEWS –
News
AFFAIRS
– Current Affairs
INFO
– General Information
SPORT
– Sport
EDUCATE
– Educational
DRAMA
– Radio plays, etc.
CULTURE
– National or
regional culture, theater,
etc.
SCIENCE
– Science and
technology
VARIED
– Usually talk-
based material, such as
quiz shows or interviews.
POP M
– Pop music
ROCK M
– Rock music
EASY M
– Easy listening
LIGHT M
– ‘Light’ classical
music
CLASSICS
– ‘Serious’
classical music
OTHER M
– Music not
fitting above categories
WEATHER
– Weather
reports
FINANCE
– Stock market
reports, commerce,
trading, etc.
CHILDREN
– Programs for
children
SOCIAL
– Social affairs
RELIGION
– Programs
concerning religion
PHONE IN
– Public
expressing their views by
phone
TRAVEL
– Holiday-type
travel rather than traffic
announcements
LEISURE
– Leisure
interests and hobbies
JAZZ
– Jazz
COUNTRY
– Country music
NATION M
– Popular
music in a language other
than English
OLDIES
– Popular music
from the ’50s and ’60s
FOLK M
– Folk music
DOCUMENT
– Documentary
Note
1 In addition, there are three other program types,
TEST
,
ALARM
, and
NO TYPE
.
ALARM and TEST are used for emergency announcements. You can’t
search for these, but the tuner will switch automatically to this RDS broadcast signal. NO TYPE appears when a program type cannot be found.
2• If any noise is picked up while displaying the RT scroll, some characters may be displayed incorrectly.
• If you see NO DATA in the RT display, it means no RT data is sent from the broadcast station. The display will automatically switch to the PS data
display (if no PS data, the frequency is displayed).
• In the PTY display, NO DATA or NO TYPE may be shown. In this case, the PS display is shown after a few seconds.
3 RDS is only possible in the FM band.
SX-SW77.book Page 28 Wednesday, April 27, 2005 6:05 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Surround sound settings 05
29
En
English
Chapter 5
Surround sound settings
Using the System Setup menu
From the System Setup menu you can access all the
surround sound settings of the system
1
, including
channel levels, speaker distances, dynamic range
adjustment and dual mono audio playback.
Use the following buttons to use the System Setup menu.
Channel level setting
The Room Setup feature (see page 23) is designed to give
you a basic surround sound setup very quickly by setting
the channel levels (and speaker distances) for you
according to your room size and seating position. If you
need to adjust the relative channel levels in more detail,
you can do it here.
This method of setting the channel levels allows you to
listen to a source and adjust the levels of each playback
channel. Note that the channel level settings for stereo
playback are independent of the settings for surround
sound playback.
A further method of setting the channel levels is to use
the test tone method. See
Adjusting the channel levels
using the test tone
on page 30 for more on this.
1 Select stereo or multichannel playback for a
source.
2Press SHIFT+SYSTEM SETUP.
3Hold SHIFT and use the
/
buttons to select
CH LEVEL, then press SHIFT+ENTER.
4Use SHIFT +
/
to select a channel; SHIFT +
/
to adjust the level of that channel.
5 Press SHIFT+ENTER when you’re finished.
If you use the Room Setup feature again, it will
overwrite the settings you have made here.
Speaker distance setting
The Room Setup feature (see page 23) is designed to give
you a basic surround sound setup very quickly by setting
the speaker distances (and channel levels) for you
according to your room size and seating position. If you
need to adjust the speaker distance settings in more
detail, you can do it here.
Set the distance of each speaker from your normal
listening position.
1Press SHIFT+SYSTEM SETUP.
2Hold SHIFT and use the
/
buttons to select
DISTANCE, then press SHIFT+ENTER.
3Use SHIFT +
/
to select a speaker; SHIFT +
/
to adjust the distance.
Adjust the following speakers:
L
– Front left speaker
C
– Center speaker
R
– Front right speaker
SR
– Surround right speaker
SL
– Surround left speaker
SW
– Subwoofer
Each speaker can be adjusted between
0.3 m
~
9.0 m
.
4 Press SHIFT+ENTER when you’re finished.
If you use the Room Setup feature again, it will
overwrite the settings you have made here.
Note
1There are other settings you can adjust from the System Setup menu; these are explained in
Listening to the radio
on page 27 and
Additional
information
on page 33.
TOP MENU
RDS DISP
SYSTEM
SETUP
DISPLAYTEST TONE
ST +ST –
TUNE +
TUNE –
RETURN
DISC NAVIGATOR DVD MENU
HOME
MENU
AUDIO
SURROUND ADVANCED SOUND TIMER REC
SUBTITLE ANGLE PLAY MODE
SHIFT
INFO
GUIDE
HELP
TV/DVD
TV DIRECT
REC
INPUT
TV
ENTER
CLEAR
TV CONTROL
CHANNEL VOLUME
REC
PREV NEXT STEP/SLOW
STOP REC
REC MODE ONE TOUCH
COPY
SKIP
CM
BACK
SX-SW77.book Page 29 Wednesday, April 27, 2005 6:05 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Surround sound settings
05
30
En
Dynamic Range Control
1
When watching Dolby Digital or DTS material at low
volume, low level sounds—including some of the
dialog—can be difficult to hear properly. Using one of the
Dynamic Range Control (DRC) settings can help by
bringing up the low level sounds, while controlling high
level peaks.
1Press SHIFT+SYSTEM SETUP.
2Hold SHIFT and use the
/
buttons to select
DRC.
3Use SHIFT +
/
to select a setting.
Select one of the following:
DRC OFF
(default)
– No dynamic range adjustment
(use when listening at higher volume)
DRC MID
– Mid setting
DRC HIGH
– Dynamic range is reduced (loud sounds
are reduced in volume while quieter sounds are
increased)
4Press SHIFT+ENTER to exit.
Dual mono setting
2
Specifies how dual mono encoded Dolby Digital or DTS
soundtracks should be played. You can also use this
setting to switch the audio channel on DVD-RW discs
recorded with bilingual audio.
1Press SHIFT+SYSTEM SETUP.
2Hold SHIFT and use the
/
buttons to select
DRC.
3Use SHIFT +
/
to select a setting.
Select one of the following:
CH1 MONO
(default)
– Only channel 1 is played
CH2 MONO
– Only channel 2 is played
CH1/CH2
– Both channels are played through the
front speakers
4Press SHIFT+ENTER to exit.
Adjusting the channel levels using
the test tone
If you prefer, you can set the channel levels using a test
tone as a reference, rather than playing a source (see
Channel level setting
on page 29). A test tone is played
through each speaker in turn, allowing you to adjust the
level as it plays.
Note that the channel level settings for stereo sources
are independent of the settings for surround sound
sources.
1 Press SHIFT+SURROUND to select the Auto
listening mode.
If you want to set the channel levels for stereo (two
channel) playback, select the
STEREO
listening
mode.
2Press SHIFT+TEST TONE.
The test tone is output from each speaker in turn.
3 While a test tone is playing, hold SHIFT and use
the
/
buttons to adjust that channel level.
The aim is to adjust the levels so that you hear the test
tone at the same volume from each speaker. You can
adjust the level of each channel by ± 10 dB.
You can adjust the overall volume of test tone output
using the
VOLUME
+/– buttons (this does not affect
the channel level settings).
Because of the ultra low frequencies the subwoofer
produces, it may sound quieter than it really is. We
suggest adjusting the subwoofer level using the
method described in
Channel level setting
on
page 29.
4 When you’re done, press SHIFT+ENTER to exit
test tone setup.
If you use the Room Setup feature again, it will
overwrite the settings you have made here.
Note
1A similar adjustment feature is available on the DVD recorder—see
Audio DRC
on page 129.
2A similar adjustment feature is available on the DVD recorder—see
Switching audio channels
on page 99.
SX-SW77.book Page 30 Wednesday, April 27, 2005 6:05 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Other connections 06
31
En
English
Chapter 6
Other connections
Connecting auxiliary components
This system has both optical and caxial-type digital
inputs. Use these to connect external components, such
as your MD or CD-R recorder.
Connect one of the DIGITAL audio input jacks on
the rear panel to the digital output of an external
playback component.
These include digital components such as an MD player,
digital satellite, or a game system.
For an optical connection, use an optical cable to
connect the
DIGITAL (OPTICAL)
jack to the optical
output of an external playback component.
For a coaxial connection, use a coaxial cable (similar to
the supplied video cable) to connect the
DVD/DVR1
(COAXIAL)
jack to the coaxial output of an external play-
back component.
Listening to an external audio source
You can connect both analog and digital external audio
sources to this system. Digital audio sources include
digital satellite receivers, CD recorders, etc. Analog
sources include your TV. See also
Connecting auxiliary
components
above.
1If the system isn’t already on, press
RECEIVER
to switch on.
Also make sure that the external source (TV, satellite
receiver, etc.) is switched on.
2 Use the AUDIO INPUT button to select an audio
input source.
3 If necessary, start playback of the external
source.
SYSTEM
CONNECTOR SPEAKERS DVD/DVR 2
(OPTICAL)
SUB WOOFER
AC IN
CENTER
SURROUND DVD/DVR 1
(COAXIAL)
DIGITAL
AUDIO INPUT
ANTENNA
FM
UNBAL
AM
LOOP ANTENNA
75
ANALOG
DIGITAL
(OPTICAL)
RL
R
L
FRONT
RL
CONTROL
OUT
USE ONLY WITH
DISPLAY UNIT
CD recorder, etc.
SX-SW77
DIGITAL OUT
(OPTICAL)
DIGITAL OUT
(COAXIAL)
VOLUME
+
MUTE
RECORDER RECEIVER
VIDEO INPUT
HDD DVD
FM/AM AUDIO INPUT
CHANNEL

DVD/DVR2
ANALOG DIGITAL
DVD/DVR1
SX-SW77.book Page 31 Wednesday, April 27, 2005 6:05 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Other connections
06
32
En
Connecting external antennas
For an external AM antenna, use 5–6 meters of vinyl-
insulated wire and set up either indoors or outdoors.
Leave the loop antenna connected.
For an external FM antenna, Use a PAL connector to hook
up an external FM antenna.
Outdoor antenna
5–6m
Indoor
antenna
(vinyl-coated
wire)
AM
LOOP ANTENNA
ANTENNA
PAL connector
SX-SW77.book Page 32 Wednesday, April 27, 2005 6:05 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Additional information 07
33
En
English
Chapter 7
Additional information
Setting the sleep timer
The sleep timer switches off the receiver subwoofer after
a specified time so you can fall asleep without worrying
about it.
1
1Press SHIFT+SYSTEM SETUP.
2Hold SHIFT and use the
/
buttons to select
SLEEP then press SHIFT+ENTER.
3Hold SHIFT and use the
/
buttons to select an
option then press SHIFT+ENTER.
Choose between the following options:
SLP ON
– Switches off after about an hour
SLP OFF
– Cancels the sleep timer
After selecting
SLP ON
, you can select
SLEEP
again to
check how much time is left. Each line indicates
approximately 12 minutes (remaining):
Dimming the display
You can choose to dim the display if you find it too bright.
1Press SHIFT+SYSTEM SETUP.
2Hold SHIFT and use the
/
buttons to select
DIMMER then press SHIFT+ENTER.
3Hold SHIFT and use the
/
buttons to select
LIGHT or DARK then press SHIFT+ENTER.
DTS CD setting
If you play a DTS-encoded CD, you will need to change
this setting to hear the decoded signal.
1 Switch the system into standby.
2Press SHIFT+SYSTEM SETUP.
3Hold SHIFT and use the
/
buttons to select
CD TYPE from the menu, then press SHIFT + ENTER.
4Hold SHIFT and use the
/
buttons to select a
setting, then press SHIFT + ENTER
.
Select from:
NORMAL
– Use for playback of regular audio CDs.
Some DTS-encoded CDs will output noise when
played.
DTS-CD
– Use for playback of DTS-encoded CDs, but
note that there may be a slight loss of regular audio
CD playback quality.
Resetting the system
Use this procedure to reset all system settings to the
factory default.
1 Switch the system on.
2 Press SURROUND while holding down the front
panel
STANDBY/ON button.
The next time you switch on, all the system settings
should be reset.
Note
1 The display dims when the sleep timer is set. The DVD recorder does not automatically switch off with the sleep timer.
SLP --- --
SX-SW77.book Page 33 Wednesday, April 27, 2005 6:05 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Additional information
07
34
En
Installation and maintenance
Hints on installation
We want you to enjoy using this system for years to come,
so please bear in mind the following points when
choosing a location:
Do...
Use in a well-ventilated room.
Place on a solid, flat, level surface, such as a table, shelf or
stereo rack
.
Don’t...
Use in a place exposed to high temperatures or humidity,
including near radiators and other heat-generating
appliances.
Place on a window sill or other place where the system will
be exposed to direct sunlight.
Use in an excessively dusty or damp environment.
Place directly on top of an amplifier, or other component in
your stereo system that becomes hot in use.
Use near a television or monitor as you may experience
interference—especially if the television uses an indoor
antenna.
Use in a kitchen or other room where the system may be
exposed to smoke or steam.
Use on a thick rug or carpet, or cover with cloth—this may
prevent proper cooling of the system unit.
Place on an unstable surface, or one that is not large enough
to support all four of the system unit’s feet.
Troubleshooting
Incorrect operations are often mistaken for trouble and malfunctions. If you think that there is something wrong with
this component, check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the other
components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after exercising the checks
listed below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repair work.
If the system does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity disconnect the plug from
the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions.
If there is no sound or no multichannel sound from the DVR-530H DVD recorder, try setting the recorder’s audio-
related settings back to their defaults—see
The Initial Setup menu
on page 130.
General
Problem Remedy
The power does not turn on, or
switches off suddenly (an error
message may be displayed at
startup).
• Leave the unit plugged in, wait for one minute, then switch back on.
• Make sure there are no loose strands of wire touching the unit. This could cause the
system to shut off automatically.
• Check that the speakers are connected correctly.
• Make sure the voltage of the mains power source is correct for the model.
• Try reducing the volume level.
• If the problem persists, take it to your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your
dealer for servicing.
No sound is output when a
function is selected.
• If you’re playing from the DVD recorder, make sure that thedigital optical cable is
connected properly. Also make sure that the DVD recorder’s Digital Out and DTS Out
settings are set to
On
, and that the MPEG Out setting is set to
MPEG
PCM
.
• If you’re using the line input, make sure the component is connected correctly (see
Connecting auxiliary components
on page 31).
• Turn up the volume.
• Press
MUTE
on the remote control to turn muting off.
No sound from surround or
center speakers.
• Refer to
Channel level setting
on page 29 to check the speaker levels.
• Check that you haven’t selected the
AUTO
or
STEREO
mode (see
Listening in surround
sound
on page 24).
• Connect the speakers properly (refer to Connecting up).
• If you’re playing from the DVD recorder, check that the Dolby Digital Out setting is set to
Dolby Digital
.
• If the source is 96 kHz, this will be played in stereo. If you want to play it in surround
sound, set the DVD recorder’s 96 kHz PCM Out setting to
96 kHz
48 kHz
.
SX-SW77.book Page 34 Wednesday, April 27, 2005 6:05 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Additional information 07
35
En
English
Tuner
Error Messages
Glossary
Manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories.“Dolby”, “Pro Logic” and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
“DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are registered
trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
Can’t operate using the remote
control.
• Replace the batteries (
Putting the batteries in the remote control
on page 16).
• Operate within 7 m, 30° of the remote sensor (
Using the remote control
on page 16).
• Remove any obstacles or operate from another position.
• Avoid exposing the remote sensor on the front panel to direct light.
• For operating the DVD recorder, make sure that the control cable and at least one set of
audio cables are connected. (page 9)
Problem Remedy
Problem Remedy
Considerable noise in radio
broadcasts.
• Connect the AM antenna (refer to the Connecting up) and adjust the direction and
position for best reception. You may also connect an additional internal or external AM
antenna (refer to
Connecting auxiliary components
on page 31).
• Fully extend the FM wire antenna, position for best reception, and secure to a wall. You
may also connect an outdoor FM antenna (see
Connecting external antennas
on page 32).
• Turn off other equipment that may be causing the noise or move it further away.
Auto tuning does not pick up
some stations.
• The radio signal is weak. Auto tuning will only detect radio stations with a good signal.
For more sensitive tuning, connect an outdoor antenna.
Message Description
MUTING
• An operation is prohibited because the sound is muted (press
MUTE
).
EEP ERROR
• Contact your Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer for servicing.
EXIT
• Appears when a menu is automatically exited after a set period of inactivity.
96K
• An operation is prohibited because the source is 96 kHz digital.
NO SPTYP
• Try switching the unit off then on again. If the error still appears, please
contact a Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer.
Dolby Digital
A multi-channel audio encoding system
developed by Dolby Laboratories that enables far
more audio to be stored on a disc than PCM
encoding.
Dolby
Pro Logic II
A matrix decoding technology developed by
Dolby Laboratories that expands any two-channel
source audio, such as CDs and TV broadcasts, to
a five-channel playback (left/center/right/left
surround/right surround), resulting in a surround
experience.
DTS
A multi-channel audio encoding system
developed by Digital Theater Systems that
enables far more audio to be stored on a disc
than PCM encoding.
SX-SW77.book Page 35 Wednesday, April 27, 2005 6:05 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Additional information
07
36
En
Specifications
Amplifier section
RMS Power Output :
Front, Center, Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 W per channel
(1 kHz, 10 % T.H.D., 3
)
Subwoofer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 W (200 Hz, 10 % T.H.D., 3
)
Front, Center, Surround. . . . . . . . . . . . .60 W per channel
(1 kHz, 10 % T.H.D., 6
)
Subwoofer. . . . . . . . . . . . 60 W (200 Hz, 10 % T.H.D., 6
)
FM tuner section
Frequency range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87.5 MHz to 108 MHz
Antenna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
, unbalanced
AM tuner section
Frequency range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531 kHz to 1,602 kHz
Antenna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loop antenna
Subwoofer section
Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Bass-reflex floor type
(magnetically shielded)
System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 cm 1-way system
Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 cm cone type
Nominal impedance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Hz to 1.0 kHz
Maximum Input Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 W
Miscellaneous
Power requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . AC 220-240 V, 50/60 Hz
Power consumption. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 W
Power consumption in standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0.4 W
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 (W) x 375 (H) x 437 (D) mm
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.0 kg
Accessories
Remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
Display unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
AA/R6 dry cell batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Audio cable (red/white) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
Optical cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
Control cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Display cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
AM loop antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
FM wire antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
Power cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
Warranty card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
These operating instructions
S-ST770 Speaker system
(Front speakers x2, surround speakers x2, center speaker
x1)
Front speakers
Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Closed-box floorstanding type
(magnetically shielded)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.7 cm 2-way system
woofer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.7 cm cone type
Tweeter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 cm ceramic type
Nominal impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Hz to 20 kHz
Maximum input power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 W
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . 260 (W) x 983.5 (H) x 260 (D) mm
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 kg
Center speaker
Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Closed-box bookshelf type
(magnetically shielded)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.7 cm 1-way system
Speakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.7 cm cone type
Nominal impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Hz to 20 kHz
Maximum input power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 W
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270 (W) x 90 (H) x 100 (D) mm
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.8 kg
Surround speakers
Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Closed-box bookshelf type
(magnetically shielded)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.7 cm 1-way system
Speakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.7 cm cone type
Nominal impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Hz to 20 kHz
Maximum input power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 W
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 (W) x 118 (H) x 114 (D) mm
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.6 kg
Accessories
Speaker cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Non-skid pads (small) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Non-skid pads (large) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Front speaker stand bases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Screws (for bases). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Screws (for brackets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Mounting brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Screws (for mounting brackets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Note
Specifications and design subject to possible
modification without notice, due to improvements.
SX-SW77.book Page 36 Wednesday, April 27, 2005 6:05 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
37
En
DVD/HDD RECORDER
English
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 37 Friday, May 13, 2005 2:55 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
38
En
Section Three
Contents
01 Before you start
Features
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Disc / content format playback compatibility
. . . . . . 42
About the internal hard disk drive
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
02 Connecting up
Rear panel connections
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Front panel connections
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Extra features for use with compatible TVs
. . . . . . . . 46
Easy connections
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Using other types of audio/video output
. . . . . . . . . . 48
Connecting to a cable box, satellite receiver or
digital terrestrial receiver
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Connecting an external decoder box (1)
. . . . . . . . . . 50
Connecting an external decoder box (2)
. . . . . . . . . . 51
Connecting other AV sources
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Plugging in
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
03 Controls and displays
Front panel
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Display
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
04 Getting started
Switching on and setting up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Setting up the GUIDE Plus+™ system
. . . . . . . . . . . 57
Selecting the hard disk or DVD for playback and
recording
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Making your first recording
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Using the built-in TV tuner
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Basic playback
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Using the Home Menu
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Displaying disc information on-screen
. . . . . . . . . . . 65
05 Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic
program guide
The GUIDE Plus+ system
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Using the GUIDE Plus+ system
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Areas
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
GUIDE Plus+ FAQ and troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . 77
06 Recording
About DVD recording
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
About HDD recording
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Recording time and picture quality
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Recorded audio
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Restrictions on video recording
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Setting the picture quality/recording time
. . . . . . . . 81
Basic recording from the TV
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Setting a timer recording
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Timer recording FAQ
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Simultaneous recording and playback
. . . . . . . . . . . 86
Recording from an external component
. . . . . . . . . . 87
Recording from a DV camcorder
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Playing your recordings on other DVD players
. . . . . 89
Initializing a recordable DVD disc
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
07 Playback
Introduction
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Navigating discs and the HDD
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Using the Disc Navigator to browse the contents
of a disc.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Scanning discs
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Playing in slow motion
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Frame advance/frame reverse
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
The Play Mode menu
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Displaying and switching subtitles
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Switching DVD soundtracks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Switching audio channels
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Switching camera angles
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
08 Copying and back-up
Introduction
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
One Touch Copy
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Using Copy Lists
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Using disc back-up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
09 Editing
The Disc Navigator screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Command menu panel options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Editing accuracy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
HDD genres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
10 Using the Jukebox
Copying CDs to the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Playing music from the Jukebox. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Editing Jukebox albums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
11 The PhotoViewer
Playing a slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 38 Friday, May 13, 2005 2:55 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
39
En
English
Section Three
12 The Disc Setup menu
Introduction
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Basic settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Initialize settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Finalize settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Optimize HDD
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Initialize HDD
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
13 The Video/Audio Adjust menu
Setting the picture quality for TV and external
inputs
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Setting the picture quality for disc playback
. . . . . 128
Audio DRC
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
14 The Initial Setup menu
Using the Initial Setup menu
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
15 Additional information
Resetting the recorder
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Setting up the remote to control your TV
. . . . . . . . 139
TV Preset code list
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Screen sizes and disc formats
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Minimum copying times
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Frequently asked questions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
About DV
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Manual recording modes
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Language code list
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Country/Area code list
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
On-screen displays and recorder displays
. . . . . . . 149
Handling discs
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Cleaning the pickup lens
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Condensation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Hints on installation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Glossary
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Specifications
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 39 Friday, May 13, 2005 2:55 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Before you start
01
40
En
Chapter 1
Before you start
Features
Built-in GUIDE Plus+
electronic program guide
The GUIDE Plus+™ system is an interactive on-screen TV
programming guide. You can see what’s on TV today and
in the coming week, search TV listings for certain
categories of program or by your own keywords, and even
set the recorder to record programs with the press of a
single button.
HDD recording
Record up to 455 hours of video (in MN1 mode) on the
DVR-530H-AV’s internal 160 GB (gigabyte) hard disk
(HDD).
With both recordable DVD and a high-capacity HDD in
the same recorder, you have the flexibility to keep
recordings on the HDD for quick access anytime, or
record to DVD for archiving or playing on other DVD
players.
Copy between HDD and DVD
You can quickly and easily copy recordings between the
HDD and DVD. When copying to DVD you can usually
use the high-speed copy feature, which can copy an hour
of video in about one minute (when recorded in SEP
mode using a DVD-R Ver. 2.0 / 2.1 (16x) disc).
You can also choose to copy material at a different
recording quality from the original. For example, you
might want to copy an XP mode (highest quality)
recording on the HDD to SP (standard play) quality on a
DVD so that you can fit other recordings on the same
disc.
One Touch Copy
One Touch Copy makes copying the currently playing title
from HDD to DVD, or DVD to HDD as simple as pressing
a button.
High quality, real-time copying
When recording to the HDD, picture quality data is also
stored so that picture quality can be optimized when
making real-time copies to DVD later.
(This is applicable only to MN16–32 HDD recordings
(Video Mode Off), or MN12–32 / XP+ recordings (Video
Mode On).
Chase play
Using chase play you can start watching a recording
from the beginning, while continuing to record. For
example, you could set a timer recording for a program
that you’re going to miss the first 15 minutes of, then
start watching while the recorder is still recording the
program 15 minutes ahead of you.
Simultaneous recording and playback
HDD and DVD playback and recording are completely
independent. For example, you can record a broadcast
program to a recordable DVD, while watching another
recording you already made on the same DVD.
On-screen Help
Use the
HELP
button on the remote control to display a
help screen for the current operation.
Disc Navigator
The on-screen Disc Navigator makes finding your way
around the contents of a disc or the HDD easy. For
recordable DVD and HDD content, moving thumbnail
images are displayed for ease of use. The Disc Navigator
is also where you can edit HDD and recordable DVD
content.
Home Menu
The Home Menu gives you on-screen access to all the
recorder’s features in one convenient place, from setting
up the recorder, to programming a timer recording and
editing a recording.
Progressive scan-compatible
Compared to standard interlaced video, progressive scan
effectively doubles the amount of video information fed to
your TV or monitor. The result is a stable, flicker-free
image. (Check your TV/monitor for compatibility with this
feature.)
Cinema-style surround sound in your home
Connect this recorder to a Dolby Digital and/or DTS-
compatible AV amp/receiver to enjoy full surround sound
effects from Dolby Digital and DTS DVD discs.
Easy Timer Recording
Setting the recorder to record a program is simple from
the Easy Timer Recording screen. Set the channel to
record and the recording quality, then graphically set the
start and end times of the recording. That’s it!
HDD
VR mode HDD
VR mode HDD
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 40 Friday, May 13, 2005 2:55 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Before you start 01
41
En
English
Program up to 32 timer recordings
You can program the recorder to record up to 32
programs, up to a month in advance. As well as single
programs, you can specify daily or weekly recordings,
too.
This recorder is also compatible with VPS/PDC systems,
which ensure you don’t miss a timer recording, even if
the broadcast is not running to schedule.
One Touch Recording
Use One Touch Recording to start recording immediately
in 30 minute blocks. Each time you press the
REC
button, the recording time is extended by another 30
minutes, up to six hours.
Optimized recording
Optimized recording adjusts the recording quality
automatically if a timer recording will not fit onto a disc
with the settings that you made.
Super high quality HDD recording
Using the
XP+
recording mode you can record super
high quality video (around 15 Mbps data transfer rate) to
the HDD.
High quality 16-bit Linear PCM audio
In the
LPCM
recording mode, audio is recorded in
uncompressed 16-bit Linear PCM format. This delivers
great sounding audio to accompany the high picture
quality.
Picture quality adjustment features
During playback, you can adjust various picture quality
settings to improve the picture. You can also adjust the
recording picture quality. For example, if you want to
make a DVD copy of an old video tape, you can optimize
the picture quality before transferring it to disc.
Find what you want to watch quickly and easily
Unlike video tape that needs to be wound to the correct
place, you can jump right to the part of a DVD disc or the
HDD that you want to watch. Search for a point on a disc
by title, chapter or time.
Manual recording
In addition to six preset recording quality modes, the
manual recording mode allows you to access 34 different
recording quality/time settings, giving you precise
control over the recording.
Record from a DV camcorder
This recorder has a built-in DV (Digital Video) input for
connection to a DV camcorder. This makes it ideal for
transferring camcorder footage to DVD or HDD for
editing.
Safe, non-destructive editing
When editing Play List content, the actual content of the
disc (the Original content) is not touched. The edited
version (the Play List content) just points to various parts
of the Original content.
Play Video mode recordings on a regular DVD
player
Discs recorded using the Video mode can be played back
on regular DVD players, including computer DVD drives
compatible with DVD-Video playback
*
.
* ‘DVD-Video format’ recording: The use of the DVD-Video format for
recording on DVD-R and DVD-RW discs is referred to as recording in
‘Video mode’ on Pioneer’s DVD recorders. Supporting playback of DVD-
R / DVD-RW discs is optional for manufacturers of DVD playback
equipment, and there is DVD playback equipment that does not play
DVD-R or DVD-RW discs recorded in the DVD-Video format.
Note: ‘Finalization’ is required.
WMA, MP3 and JPEG file playback
This recorder can play WMA and MP3 audio files and
JPEG picture files on CD-R, CD-RW or CD-ROM discs.
Disc Back-up
The disc back-up feature gives you a convenient way to
back-up important material on a finalized Video mode
DVD to another recordable DVD disc. The material is first
copied to the HDD, then on to a second DVD disc.
Recovery Recording
When a timer recording is set to use DVD but the disc
loaded at the time of the recording is unrecordable, the
program will automatically be recorded to the HDD.
Auto Replace Recording
This feature is useful for regular timer recordings of a TV
program which you don’t want to keep after watching.
Each time the program is recorded, it replaces the one
currently on the HDD. There’s no need to manually delete
it later.
HDD
Note on copying:
Recording equipment should be used only for lawful copying and you
are advised to check carefully what is lawful copying in the country in
which you are making a copy. Copying of copyright material such as
films or music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal exception or
consented to by the rightowners.
VR mode
Video mode
HDD
HDD
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 41 Friday, May 13, 2005 2:55 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Before you start
01
42
En
Disc / content format playback
compatibility
General disc compatibility
This recorder is compatible with a wide range of disc
types (media) and formats. Playable discs will generally
feature one of the following logos on the disc and/or disc
packaging. Note however that some disc types, such as
recordable CD and DVD, may be in an unplayable
format—see below for further compatibility information.
Also compatible with KODAK Picture CD
is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing
Corporation.
is a trademark of Fuji Photo Film Co. Ltd.
About DualDisc playback
A DualDisc is a new two-sided disc, one side of which
contains DVD content video, audio, etc. while the
other side contains non-DVD content such as digital
audio material.
The non-DVD, audio side of the disc is not compliant
with the CD Audio specification and therefore may
not play.
It is possible that when loading or ejecting a
DualDisc, the opposite side to that being played will
be scratched. Scratched discs may not be playable.
The DVD side of a DualDisc plays in this product.
DVD-Audio content will not play.
For more detailed information on the DualDisc
specification, please refer to the disc manufacturer
or disc retailer.
This recorder also supports the IEC’s Super VCD
standard. Compared to the Video CD standard, Super
VCD offers superior picture quality, and allows two
soundtracks to be recorded. Super VCD also supports the
widescreen size.
DVD-R/RW compatibility
This recorder will play and record DVD-R/RW discs.
Compatible media:
DVD-RW Ver. 1.1, Ver. 1.1 / 2x, Ver. 1.2 / 2–4x and Ver.
1.2 / 2–6x
DVD-R Ver. 2.0 and Ver. 2.0 / 4x / 8x / 16x, and Ver. 2.1
1–8x / 1–16x
Recording formats:
DVD-R/RW: Video Recording (VR) format and DVD-
Video format (Video mode)
Readable formats:
DVD-R/RW: Video Recording (VR) format and DVD-
Video format (Video mode)
Note that older models of DVD recorders and DVD
writers may reject DVD-RW Ver. 1.2 discs and/or corrupt
the data on the disc. If you want to share DVD-RW discs
between this recorder and an older recorder/writer, we
recommend using Ver. 1.1 discs.
The following table shows older Pioneer DVD recorders’
limited compatibility with DVD-RW Ver. 1.2 discs.
1
Discs should be finalized in this recorder before playing. Unfinalized
VR mode and Video mode discs may not play.
2
Cannot read the CPRM information
will show in the display when
you load a disc. However, this will not affect playback.
3
Copy-once protected disc titles will not play.
CD-R/RW compatibility
This recorder cannot record CD-R or CD-RW discs.
Readable formats: CD-Audio, Video CD/Super VCD,
ISO 9660 CD-ROM* containing MP3, WMA or JPEG
files
*
ISO 9660 Level 1 or 2 compliant. CD physical format:
Mode1, Mode2 XA Form1. Romeo and Joliet file
systems are both compatible with this recorder.
Multi-session playback: Yes (except CD-Audio and
Video CD/Super VCD)
Unfinalized disc playback: CD-Audio only
Compressed audio compatibility
Compatible media: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW
Compatible formats: MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3 (MP3),
Windows Media Audio (WMA)
Sampling rates: 44.1 or 48kHz
Bit-rates: Any (128Kbps or higher recommended)
Variable bit-rate (VBR) MP3 playback: Yes
VBR WMA playback: No
DVD-Video DVD-R DVD-RW
Video CDAudio CD CD-R CD-RW
VIDEO
CD
Super Video CD (Super VCD)
Model Playable Recordable
DVR-7000 Yes
1,2,3
No
DVR-3100/ DVR-5100H Yes
1
No
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 42 Friday, May 13, 2005 2:55 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Before you start 01
43
En
English
WMA encoder compatibility: Windows Media Codec
8
(files encoded using Windows Media Codec 9 may be
playable but some parts of the specification are not
supported; specifically, Pro, Lossless, Voice and VBR)
DRM (Digital Rights Management) file playback: No
(see also DRM in the
Glossary
on page 152)
File extensions: .mp3, .wma (these must be used for
the recorder to recognize MP3 and WMA files – do
not use for other file types)
File structure: Up to 99 folders / 999 files (if these
limits are exceeded, only files and folders up to these
limits are playable)
WMA (Windows Media Audio) compatibility
The Windows Media
®
logo printed on the box indicates
that this recorder can playback Windows Media Audio
content.
WMA is an acronym for Windows Media Audio and refers
to an audio compression technology developed by
Microsoft Corporation. WMA content can be encoded by
using Windows Media
®
Player for Windows
®
XP,
Windows Media
®
Player 9 or Windows Media
®
Player 10
series.
Microsoft, Windows Media, and the Windows logo are
trademarks, or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
JPEG file compatibility
Compatible formats: Baseline JPEG and EXIF 2.2*
still image files
*
File format used by digital still cameras
Sampling ratio: 4:4:4, 4:2:2, 4:2:0
Horizontal resolution: 160 – 5120 pixels
Vertical resolution: 120 – 3840 pixels
Progressive JPEG compatible: No
File extensions: .jpg, .jpeg, .jif, .jfif (must be used for
the recorder to recognize JPEG files – do not use for
other file types)
File structure: The recorder can load up to 99 folders
/ 999 files at one time
(if there are more files/folders
that this on the disc then more can be reloaded)
PC-created disc compatibility
Discs recorded using a personal computer may not be
playable in this unit due to the setting of the application
software used to create the disc. In these particular
instances, check with the software publisher for more
detailed information.
Discs recorded in packet write mode (UDF format) are
not compatible with this recorder.
Check the DVD-R/RW or CD-R/RW software disc boxes
for additional compatibility information.
Frequently asked questions
What’s the difference between DVD-R and DVD-RW?
The most important difference between DVD-R and
DVD-RW is that DVD-R is a record-once medium,
while DVD-RW is a re-recordable/erasable medium.
You can re-record/erase a DVD-RW disc
approximately 1,000 times.
For more information, see
About DVD recording
on
page 79.
What’s VR mode?
VR (Video Recording) mode is a special mode
designed for home DVD recording. It allows flexible
editing of recorded material compared to ‘Video
mode’. On the other hand, Video mode discs are
more compatible with other DVD players.
How do I change the format of a disc?
Both DVD-R and DVD-RW discs can be initialized for
Video mode or VR mode recording. DVD-R discs are
ready for Video mode recording when you first load
them into the recorder. You can, however, initialize
them for VR mode recording from the Disc Setup
menu.
DVD-RW discs can be initialized and re-initialized for
either mode at any time (although initializing will
erase all the data on the disc).
Can I play my recordable discs in a regular DVD player?
Generally, DVD-R discs and DVD-RW discs recorded
in Video mode* are playable in a standard DVD
player, but they must be ‘finalized’ first. This process
fixes the contents of the disc to make them readable
to other DVD players as DVD-Video discs.
DVD-R discs recorded in VR mode are not playable in
standard DVD players, but may be playable in other
DVD recorders and DVD-ROM drives (in the case of
DVD-ROM drives, the disc will need to be finalized
first).
DVD-RW discs recorded in VR mode are playable in
some players and other recorders.
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 43 Friday, May 13, 2005 2:55 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Before you start
01
44
En
Note that discs may not play due to recording or disc
characteristics, scratches or dirt on the disc or pickup
lens, etc.
This label indicates playback compatibility with
DVD-RW discs recorded in VR mode (Video
Recording format). However, for discs recorded with
a record-only-once encrypted program, playback can
only be achieved using a CPRM compatible device.
Note that Pioneer cannot guarantee that discs
recorded using this recorder will play on other players.
*
‘DVD-Video format’ recording: The use of the DVD-
Video format for recording on DVD-R and DVD-RW discs
is referred to as recording in ‘Video mode’ on Pioneer’s
DVD recorders. Supporting playback of DVD-R / DVD-
RW discs is optional for manufacturers of DVD
playback equipment, and there is DVD playback
equipment that does not play DVD-R or DVD-RW discs
recorded in the DVD-Video format.
Note: ‘Finalization’ is required.
This recorder supports the recording of ‘copy-once’
broadcast programs using the CPRM copy protection
system (see CPRM on page 80) on CPRM-compliant
discs in VR mode. CPRM recordings can only be played
on players that are specifically compatible with CPRM.
Do I need two DVD recorders for editing? What kind of
editing can I do?
Unlike editing video tape, you only need one DVD
recorder to edit discs. With VR mode discs, you can
edit by making a ‘Play List’ of what to play and when
to play it. On playback, the recorder plays the disc
according to the Play List.
Throughout this manual, you will often see the words
Original and Play List to refer to the actual content
and the edited version.
Original
content refers to what’s actually recorded
on the disc.
Play List
content refers to the edited version of the
disc—how the Original content is to be played.
About the internal hard disk drive
The internal hard disk drive (HDD) is a fragile piece of
equipment. Depending on the conditions under which it
is used, or through careless use, it is possible that the
recorded contents will be damaged or lost completely, or
that normal playback and recording will not be possible.
Please understand that in the event of repair or
replacement of the HDD or related components, all your
HDD recordings will be lost.
Please use the recorder following the guidelines below to
protect against possible HDD failure.
The HDD should not be regarded as a place to store
recordings permanently. We recommend that you back up
your important recordings onto DVD-R/RW discs in order to
protect against accidental loss.
Pioneer cannot under any circumstances accept
resposibility for any direct or indirect loss arising from any
inconvenience or loss of recorded material resulting from
HDD failure.
Do not move the recorder while it is on (this includes
during EPG download when the display shows
EPG
).
Install and use the recorder on a stable, level surface.
Do not block the rear vent/cooling fan.
Do not use the recorder in excessively hot or humid
places, or in places that may be subject to sudden
changes in temperature. Sudden changes in
temperature can cause condensation to form inside
the recorder. This can be a cause of HDD failure.
While the recorder is switched on (including during
EPG download when the display shows
EPG
), do not
unplug from the wall socket or switch the electricity
off from the breaker switch.
Do not move the recorder immediately after
switching it off. If you need to move the recorder,
please follow the steps below:
1
After the message
POWER OFF
is shown in the
display, wait at least two minutes.
2
Unplug from the wall socket.
3
Move the recorder.
If there’s a power failure while the recorder is on
there is a chance that some data on the HDD will be
lost.
The HDD is very delicate. If used improperly or in an
unsuitable environment, it is possible that the HDD
will fail after a few years of use. Signs of problems
include playback unexpectedly freezing and
noticeable block noise (mosaic) in the picture.
However, sometimes there will be no warning signs
of HDD failure. If the HDD fails, no playback of
recorded material will be possible. In this case it will
be necessary to replace the HDD unit.
Optimizing HDD performance
As you record and edit material on the HDD, the data on
the disk becomes fragmented, eventually affecting the
recorder’s performance. Before this happens, the
recorder will warn you that it is time to optimize the HDD
(which you can do from the Disc Setup menu; see
Optimize HDD
on page 126).
Original
Title 1
Play List
Title 2Title 1
Title 3Title 2
Chapter 1 Chapter 1 Chapter 2Chapter 3Chapter 2
Chapter 2Chapter 1Chapter 2
Chapter 1
Chapter 1
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 44 Friday, May 13, 2005 2:55 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Connecting up 02
45
En
English
Chapter 2
Connecting up
Rear panel connections
1 AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector
Audio/video input/output SCART-type AV connector for
connecting to a VCR, or other equipment with a SCART
connector. The input accepts video, S-video and RGB.
See
AV2/L1 In
on page 132 for how to set this up.
2 AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector
Audio/video output SCART-type AV connector for
connecting to a TV or other equipment with a SCART
connector. The video output is switchable between video,
S-video and RGB. See page
AV1 Out
on page 132 for how
to set this up.
3 COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
A high-quality video output for connecting to a TV or
monitor with a component video input.
4 ANTENNA IN (RF IN)/OUT
Connect your TV antenna to the
ANTENNA IN (RF IN)
jack. The signal is passed through to the
ANTENNA OUT
jack for connection to your TV.
5 AC IN – Power inlet
6 G-LINK™
Use to connect the supplied G-LINK™ cable to enable
GUIDE Plus+™ to control an external satellite receiver,
etc.
7 CONTROL IN
Connect to the
CONTROL OUT
terminal of the receiver
subwoofer.
8 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
Connect to the
DVD/DVR2
optical jack on the receiver
subwoofer.
9 INPUT 3
Stereo analog audio, video and S-video inputs for
connection to a VCR or other source component.
10 OUTPUT
Stereo analog audio, video and S-video outputs for
connection to a TV or AV amplifier/receiver.
Front panel connections
On the right side of the front panel a flip-down cover
hides more connections.
11 DV IN
A DV input i.LINK connector, suitable for connecting a
DV camcorder.
12 Audio/video input 2
Audio/video input (stereo analog audio; composite and
S-video video), especially suitable for camcorders, game
consoles, portable audio, etc.
DIGITAL
OUT
CONTROL
G-LINK
IN
OPTICAL
AV 1 (RGB) – TV
AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
L
R
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
YP
B
P
R
ANTENNA
IN OUT
AC IN
OUTPUT
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
L
R
INPUT 3
1
5 6 7 8 9 10
2 3 4
VIDEO
L(MONO)
AUDIO
INPUT 2
R
S-VIDEO
DV IN
11 12
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 45 Friday, May 13, 2005 2:55 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Connecting up
02
46
En
Extra features for use with
compatible TVs
When this recorder is connected to a TV that features i/o
Link. A, AV Link, T-V Link, EasyLink, MegaLogic,
SMARTLINK, Q-Link, DATA LOGIC or NexTView Link
using a fully-wired 21-pin SCART cable (not supplied), the
following functions are available:
Direct TV recording
Channel preset download
NexTView timer programming download
TV auto power on
System configuration
Note that these functions cannot be used when the front
panel display shows
EPG
.
For further details and compatibility information, see also
the manual that came with your TV.
Direct TV recording
Direct TV recording allows you to record the TV program
that you’re watching, without having to worry about
whether this recorder is set to the same channel. See
Direct recording from TV
on page 82 for more on this
feature.
Channel preset download
This feature allows you to set up the channel presets of
this recorder very simply using the channel presets and
preset names already in your TV. See
Switching on and
setting up
on page 55 and
Auto Channel Setting
on
page 131 for more on this feature.
NexTView timer programming download
NexTView timer programming download allows you to
program a timer recording directly from the NexTView
electronic program guide displayed on your TV.
See the manual that came with your TV for more
information on how to use this feature. Note that the
SP
and
LP
options displayed on your TV correspond to the
SP
and
LP
recording modes on this recorder.
TV auto power on
When you play a disc in this recorder, the TV
automatically turns on and switches to the correct video
input. See the manual that came with your TV for how to
use this feature.
System configuration
Basic settings, including language, country and TV
screen size (aspect ratio), can be downloaded from your
TV to help set up this recorder for use.
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 46 Friday, May 13, 2005 2:55 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Connecting up 02
47
En
English
Easy connections
The setup described below is a basic setup that allows you to watch and record TV programs, and play discs. Other
types of connections are explained starting on the following page.
Important
These connections use SCART cables (not supplied). If your TV (or VCR) does not have a SCART connection, see
the following page for connecting up using the supplied audio/video cable.
The
AV1(RGB)-TV
AV connector can output ordinary (composite), S-video or RGB video, plus stereo analog audio.
The
AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER)
connector accepts ordinary, S-video and RGB video input, as well as stereo analog
audio. See
AV1 Out
on page 132 and
AV2/L1 In
on page 132 for how to set them up.
Before making or changing any rear panel connections, make sure that all components are switched off and
unplugged from the wall outlet.
1 Connect the cable from the antenna/cable TV
outlet to the antenna input on your VCR.
If you are not connecting a VCR in the chain, connect
it to the
ANTENNA IN (RF IN)
jack on this recorder
and skip the next step.
2 Use an RF antenna cable (one is supplied) to
connect the antenna output of your VCR to the
ANTENNA IN (RF IN) of this recorder.
3 Use another RF antenna cable to connect the
ANTENNA OUT of this recorder to the antenna input
on your TV.
4 Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect the
AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector on this recorder to the
SCART AV connector on your TV.
5 Use another SCART cable to connect the
AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector to a SCART AV
connector on your VCR.
Tip
This recorder has a ‘through’ function which allows
you to record a TV program from the built-in TV tuner
in this recorder while watching a video playing on
your VCR. (To use this feature when the recorder is in
standby,
Power Save
must be set to
Off
—see
Power
Save
on page 130).
TV
VCR
Antenna/cable TV
wall outlet
DIGITAL
OUT
CONTROL
G-LINK
IN
OPTICAL
AV 1 (RGB) – TV
AV 2 (INP UT 1/DECODER)
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
L
R
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
YP
B
P
R
ANTENNA
IN OUT
AC IN
OUTPUT
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
L
R
INPUT 3
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
ANTENNA
IN
ANTENNA
IN (RF IN)
ANTENNA
OUT
ANTENNA
OUT
ANTENNA
IN
1
2
4
5
3
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 47 Friday, May 13, 2005 2:55 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Connecting up
02
48
En
Using other types of audio/video output
If you can’t use the SCART AV connector to connect your TV to this recorder, there are standard audio/video output
jacks, as well as an S-video and component video output.
Using the S-video or component video
output
1Connect the S-video or component video output
to a similar input on your TV.
For an S-video connection, use an S-video cable (not
supplied) to connect the
S-VIDEO OUTPUT
jack to an S-
video input on your TV
For a component video connection, use a component
video cable (not supplied) to connect the
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
jacks to a component video input on your TV.
See also
Component Video Out
on page 131 for how to set
up the component video output for use with a progressive
scan-compatible TV.
TV
DIGITAL
OUT
CONTROL
G-LINK
IN
OPTICAL
AV 1 (RGB) – TV
AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
L
R
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
YP
B
P
R
ANTENNA
IN OUT
AC IN
OUTPUT
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
L
R
INPUT 3
S-VIDEO
INPUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO INPUT
1
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 48 Friday, May 13, 2005 2:55 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Connecting up 02
49
En
English
Connecting to a cable box, satellite receiver or digital terrestrial receiver
If you have a cable, satellite or digital terrestrial receiver with a built-in decoder, connect it to this recorder and your TV
as shown on this page.
1
If you are using a separate decoder box for your cable/satellite TV, set up following the
instructions on the next page.
Using the setup on this page you can:
Record any channel by selecting it on the cable box, satellite receiver or digital terrestrial receiver.
Change channels and set timer recordings on the external receiver using the GUIDE Plus+™ system (via the
G-LINK™ cable, and after setting up).
Important
Do not connect this recorder to your TV ‘through’ your VCR, satellite receiver or other component. Always connect
each component directly to your TV or AV amplifier/receiver.
1 Connect RF antenna cables as shown.
This enables you to watch and record TV channels.
2 Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect the
AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector to a SCART AV connector
on your TV.
This enables you to watch discs.
3 Use another SCART cable to connect the
AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector to a SCART AV
connector on your cable box/satellite/digital
terrestrial receiver.
This enables you to record scrambled TV channels.
4Plug the supplied G-LINK™ cable to the G-LINK™
jack.
This enables you to control the tuner in the external
receiver using the GUIDE Plus+™ system.
Position the IR transmitter end of the G-LINK™ cable so
that the IR receiver on your cable/satellite/digital
terrestrial receiver will pick up the control signals (see
diagram).
See the manual that came with your cable/satellite/
digital terrestrial receiver if you’re not sure where the IR
receiver is on the front panel. Alternatively, experiment
with the remote control, operating it from very close
range until you find the place where the receiver
responds.
Tip
This recorder has a ‘through’ function which allows
you to record a TV program from the built-in TV tuner
in this recorder while watching a video playing on
your VCR. (To use this feature when the recorder is in
standby,
Power Save
must be set to
Off
—see
Power
Save
on page 130).
Note
1 The diagram shows SCART video connections, but you can alternatively use any of the other audio/video connections.
TV
Satellite dish/
antenna/cable T
V
wall outlet
Cable/Satellite/
Digital Terrestrial
receiver
DIGITAL
OUT
CONTROL
G-LINK
IN
OPTICAL
AV 1 (RGB) – TV
AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
L
R
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
YP
B
P
R
ANTENNA
IN OUT
AC IN
OUTPUT
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
L
R
INPUT 3
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
ANTENNA
IN
ANTENNA
IN (RF IN)
ANTENNA
OUT
ANTENNA
OUT
ANTENNA
IN
1
1
2
3
1
4
DIGITAL
OUT
CONTROL
G-LINK
IN
OPTICAL
G-LINK cable
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 49 Friday, May 13, 2005 2:55 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Connecting up
02
50
En
Connecting an external decoder box (1)
If you have an external, dedicated decoder box for your satellite or cable TV system, use the setup described on this
page. See the previous page for how to connect the G-LINK™ cable.
Important
Do not connect your decoder box directly to this recorder.
Information from the decoder (for example, relating to pay TV services), is only viewable when this recorder is off
(in standby).
For timer recording to work properly on this recorder, the VCR/satellite receiver/cable box must also be switched
on during recording.
It is not possible to watch one TV program and record another using this setup.
1 Connect the cable from the antenna/cable TV
outlet to the antenna input on your VCR/satellite
receiver/cable box.
2Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect your
decoder to your VCR/satellite receiver/cable box.
See the manual for your decoder box for more detailed
instructions.
3Use a SCART cable to connect your VCR/satellite
receiver/cable box to the AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER)
AV connector on this recorder.
4 Use a SCART cable to connect the AV1(RGB)-TV
AV connector to your TV.
TV
Antenna/cable TV
wall outlet
VCR/Satellite receiver
/Cable box
Decoder
DIGITAL
OUT
CONTROL
G-LINK
IN
OPTICAL
AV 1 (RGB) – TV
AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
L
R
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
YP
B
P
R
ANTENNA
IN OUT
AC IN
OUTPUT
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
L
R
INPUT 3
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
ANTENNA
IN
1
4
2
3
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 50 Friday, May 13, 2005 2:55 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Connecting up 02
51
En
English
Connecting an external decoder box (2)
If you only have a decoder, connect it to this recorder and your TV as shown on this page.
1
Using the setup on this page you can:
Record scrambled channels received using the recorder’s built-in TV tuner.
Important
Do not connect this recorder ‘through’ your VCR, satellite receiver or cable box. Always connect each component
directly to your TV or AV amplifier/receiver.
1 Connect RF antenna cables as shown.
This enables you to watch and record TV channels.
2 Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect the
AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector to a SCART AV connector
on your TV.
This enables you to watch discs.
3 Use another SCART cable to connect the
AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector to a SCART AV
connector on your decoder box.
This enables you to record scrambled TV channels.
Note
1 In order to use this setup, you will need to make the following settings from the Initial Setup menu:
• Set the
AV2/L1 In
setting to
Decoder
from the Initial Setup menu (see
AV2/L1 In
on page 132).
• From the
Manual CH Setting
screen, set the
Decoder
setting for the scrambled channels to
On
(see
Manual CH Setting
on page 131).
TV
Antenna/cable TV
wall outlet
Decoder
DIGITAL
OUT
CONTROL
G-LINK
IN
OPTICAL
AV 1 (RGB) – TV
AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
L
R
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
YP
B
P
R
ANTENNA
IN OUT
AC IN
OUTPUT
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
L
R
INPUT 3
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
ANTENNA
IN
ANTENNA
IN (RF IN)
ANTENNA
OUT
1
2
3
1
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 51 Friday, May 13, 2005 2:55 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Connecting up
02
52
En
Connecting other AV sources
Connecting a VCR or analog camcorder
1 Connect a set of audio and video inputs of your
VCR or camcorder to a set of outputs on this
recorder.
This enables you to record from this recorder to your VCR
or camcorder.
You can use standard video or S-video cables for the
video connection.
Alternatively, you can use the
AV2(INPUT 1/
DECODER)
SCART connector for audio/video input
and output with just one SCART cable.
2Connect a set of audio and video outputs of your
VCR or camcorder to a set of inputs on this recorder.
This enables you to record tapes from your VCR or
camcorder.
You can use standard video or S-video cables for the
video connection.
The front panel connections make convenient
connections for a camcorder input.
Connecting a DV camcorder
Using the front panel
DV IN
jack, it is possible to connect
a DV camcorder or video deck, or DVD-R/RW recorder
and digitally transfer DV tapes or DVD-R/RW discs to
DVD-R/RW.
Important
This jack is for connection to DV equipment only. It is
not compatible with digital satellite receivers or D-
VHS video decks.
1 Use a DV cable (not supplied) to connect the DV
jack of your DV camcorder/video deck to the front
panel DV IN jack of this recorder.
Plugging in
After checking all the connections, plug in the recorder.
1 Use the supplied power cable to connect this
recorder to a power outlet.
Analog camcorder
VCR
PULL-OPEN
REC
STANDBY/ON
HDD/DVD
OPEN/CLOSE
AUDIO/VIDEO
OUTPUT
AUDIO/VIDEO
INPUT
1 2
AUDIO/VIDEO
INPUT
AUDIO/VIDEO
OUTPUT
DV camcorder
PULL-OPEN
REC
STANDBY/ON
HDD/DVD
OPEN/CLOSE
DV
OUT
DV
IN
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 52 Friday, May 13, 2005 2:55 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Controls and displays 03
53
En
English
Chapter 3
Controls and displays
Front panel
1
STANDBY/ON
Press to switch the recorder on/into standby.
2 Disc tray
3
OPEN/CLOSE
Press to open/close the disc tray.
4 HDD/DVD indicator
Lights blue when the HDD is selected; orange when DVD
is selected.
5 HDD/DVD
Press to switch between the hard disk drive (HDD) and
DVD for recording and playback.
6 Front panel display
See
Display
on page 54 for details.
7 Front panel inputs
(page 45)
Pull the cover down where indicated to access the front
panel input jacks (audio, video and DV). Especially
convenient for connecting camcorders and other
portable equipment.
8 +/–
Use to change channels, skip chapters/tracks, etc.
9
REC
Press to start recording. Press repeatedly to set the
recording time in 30 minute blocks.
10
Press to stop recording.
11 ONE TOUCH COPY
(page 101)
Press to start One Touch Copy of the currently playing
title to DVD or the HDD. See also the
Note on copying
on
page 41.
12
Press to stop playback.
13
Press to start or restart playback.
PULL-OPEN
REC
STANDBY/ON
HDD/DVD
ONE TOUCH COPY
OPEN/CLOSE
3 4 5
13 12 11 10 9 8 7
61 2
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 53 Friday, May 13, 2005 2:55 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Controls and displays
03
54
En
Display
1
Lights during playback; blinks when playback is paused.
2
Lights when copying.
3
Lights during recording; blinks when recording is
paused.
4
(page 69)
Lights when a timer recording has been set.
(Indicator blinks if the timer has been set to DVD but
there isn’t a recordable disc loaded, or the timer has
been set to HDD but the HDD is not recordable.)
NTSC
Lights when playing NTSC format video.
(page 132)
Indicates which channels of a bilingual broadcast
are recorded.
(page 131)
Lights when the component video output is set to
progressive scan.
OVER
(page 133)
Lights when the analog audio input level is too high.
VPS / PDC
(page 83)
Lights when receiving a VPS/PDC broadcast during a
VPS/PDC-enabled timer recording.
5 Recording quality indicators
(page 80)
XP
Lights when the recording mode is set to
XP
(best
quality).
SP
Lights when the recording mode is set to
SP
(standard play).
LP / SLP
Lights when the recording mode is set to
LP
(long
play) or
SLP
(super long play).
EP / SEP
Lights when the recording mode is set to
EP
(extended play) or
SEP
(super extended play).
MN
Lights when the recording mode is set to
MN
(manual recording level) mode.
6 Character display
7R / RW
Indicates the type of recordable DVD loaded: DVD-R or
DVD-RW.
8 PL
(page 111)
Lights when a VR mode disc is loaded and the
recorder is in Play List mode.
2 3
(page 136)
Shows the remote control mode (if nothing is
displayed, the remote control mode is 1).
V
Lights when an unfinalized Video mode disc is
loaded.
P
R
L
8 7
2 43 5
6
1
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 54 Friday, May 13, 2005 2:55 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Getting started 04
55
En
English
Chapter 4
Getting started
Switching on and setting up
When you switch the recorder on for the first time, you
can make several basic settings using the Setup
Navigator feature. This takes you through setting the
clock, the internal TV tuner and the video output settings.
If you’re using the recorder for the first time, we strongly
recommend you use the Setup Navigator before starting
to use the recorder.
1Switch on your TV and set the video input to this
recorder.
2 Press the RECORDER button on the remote
control or the STANDBY/ON button on the front
panel to switch on.
When you switch on for the first time, your TV should
display the Setup Navigator screen. (If the Setup
Navigator doesn’t appear, you can also access it from the
Initial Setup menu; see page 130).
If this recorder is connected to a compatible TV using
a fully-wired 21-pin SCART cable, the recorder will
take a few seconds to download country, TV screen
size and language information. (Check the manual
that came with your TV for compatibility information.)
3Use the / buttons to choose a language, then
press ENTER.
4 Press ENTER to start setting up using the Setup
Navigator.
If you don’t want to use the Setup Navigator, press
to select Cancel, then press ENTER to exit the Setup
Navigator.
5 Select the Auto Channel Setting (‘Auto Scan’ or
‘Download from TV’), or ‘Do not set’, then press
ENTER.
Select Do not set if you want to skip setting up the
channels (because they have already been set up, for
example).
You can only use the Download from TV feature if
you connected this recorder to your TV using a
fully-wired 21-pin SCART cable connected to the
AV1(RGB)-TV connector, and if your TV supports this
function (check your TV’s instruction manual for
more details).
VOLUME
+
MUTE
RECORDER RECEIVER
TOP MENU
RDS DISP
SYSTEM
SETUP
DISPLAYTEST TONE
ST +ST –
TUNE +
TUNE –
RETURN
DISC NAVIGATOR DVD MENU
HOME
MENU
VIDEO INPUT
INFO
GUIDE
HDD DVD
FM/AM AUDIO INPUT
HELP
ENTER
CLEAR
CHANNEL

Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Clock Setting
Input Line System
Power Save
Help
Setup Navigator
Setup Navigator
Language
français
Italiano
Nederlands
Pycc
English
Deutsch
Español
Svenska K
NN
Basic
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Clock Setting
Input Line System
Power Save
Help
Setup Navigator
Setup Navigator
Basic
Start
Cancel
Start
Complete this setup before you
start using your recorder.
Please use the Initial Setup if you
want to make more detailed settings.
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Clock Setting
Input Line System
Power Save
Help
Setup Navigator
Setup Navigator
Basic Auto Channel Setting
English
Download from TV
Do not Set
Auto Scan
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 55 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:37 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Getting started
04
56
En
Use the
/
buttons to choose your country,
then press ENTER.
Auto-tuning channels
The
Auto Scan
option automatically scans and sets the
channel presets.
Downloading channels from your TV
Use the
Download from TV
option to download all the
channels that your TV is tuned to.
6 Select ‘Auto’ for automatic time setting, or
‘Manual’ to set the clock manually, then press
ENTER.
Auto clock setting
Some TV channels broadcast time signals together
with the program. This recorder can use these
signals to set the clock automatically.
Set ‘Clock Set CH‘ to the channel preset number
that broadcasts a time signal, then move the
cursor down to ‘Start’ and press ENTER.
The recorder takes a short while to set the time. After
you see that the time has been set, select
Next
to
proceed.
If the time could not be set automatically, press
RETURN
to go back to the previous screen and select
Manual
.
Manual clock setting
If no stations in your area are broadcasting time
signals, you can set the clock manually.
Use the
/
buttons to set your time zone.
You can set this by selecting a city or a time relative
to GMT.
Press
then use the
/
buttons to select ‘On’
or ‘Off’ for summer time, then press ENTER.
Select
On
if you are currently using summer time.
Set the date (day/month/year) and time, then
press ENTER to make all the settings.
Use the
/
buttons to change the value in the
highlighted field.
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Video Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Clock Setting
Input Line System
Power Save
Help
Setup Navigator
Setup Navigator
Basic
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Clock Setting
Input Line System
Power Save
Help
Setup Navigator
Setup Navigator
Basic Country Selection
Country Austria
Tuning
32/213
Cancel
Downloading Pr 5
32/213
Cancel
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Clock Setting
Input Line System
Power Save
Help
Setup Navigator
Setup Navigator
Basic Clock Setting
Auto
Manual
Auto
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Clock Setting
Input Line System
Power Save
Help
Setup Navigator
Setup Navigator
Basic Auto Clock Setting
Date
Time
Clock Set CH
–– / –– / ––––
–– : ––
Pr 1
Start
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Clock Setting
Input Line System
Power Save
Help
Setup Navigator
Setup Navigator
Basic Auto Clock Setting
Date
Time
Clock Set CH
SAT 01 / 01 / 2005
11 : 20
Pr 1
Start
Next
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Clock Setting
Input Line System
Power Save
Help
Setup Navigator
Setup Navigator
Basic Manual Clock Setting
Time Zone
Summer Time Off
Austria
Vienna
1/2
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Clock Setting
Input Line System
Power Save
Help
Setup Navigator
Setup Navigator
Basic Manual Clock Setting
Time Zone
Summer Time On
Austria
Vienna
1/2
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Clock Setting
Input Line System
Power Save
Help
Setup Navigator
Setup Navigator
Basic Manual Clock Setting
Date
Time
Time Zone
Summer Time On
Austria
Vienna
01 / /01
00 : 00
2005SAT
2/2
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 56 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:37 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Getting started 04
57
En
English
Use the
/
buttons to move from one field to
another.
You can go back to the previous screen at anytime in
the Setup Navigator by pressing
RETURN
.
7 Select the TV screen type, ‘Wide (16:9)’ or
‘Standard (4:3)’.
Use the
/
buttons to select, then press
ENTER
.
8 Is your TV compatible with progressive scan
video?
Use the
/
buttons to select
Compatible
,
Not
Compatible
, or
Don’t Know
, then press
ENTER
.
Note that progressive scan video is only output
through the
AV1(RGB)-TV
connector and the
component video outputs.
9Press ENTER to exit the Setup Navigator, or select
‘Go Back’ if you want to start again.
That completes basic setup using the Setup Navigator.
Other settings you can make
After setting up using the Setup Navigator, you should be
ready to start enjoying your DVD recorder. It’s possible,
however, that you may want to make a couple of
additional settings, depending on how the recorder is set
up for terrestrial TV broadcasts.
Manual channel setting – This setting lets you skip
channels where there is no station, as well as
manually tune to stations. See
Manual CH Setting
on
page 131.
Setting up the remote to control your TV – You can set
up the supplied remote control to control many
brands of TV. See
Setting up the remote to control your
TV
on page 139.
If for any reason you need to cancel the setup process
before it’s completed, you will be asked the next time
you switch on whether you want to start setting up
again, or whether to leave it until later.
Setting up the GUIDE Plus+™ system
The GUIDE Plus+™ system is a free, interactive on-
screen television programming guide. The system offers
program listings for all major channels, one-touch
recording, search by genre, recommendations according
to your profile and more.
For the GUIDE Plus+ system to function correctly, it is
important that you set the language and country
correctly in the Setup Navigator, and that you have
performed a scan for available channels, as these are all
used by the GUIDE Plus+ system. If any of these things
are not yet set, please run the Setup Navigator first (see
Switching on and setting up
on page 55).
TV listings information is received via ‘host channels’. In
order to receive the correct TV listings information for
your country or region you need to set up the GUIDE
Plus+ system and ‘download’ the TV listings information.
The initial download can take up to 24 hours, but once
this is done, all future updates are automatic.
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Clock Setting
Input Line System
Power Save
Help
Setup Navigator
Setup Navigator
Basic TV Screen Size
Wide (16:9)
Standard (4:3)
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Clock Setting
Input Line System
Power Save
Help
Setup Navigator
Setup Navigator
Basic Progressive
Compatible
Not Compatible
Don't Know
Not Compatible
Initial Setup
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Clock Setting
Input Line System
Power Save
Help
Setup Navigator
Setup Navigator
Basic
Setup is complete!
Enjoy using your DVD recorder!
Finish Setup
Go Back
Finish Setup
VOLUME
+
TOP MENU
RDS DISP
SYSTEM
SETUP
DISPLAYTEST TONE
ST +ST –
TUNE +
TUNE –
RETURN
DISC NAVIGATOR DVD MENU
HOME
MENU
VIDEO INPUT
INFO
GUIDE
HDD DVD
FM/AM AUDIO INPUT
HELP
ENTER
CLEAR
CHANNEL
SKIP
CM
BACK
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 57 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:37 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Getting started
04
58
En
1 Press GUIDE to display the GUIDE Plus+ setup
menu.
The language and country settings are already set to
whatever you selected in the Setup Navigator.
2 Use the
/
buttons to select Postal Code.
3Use the number and cursor buttons to enter your
postal code.
The system uses your postal code to identify which TV
listings data is correct for the area in which you live, so it
is important that you enter it correctly.
4 If you are using an external receiver (such as a
satellite receiver) with the supplied G-LINK cable,
complete this step, otherwise jump to step 5 below.
See
Connecting to a cable box, satellite receiver or
digital terrestrial receiver
on page 49 for more on using
the supplied G-LINK cable.
Select
External Receiver 1
,
2
or
3
, then press
ENTER
. (If you have just one external receiver, use
External Receiver 1
. You can add further receivers in
2
and
3
if you need to.)
After pressing
ENTER
:
Select your reception method (
Terrestrial
,
Cable
or
Satellite
).
Select your provider (if applicable).
Select the brand of your external receiver.
Identify which input your external receiver is
connected to.
After completing these steps the recorder will try and
communicate with your external receiver and change the
channel via the G-LINK cable. If the channel was
successfully changed, select
Yes
to confirm.
If the channel did not change, select
No
. The GUIDE
Plus+ system will try other codes assigned to your
external receiver. If none of the codes changes the
channel successfully, tune your external receiver to the
host channel for your country (refer to step
5
below) and
leave it on overnight. The recorder needs to be in standby.
It will wake up automatically and download new codes
from the host channel. The next day, try this setup
process again:
Press
GUIDE
to display the GUIDE Plus+ setup
menu.
Press
to highlight the Menu bar, then use
to
reach the Setup area and select Setup.
Continue setting up from the start of this step again.
If your external receiver still doesn’t respond to the
G-LINK controller, please call customer support and
report the brand and model of your external receiver.
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 58 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:37 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Getting started 04
59
En
English
See also
GUIDE Plus+ FAQ and troubleshooting
on
page 77.
5 Identify the host channel for your country.
The TV listings information available in GUIDE Plus+ is
distributed throughout Europe by selected broadcasters
called
host channels
. It is important that the host
channel for your country is correctly identified in order to
receive listings information (EPG download).
A
If you are not using an external receiver, this recorder
will automatically scan all channels for the host channel:
Leave the recorder in standby overnight (do
not
leave
it switched on).
B
If you are using an external receiver, you need to
identify the host channel from the table below:
Tune your external receiver to the appropriate host
channel and leave the receiver on and the recorder in
standby overnight.
C
If you use both an external receiver and this recorder
as sources, follow the instructions above for setting up
without an external receiver. Only if this is unsuccessful
try the external receiver method.
About EPG download
EPG data can only be received when the recorder is
in standby. (When not using the recorder, therefore,
please switch it into standby.) If you’re using an
external receiver, leave this on when EPG data is
downloading.
If you cannot receive any of the host channels (see
the above table) then you won’t be able to use the
GUIDE Plus+ system. In this case do not set the
postal code (or set Country to
Other
) in the GUIDE
Plus+ setup screen. (When GUIDE Plus+ service
starts in your area, set the postal code again.)
Even if you can’t use the EPG functions where you
live, you can still set VIDEO Plus+ timer recordings
and manual recordings — see
Setting a timer
recording
on page 83.
The front panel display shows
EPG
when receiving
data. If you power on the recorder during an EPG
download, the download is canceled.
EPG data may be received several times a day. All
updates are automatic.
When downloading EPG data, the recorder may
sound as though it is on. This is normal.
Checking the downloaded data the
following day
1Press GUIDE.
You should see a grid filled with channel logos and TV
listings information. Use the
/
buttons to review the
list. If you notice that there are channels missing, or that
there are channels in the list that you don’t get, go to the
Editor screen:
Press
repeatedly until the Menu bar is highlighted.
Press
until Editor is highlighted. The main area of
the screen now shows a list of channels. Those that
are turned
ON
are displayed in the grid; those that
are
OFF
are hidden. Use the
///
buttons to
move down the list and turn channels
ON
or
OFF
as
necessary.
For any channel that you turn
ON
, the GUIDE Plus+
system will need to know how it is received (the
source) and on which program number. The source
may be the built-in tuner of this recorder, or an
external receiver. The program number is the number
Country/
Region Host channels Comments
Austria Eurosport
Belgium
(Flemish)
Music Factory (TMF)
France Canal+ Analog only
Germany Eurosport
Italy Sport Italia Analog only
Netherlands Music Factory (TMF),
Eurosport
Use TMF if you live in
Amsterdam, Eindhoven or
Rotterdam.
Spain Tele 5 Analog only
Switzerland Eurosport
UK ITV, Eurosport ITV is analog only. Use
Eurosport if you are a SKY
subscriber and you no longer
have a terrestrial antenna.
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 59 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:37 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Getting started
04
60
En
on which the channel can be found on its receiving
device/source. The entry in the Editor screen must
match this number for correct recording of that
channel.
The above is especially important for the ‘host
channel’. Please make sure that the host channel is
always switched
ON
.
2Use the number buttons to change the program
numbers as you like.
3When you’re done, press the BLUE Action button
(Home) to get back to the GUIDE Plus+ home screen.
You can find detailed information on using the GUIDE
Plus+ system in the following chapter.
Selecting the hard disk or DVD for
playback and recording
The
HDD
and
DVD
buttons (remote control and front
panel) are used to select the hard disk (HDD) or DVD for
playback and recording. The indicator in the front panel
display shows which is currently selected.
Making your first recording
This quick guide shows you how to make a basic
recording of a TV program on either the HDD, or to a
recordable DVD.
Recording is covered in much more detail in chapter 6
(
Recording
).
1 If they aren’t already on, switch on your TV and
this recorder.
Press
RECORDER
to switch on.
Make sure that the video input on your TV is set to this
recorder.
2Press HDD to record to the HDD, or DVD to record
to a recordable DVD.
If you choose to record to the HDD, skip to step
5
now.
3 Press
OPEN/CLOSE on the front panel to open
the disc tray.
4 Load a blank DVD-R or DVD-RW disc with the
label side face-up, using the disc guide to align the
disc.
When you load a new, blank DVD-RW disc, the
recorder will take a moment to initialize it for
recording.
Blank DVD-R discs are ready for Video mode
recording out of the box.
5 Use the CHANNEL +/– buttons to select the TV
channel you want to record from.
You can also use the
+/–
buttons on the front panel if
the recorder is stopped.
VOLUME
+
MUTE
RECORDER RECEIVER
HDD DVD
FM/AM AUDIO INPUT
CHANNEL

VOLUME
+
MUTE
RECORDER RECEIVER
TOP MENU
RDS DISP
SYSTEM
SETUP
DISPLAYTEST TONE
ST +ST –
TUNE +
TUNE –
RETURN
DISC NAVIGATOR DVD MENU
HOME
MENU
AUDIO
SURROUND ADVANCED SOUND TIMER REC
SUBTITLE ANGLE PLAY MODE
SHIFT
VIDEO INPUT
INFO
GUIDE
HDD DVD
FM/AM AUDIO INPUT
HELP
TV/DVD
TV DIRECT
REC
INPUT
TV
ENTER
CLEAR
TV CONTROL
CHANNEL VOLUME
REC
PREV NEXT STEP/SLOW
STOP REC
REC MODE ONE TOUCH
COPY
CHANNEL

SKIP
CM
BACK
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 60 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:37 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Getting started 04
61
En
English
Channel presets are numbered 1–99.
If the recorder is connected to your TV using a SCART
cable and your TV supports Direct Recording, it’s
possible to quickly start recording whatever channel
your TV is tuned to. See
Direct recording from TV
on
page 82 for detailed instructions.
6 Press
REC to start recording.
By default, the recording will be in
SP
(standard play)
mode, which will give you around two hours of
recording from a blank DVD disc. The different
recording modes and their recommended uses are
covered in more detail in the chapter on Recording.
You can pause recording by pressing
. Press
REC
or
again to restart recording.
7 When you want to stop recording, press
STOP REC.
Playing back your recording
The TV program you just recorded should be on the HDD
or DVD disc as a single title with one or more chapters.
Press
to start playback.
If you want to stop playback before the end of the
recording, press
.
Using the built-in TV tuner
Changing TV channels
There are three different ways to select TV channels. Note
that you can’t change the TV channel during playback,
recording or during recording standby.
CHANNEL +/–
buttons on the remote
Number buttons
on the remote – For example, to
select channel 4, press
4
then
ENTER
; for channel 34,
press
3
,
4
,
ENTER
.
1
+/–
buttons on the front panel
Changing audio channels
You can change the audio channel of the broadcast or
external input signal.
Press AUDIO to change the audio.
The current audio channel is displayed on-screen.
If the NICAM audio setting (see
Nicam Select
on
page 132) is set to
NICAM
and you are watching a
NICAM broadcast, you can switch between
NICAM
and
Regular
(non-NICAM) audio.
If the NICAM broadcast is bilingual, you can also
select the language.
You can also select the language for a non-NICAM
bilingual broadcast.
When watching a recording made from an external
input with
Bilingual
recording selected (see
External
Audio
on page 132), you can switch the audio
channel between left (
L
), right (
R
) or both (
L+R
).
Note
When recording to the HDD with HDD Recording
Format set to Video Mode On, to DVD in Video mode,
or on the
LPCM
setting, only one channel of a
bilingual broadcast is recorded. In this case, decide
which language you want to record before recording
by setting the Bilingual Recording setting (see
Bilingual Recording
on page 132).
Note
1. Channel presets are numbered 1–99.
+
TOP MENU
RDS DISP
SYSTEM
SETUP
ST +ST –
TUNE +
RETURN
DISC NAVIGATOR DVD MENU
HOME
MENU
VIDEO INPUT
INFO
GUIDE
HDD DVD
FM/AM AUDIO INPUT
HELP
ENTER
CLEAR
CHANNEL
AUDIO
SURROUND ADVANCED SOUND TIMER REC
SUBTITLE ANGLE PLAY MODE
SHIFT
TV/DVD
TV DIRECT
REC
INPUTTV
TV CONTROL
CHANNEL VOLUME
REC STOP REC
REC MODE ONE TOUCH
COPY
NICAM
Regular
NICAM A NICAM B
Regular NICAM A+B
A (L) B (R)
A + B (L+R)
LR
L+R
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 61 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:37 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Getting started
04
62
En
Switching between TV and DVD
When the recorder is stopped or recording you can
choose whether to have the audio/video from the built-in
TV tuner (or external input) play on your TV (‘DVD mode’),
or watch the channel that the TV is currently set to (‘TV
mode’).
During playback or when a menu is being displayed on-
screen, the sound and video is always routed to your TV
and is unaffected by the
TV/DVD
mode setting.
Note that the recorder must be connected to your TV
using a SCART cable to be able to use this feature.
Press SHIFT and TV/DVD to switch between TV
mode and DVD mode.
Basic playback
This section shows you how to use your recorder for
playback of discs (DVD, CD, etc.), and for playback of
video from the HDD. More playback features, such as
repeat and program play, are covered in
Playback
on
page 91.
Important
Throughout this manual, the term ‘DVD’ means
playback-only DVD-Video discs and DVD-R/RW. If a
function is specific to a particular kind of DVD disc, it
is specified.
Some DVD-Video discs don’t allow certain playback
controls to operate at certain points in the disc. This
is not a malfunction.
1 Press
RECORDER to switch on.
Also turn on your TV and make sure that it is set to the
correct video input.
2Press HDD to playback from the HDD, or DVD to
play a DVD.
If playing video from the HDD, skip to step
5
below.
3 Press
OPEN/CLOSE on the front panel to open
the disc tray.
4 Load a disc.
Load a disc with the label side facing up, using the disc
tray guide to align the disc (if you’re loading a double-
sided DVD-Video disc, load it with the side you want to
play face down).
If you want to play a DTS audio CD, please first read
the note on page 64.
5 Press
to start playback.
If you’re playing a DVD-Video or Video CD, a disc
menu may appear when you start playback. Use the
///
buttons and
ENTER
to navigate DVD disc
menus, and the number buttons and
ENTER
for
Video CD menus.
When playing video from the HDD, playback will
automatically stop after the end of a title is reached.
See the following sections for more details on playing
specific kinds of discs.
6 To stop playback, press
.
7 When you’ve finished using the recorder, eject
the disc and switch the recorder back into standby.
To open/close the disc tray, press
OPEN/CLOSE
on
the front panel. Remove the disc before putting the
recorder into standby.
Press
RECORDER
to switch the recorder into
standby.
SHIFT
TV/DVD
TV DIRECT
REC
INPUTTV
TV CONTROL
CHANNEL VOLUME
VOLUME
+
MUTE
RECORDER RECEIVER
TOP MENU
RDS DISP
SYSTEM
SETUP
DISPLAYTEST TONE
ST +ST –
TUNE +
TUNE –
RETURN
DISC NAVIGATOR DVD MENU
HOME
MENU
VIDEO INPUT
INFO
GUIDE
HDD DVD
FM/AM AUDIO INPUT
HELP
ENTER
CLEAR
REC
PREV NEXT STEP/SLOW
STOP REC
REC MODE ONE TOUCH
COPY
CHANNEL

SKIP
CM
BACK
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 62 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:37 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Getting started 04
63
En
English
Playing DVD discs
The table below shows the basic playback controls for
DVD-Video, and recordable DVD discs.
Playing from the HDD
The table below shows the basic playback controls when
playing video recorded on the hard disk (HDD).
Press to start playback.
If
RESUME
is displayed on-screen, play-
back starts from the place last stopped.
Press to stop playback.
You can resume playback from the same
point by pressing
. (Press
again to
cancel the resume function.)
Pauses playback, or restarts playback
when paused.
Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly
to increase the scanning speed.
Press to skip to previous/next chapter/title.
(During playback you can also use the
front panel
+/–
buttons.)
Except VR mode:
During playback, enter a
chapter number then press
ENTER
to skip
directly to that chapter within the currently
playing title.
On some discs, you can also use the num-
ber buttons to select numbered items in
the disc menu.
VR mode only:
During playback, enter a
title number then press
ENTER
.
All:
Press
CLEAR
to clear a number entry
and start again.
(Commercial back/skip) Each press skips
backward/forward progressively up to a
maximum of ten minutes forward or three
minutes back.
During playback, press to start slow-
motion playback. Press repeatedly to
change the playback speed.
While paused, press to advance a single
frame in either direction.
Press to display the menu of a DVD-Video
disc.
Use the cursor buttons to navigate DVD-
Video disc menus; press
ENTER
to select
items.
Press to return to the previous level of a
DVD-Video disc menu.
PREV NEXT
CLEAR
ENTER
SKIPCMBACK
STEP/SLOW
DVD MENU
TOP MENU
ENTER
RETURN
Press to start playback.
If
RESUME
is displayed on-screen, play-
back starts from the place last stopped.
Playback automatically stops after the end
of a title is reached.
Press to stop playback.
You can resume playback from the same
point by pressing
. (Press
again to
cancel the resume function.)
Pauses playback, or restarts playback
when paused.
Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly
to increase the scanning speed.
Press to skip to previous/next chapter/title.
(During playback you can also use the
front panel
+/–
buttons.)
During playback, enter a title number then
press
ENTER
to skip directly to that title.
Press
CLEAR
to clear a number entry and
start again.
(Commercial back/skip) Each press skips
backward/forward progressively up to a
maximum of ten minutes forward or three
minutes back.
During playback, press to start slow-
motion playback. Press repeatedly to
change the playback speed.
While paused, press to advance a single
frame in either direction.
PREV NEXT
CLEAR
ENTER
SKIPCMBACK
STEP/SLOW
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 63 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:37 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Getting started
04
64
En
Playing CDs and WMA/MP3 discs
The table below shows the basic playback controls for
audio CDs
1
, and WMA/MP3 files.
Playing Video CD/Super VCDs
The table below shows the basic playback controls for
Video CD/Super VCDs.
Some discs feature Playback Control (PBC for short)
menus. These discs show PBC in the display when you
load them and display a menu on-screen from where you
can select what to watch.
2
Press to start playback.
Press to stop playback.
Pauses playback, or restarts playback
when paused.
Press to start scanning. Press again to
increase the scanning speed. (There are
two scan speeds; the current scan speed
is shown on-screen.)
Press to skip to previous/next track (or
folder for WMA/MP3 disc). (During play-
back you can also use the front panel
+/–
buttons.)
During playback, enter a track number
then press
ENTER
to skip directly to that
track.
Press
CLEAR
to clear a number entry and
start again.
Note
1. If you want to play a DTS audio CD, make sure the recorder is connected to a DTS-compatible amp/receiver with a digital connection. Noise
will be output through the analog outputs. Also make sure that
STEREO
is selected using the
AUDIO
button (see
Switching audio channels
on page 99).
PREV NEXT
CLEAR
ENTER
Press to start playback.
Video CD only:
If
RESUME
is displayed on-
screen, playback starts from the place last
stopped.
Press to stop playback.
Video CD only:
You can resume playback
from the same point by pressing
. (Press
again to cancel the resume function.)
Pauses playback, or restarts playback
when paused.
Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly
to increase the scanning speed.
Press to skip to previous/next track.
When a PBC menu is displayed, press to
display the previous/next page. (During
playback you can also use the front panel
+/–
buttons.)
During playback, enter a track number
then press
ENTER
to skip directly to that
track.
Press
CLEAR
to clear a number entry and
start again.
While a PBC menu screen is displayed,
use to select numbered menu items.
Video CD only:
Each press skips backward/
forward progressively up to a maximum of
ten minutes forward or three minutes
back. Note that this function doesn’t work
when playing in PBC mode.
During playback, press to start slow-
motion playback. Press repeatedly to
change the playback speed (forward only).
While paused, press to advance a single
frame (forward only).
Press to display the disc menu of a Video
CD/Super VCD playing in PBC mode.
2. When playing in PBC mode, some playback features, such as search, repeat and program play are not available. You can play a PBC Video
CD/Super VCD in non-PBC mode by pressing
to start playback instead of
.
PREV NEXT
CLEAR
ENTER
SKIPCMBACK
STEP/SLOW
RETURN
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 64 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:37 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Getting started 04
65
En
English
Using the Home Menu
From the Home Menu screen you can access all the
features of the recorder.
Note that some options in the Home Menu may be
grayed out sometimes, indicating that they are not
available at the present time. For example, the
Photoviewer option is grayed out unless there is a disc
loaded that contains JPEG image files.
Press
HOME MENU
to display the Home Menu screen:
Use the
///
buttons followed by
ENTER
to select
the option you want. To exit the Home Menu, press
HOME MENU
.
Displaying disc information on-
screen
You can display various on-screen information about the
disc loaded or the HDD.
1Press SHIFT and DISPLAY repeatedly to display/
change the on-screen information.
Press once to show the HDD and removable disc
(DVD, etc.) activity together. Press again to show the
status of just the currently selected playback/
recording device (HDD or removable disc).
The on-screen display automatically disappears after
150 minutes.
2To hide the information display, press SHIFT and
DISPLAY repeatedly until it disappears.
The example displays below are a guide only; actual
displays vary according to the disc loaded, etc.
HDD and removable disc activity display
Press
SHIFT
and
DISPLAY
once to see the HDD and
removable disc (DVD, etc.) activity. Use the
HDD
and
DVD
buttons to switch between the two kinds of display.
Home menu options
Disc Navigator
(page 92,
page 111)
Disc Setup
(page 125)
GUIDE Plus+
(page 68)
Initial Setup
(page 130)
Easy Timer
(page 84)
Video/Audio Adjust
(page 127)
Play Mode
(page 95)
Copy
(page 101)
Photo Viewer
(page 123)
Jukebox
(page 120)
Easy Timer
Photo Viewer
Disc Navigator Disc Setup
Initial Setup
Video/Audio Adjust
Play Mode Copy
Jukebox
GUIDE Plus+
TOP MENU
RDS DISP
SYSTEM
SETUP
DISPLAYTEST TONE
ST +ST –
TUNE +
TUNE –
RETURN
DISC NAVIGATOR DVD MENU
HOME
MENU
INFO
GUIDE
HELP
ENTER
CLEAR
SKIP
CM
BACK
VOLUME
+
MUTE
RECORDER RECEIVER
TOP MENU
RDS DISP
SYSTEM
SETUP
DISPLAYTEST TONE
ST +ST –
TUNE +
TUNE –
RETURN
DISC NAVIGATOR DVD MENU
HOME
MENU
AUDIO
SURROUND ADVANCED SOUND TIMER REC
SUBTITLE ANGLE PLAY MODE
SHIFT
VIDEO INPUT
INFO
GUIDE
HDD DVD
FM/AM AUDIO INPUT
HELP
TV/DVD
TV DIRECT
REC
INPUT
TV
ENTER
CLEAR
TV CONTROL
CHANNEL VOLUME
REC
PREV NEXT STEP/SLOW
STOP REC
REC MODE ONE TOUCH
COPY
CHANNEL

SKIP
CM
BACK
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 65 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:37 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Getting started
04
66
En
The example displays below show high-speed copying
from HDD to DVD, and HDD chase playback.
Stop display 1
1 DVD-RW Original / Play List
If a VR mode disc is loaded, this shows whether playback
is currently set to
Original
or
Play List
.
During preview playback of the Copy List, this shows
Copy List
.
2 Disc type and mode
Shows the disc type (
HDD
,
DVD-R
,
DVD-RW
,
CD
, etc.),
and the disc mode for recordable DVD, if applicable (
VR
or
Video
).
3 Recording mode and time
Shows the current recording mode (
XP
,
SP
,
LP
, etc.), and
the total recording time of the disc.
4 Resume
Shows
Resume
if playback can be resumed from the last
place stopped.
5 Recording time remaining
Shows the approximate recording time left on the disc in
the current recording mode.
6 Preset name and number
Shows the preset name and preset number for the
currently selected channel.
7 Audio mode
Shows the broadcast audio mode for the current channel
preset (
Mono
,
Stereo
, etc.).
8 Copy control information
Shows recording restrictions of the current channel
program.
9 Disc name
Shows the disc name.
(For CDs, this area shows playable files other than CD
audio tracks; for example,
Multi-format: WMA/MP3
.)
10 Finalized
Shows
Finalized
if a recordable DVD is finalized.
11 TV/DVD mode
Shows the current mode of the recorder (see
Switching
between TV and DVD
on page 62).
Stop display 2
1 Date and time
2 Number of titles/tracks on disc
For a VR mode DVD-RW, the number of Original and Play
List titles are shown separately.
Play display 1
1 Number of chapters in title
2 Current title and chapter number
(For CD/Video CD/Super VCD, shows current track; for
WMA/MP3, shows current folder and track; for JPEG
disc, shows current folder and file.)
3 Elapsed title time
(For CD, WMA, MP3, Super VCD, shows elapsed track
time; for Video CD, shows elapsed disc time.)
Rec Mode SP(2h00m/DVD)
HDD
Remain 10h35m
Stop
Remain –h––m
Stop
Hi-Speed Copy
0h08m left
DVD-RW Video
Rec Mode SP(2h00m/DVD)
HDD
Remain 10h35m
Chase Play
Rec
Remain 0h52m
Stop
DVD-RW Video
Relative playback position
Recording time
Stop
DVD-RW VR
Original
Disc Name : Comedy shows
DVD Mode
Finalized
Resume
XP (1h00m/DVD) Rem. 0h35m Copy Once
Stereo
ABC Pr 1
1 2 87
10911
3 64 5
Stop
DVD-RW VR
Original
Titles
TV Mode
: Original 99
Lock Disc : On
Play List 15
14:52 MON 15/11/2004 Copy Once
Stereo
ABC Pr 1
1 2
Play
DVD-R Video
DVD Mode
Title Total
Chapters 15
3–2 0. 00. 15
0. 11. 52
5
1 2 3 4
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 66 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:37 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Getting started 04
67
En
English
4 Total running time of title
5 Angle indicator
Lights during multi-angle scenes.
Play display 2
1 Chase playback, simultaneous record/playback,
copy, disc back-up
Indicates that recording, copying or back-up is in
progress.
2 Elapsed chapter time
3 Total running time of chapter
4 Data transfer rate
Shows the current data rate being read from the disc.
1
5 Copy protected material (!)
Shows ‘
!
’ if the playback material is copy-once protected.
Recording display
1 Current title number
2 Elapsed recording time
3 Timer recording start and stop times
Shows the start and stop times if the current recording is
a timer recording.
4 Remaining recording time available
Shows the amount of space left on the disc in the current
recording mode.
5 Recording mode
Shows the current recording mode (
XP
,
SP
,
LP
, etc.), and
the total recording time of the disc.
Tip
When using the simultaneous play and record
feature, the display shows information for playback
only.
During real-time copy, the copy source playback
information is displayed.
The Video mode disc displays become the same as a
DVD-Video disc once the disc is finalized.
The total recording time figure shown in parenthesis
is calculated based on a 12cm/4.7GB disc at the
displayed record setting.
Recording and playback times for TV recordings are
approximately 0.1% shorter than the actual time. This
is because of the slightly different frame rates of TV
broadcasts versus DVD.
The frame number is shown next to the elapsed time
display when the disc is paused.
Copy Once
or
Can’t Record
messages may appear
in the stop or recording displays. These indicate that
the broadcast TV program contains copy control
information.
Note
1.Data transfer rate shows the amount of video and audio information recorded on the disc. It is not an indication of picture/audio quality.
Play
DVD-R Video
Title Name 21/11 Football match:
Chapter Total

Chapter Time
3–2 0. 00. 15 !
0. 00. 21
0. 01. 52
4.32Mbps
Hi-Speed Copy
5
2 3 4
1
Rec
DVD-R Video
XP (1h00m/DVD) Rem. 0h35m
21:00 – 22:00
30. 00. 15
Copy Once
DVD Mode
Stereo
ABC Pr 1
5
1 2 3 4
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 67 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:37 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide
05
68
En
Chapter 5
Using the GUIDE Plus+
electronic
program guide
The GUIDE Plus+ system
The GUIDE Plus+ system* is a free, interactive on-
screen television programming guide.1 The system offers
program listings for all major channels, one-touch
recording, search by genre, recommendations according
to your profile and more. The GUIDE Plus+ system is a
convenient way to find out what's on right now or during
the coming week, by channel or by genre. The GUIDE
Plus+ system also allows you to automatically set your
viewing and recording selections quickly and easily.
In order to receive the correct TV listings information for
your country or region you need to set up the GUIDE
Plus+ system and ‘download’ the TV listings information.
If you haven’t already done this, please turn to Setting up
the GUIDE Plus+™ system on page 57 before
proceeding.
* GUIDE Plus+, ShowView, VIDEO Plus+, G-LINK are (1)
registered trademarks or trademarks of, (2) manufactured
under license from and (3) subject of various international
patents and patent applications owned by, or licensed to,
Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. and/or its related
affiliates.
Legal Notice
GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/OR ITS
RELATED AFFILIATES ARE NOT IN ANY WAY LIABLE FOR THE
ACCURACY OF THE PROGRAM SCHEDULE INFORMATION
PROVIDED BY THE GUIDE PLUS+ SYSTEM. IN NO EVENT SHALL
GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/OR ITS
RELATED AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNTS
REPRESENTING LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, OR
INDIRECT, SPECIAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN
CONNECTION WITH THE PROVISION OR USE OF ANY
INFORMATION, EQUIPMENT, OR SERVICES RELATING TO THE
GUIDE PLUS+ SYSTEM.
Using the GUIDE Plus+ system
All the various features and areas are color-coded for
ease of navigation. All screens (with the exception of
some setup screens) have the following common
elements:
Grid – Displays TV listings information for the next
seven days by channel and time.
Menu bar – Gives access to the various areas of the
GUIDE Plus+ system.
Information box – Shows short program
descriptions or help menus.
Action bar – Color-coded Action buttons change
function depending on the area.
Video window – Allows you to continue watching
the current program while using the GUIDE Plus+
system.
Information panels – Display program promotions
or instructions on the GUIDE Plus+ system.
Note
1 The GUIDE Plus+ system can’t be used when the Input Line System is set to 525 System (see also Input Line System on page 130).
Action bar
Information
box
Menu bar
Grid
Video
window
Information
Panel
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 68 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:38 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide 05
69
En
English
Navigating GUIDE Plus+
The table below shows a summary of the remote buttons
you’ll use to navigate the GUIDE Plus+ system.
One-Button-Record
The
RED
Action button (Record) is visible anytime you
can highlight a program title, including from the Grid,
after a search, or in your recommendations in the My TV
area.
The program name, date, channel, recording start and
end times are all set automatically when you set a timer
recording using One-Button-Record. You can edit the
settings if you want to anytime before the recording is
due to start (see
Editing a scheduled recording
on
page 73).
1 Use the
///
buttons to highlight a
program title.
2 Press the RED Action button (Record).
The program is now set for recording. When the program
is due to start, the recorder will switch to the correct
channel and start recording
1
.
You can review the shows you have set to record in
the Schedule Area (see also
The Schedule Area
on
page 73).
Key What it does
GUIDE
Press to access GUIDE Plus+ (also
use to exit GUIDE Plus+).
///
Use to navigate screens (highlight an
item).
RED
,
GREEN
,
YELLOW
,
BLUE
Action buttons that change
functionality depending on the Area.
DVD MENU
Press to jump directly to the Menu bar.
SHIFT +
TIMER REC
Press to go directly to the Schedule
area.
SHIFT +
INFO
Press to display extended information
for the current program.
VOLUME
+
MUTE
RECORDER RECEIVER
TOP MENU
RDS DISP
SYSTEM
SETUP
DISPLAYTEST TONE
ST +ST –
TUNE +
TUNE –
RETURN
DISC NAVIGATOR DVD MENU
HOME
MENU
AUDIO
SURROUND ADVANCED SOUND TIMER REC
SUBTITLE ANGLE PLAY MODE
SHIFT
VIDEO INPUT
INFO
GUIDE
HDD DVD
FM/AM AUDIO INPUT
HELP
TV/DVD
TV DIRECT
REC
INPUT
TV
ENTER
CLEAR
TV CONTROL
CHANNEL VOLUME
REC
PREV NEXT STEP/SLOW
STOP REC
REC MODE ONE TOUCH
COPY
CHANNEL

SKIP
CM
BACK
ENTER
Press to confirm a selection or to leave
the GUIDE Plus+ screen.
Number buttons
Use for numeric entry.
/
Press to select the previous/next page
of information (in the grid, for
example).
/
Press to select the previous/next day.
Note
1 Please note that recording times set using the GUIDE Plus+ system do not automatically change to reflect any changes that may occur in
the program broadcast schedules.
Key What it does
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 69 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:38 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide
05
70
En
Lock / Unlock video window
When you enter the GUIDE Plus+ system, the channel
you were watching remains visible in the video window.
The date stamp above the window lets you know the
channel, date and time.
The default setting for this window is ‘locked’, as
indicated by a closed padlock icon above the video
window. When locked, the video window always shows
the channel you were previously watching as you move
up and down through the listings grid.
If you prefer, you can unlock the video window so that as
you highlight different channels in the listings grid, the
current program showing on that channel is shown in
the video window.
1 Use the
///
buttons to highlight a
channel logo.
Channel logos are displayed to the left of program titles.
2 Press the RED Action button (Unlock).
The padlock icon above the video window becomes
unlocked. It remains unlocked for the remainder of your
current TV viewing session.
If you want to lock the video window again, follow the
same procedure. The
RED
Action button will now act as
Lock.
Channel mosaic screen
You can switch the display style of channels in Grid Area,
Schedule Area or My TV Area from a list to a mosaic of
channel icons by pressing the
YELLOW
Action button.
Select the channel icon you want using the cursor
buttons, then press
ENTER
to return to the previous
screen on that channel.
Areas
The GUIDE Plus+™ system consists of seven
Areas
. All
Areas can be accessed from the Menu bar.
Grid
– The GUIDE Plus+ system Home Area.
Displays TV listings information for the next seven
days by time and channel.
Search
– Search for TV programs by category (eg.,
Sport), subcategory (eg., Football) or keyword.
My TV
– Set up a profile and receive
recommendations according to your preferences.
Schedule
– Shows all scheduled recordings.
Info
– Area for additional information, such as
weather (not available in all regions).
Editor
– Change channel settings.
Setup
– Setup the GUIDE Plus+™ system.
The Grid Area
The Grid screen is the main TV listings screen of GUIDE
Plus+ and is the first screen that you see when you press
GUIDE
. You can see TV listings for the next seven days,
starting with the current day.
When you highlight a program in the Grid, you can see
information about it in the Information Box, including
title, synopsis, channel, source, time and length. If there
is an
i
symbol in the Information Box, it means that there
is an extended synopsis available. Press the
SHIFT
and
INFO
buttons to see it.
In some countries, you can also see a rating for a
particular program (mostly movies). These ratings are
provided by local partners, such as TV magazines.
From the Grid Area you can:
View and scroll through program listings
Read program synopsis
Tune to a program that’s currently showing
1
Set a program to record
Lock or unlock the video window.
Access Information panels.
Note
1If you’re using an external tuner (satellite tuner, for example), there will be a short delay of a couple of seconds before it tunes to the channel
after selecting it. This is normal.
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 70 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:38 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide 05
71
En
English
Browsing the Grid
Use the following remote buttons to browse the grid:
///
(cursor buttons) – Navigate the Grid
/
– Previous / next page
/
– Previous / next day
BLUE
Action button – Return to the current time/date in
the Grid.
ENTER
– Press on the current selection to exit GUIDE
Plus+ and start watching the program
The Search Area
From the Search Area you can:
Search by category
Search by subcategory
Search by keyword
Read program synopsis
Tune to a program that’s currently showing
Set a program to record
Access Information panels.
Searching
You can search for programs by category, subcategory or
by keyword (My Choice). Categories for searching
include Movies (purple), Sport (green), Children (blue)
and Others (teal). In some countries there is a further
subcatgory available called ‘Tip of the Day’. These are
programs recommended by a local partner, such as a TV
magazine.
1 Select ‘Search’ from the Menu bar.
2 Use the
///
buttons to select a category
and a subcategory.
If you choose
All
as the subcategory, all programs in
the category you selected will show up in the search
results.
3 Press
ENTER
to start the search.
The search results are shown sorted by time and date.
If no search results are displayed, it means there are
no programs for the current day that match your
search criteria.
Using My Choice keywords for a search
In addition to the standard categories, GUIDE Plus+ lets
you set your own keywords.
1 Press
(cursor left) to access My Choice.
2 Press the YELLOW Action button to add a
keyword.
3 Enter a keyword to appear in the menu.
Use the
///
buttons followed by
ENTER
to select
characters from the on-screen keyboard. When you’re
finished, press the
GREEN
Action button to exit and
continue.
4 Press
ENTER
to start a keyword search.
You can delete or edit keywords using the
RED
and
GREEN
Action buttons.
When you have set more than two keywords, an
All
subcategory automatically appears which allows you
to search for all your keywords.
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 71 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:38 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide
05
72
En
My TV Area
The My TV Area allows you to set up a personal profile.
You can define a profile by channels, themes and/or
keywords. As soon as a personal profile has been set,
GUIDE Plus+ continuously scans the TV listings for the
next seven days. Whenever you access the My TV Area, a
list of programs matching your profile appears.
From the My TV Area you can:
Set up a profile by channel, theme and/or keyword.
Edit and delete profiles.
Read program synopsis
Tune to a program that’s currently showing
Set a program to record
Access Information panels.
Setting up a profile
You can set up a profile with any combination of up to 16
channels, four categories and 16 keywords.
1 Select ‘My TV’ from the Menu bar.
2 Press the YELLOW Action button to set a profile.
Channels
is now highlighted.
3 To add a channel to your profile, press the
YELLOW Action button.
Select a channel from the mosaic of channel icons and
press
ENTER
. Repeat this step to add up to 16 channels.
4 To add a theme to your profile, highlight
‘Themes’ and press the YELLOW Action button.
Select a theme from the Search Area categories and
press
ENTER
. Repeat this step to add up to four
categories.
5 To add a keyword to your profile, highlight
‘Keywords’ and press the YELLOW Action button.
Use the
///
buttons followed by
ENTER
to select
characters from the on-screen keyboard. When you’re
finished, press the
GREEN
Action button to exit and
continue.
6 Press
ENTER
to activate your profile.
You can add up to 16 keywords by repeating step
5
.
You can edit or delete your profile using the
RED
and
GREEN
Action buttons.
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 72 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:38 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide 05
73
En
English
The Schedule Area
The Schedule Area is where you can set, see, edit and
delete scheduled (timer) recordings. (See also
Setting a
timer recording
on page 83 for further timer recording
features.)
From the Schedule Area you can:
Edit or delete a One-Button-Recording.
Set, edit or delete a VIDEO Plus+ recording.
Set, edit or delete a manual recording.
Editing a scheduled recording
You can edit any parameter in a scheduled recording, or
delete it if you no longer require it.
1 Highlight the left tile of a scheduled recording.
If you only want to edit the recording quality,
frequency, destination, timing or genre settings, skip
to step
6
below.
2 Press the GREEN Action button (Edit).
3 Use the cursor and number buttons to edit the
recording date, start time, end time and channel.
Use the
/
(cursor up/down) buttons or the number
buttons to edit.
Press the
GREEN
Action button to go to continue, or the
RED
Action button to go back.
4 Enter a name for the scheduled recording.
Use the
///
buttons followed by
ENTER
to select
characters from the on-screen keyboard.
After entering the whole name, press the
GREEN
Action
button to continue.
5 Highlight the right recording tile.
6Press the RED Action button (Quality) to change
the recording quality.
Select from
AUTO
1
,
XP
,
SP
,
LP
,
EP
,
SLP
,
SEP
or
MN
(if
manual recording is set to
On
.)
Note
1 This mode maximizes the recording quality to fit on to a single DVD disc. Can also be used when recording to HDD.
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 73 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:38 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide
05
74
En
7 Press the GREEN Action button (Frequency) to
change the recording frequency.
Select from the various options for one-time, daily and
weekly recordings.
8 Press YELLOW Action button (Destination) to
select the recording destination.
Select from
DVD
,
HDD
or
HDDr
(Auto Replace
Recording)
1
.
Auto Replace Recording is only available as an
option with regular daily or weekly recordings.
9 Press
(cursor right) to access the extended
recording options:
If you want to record to a particular HDD genre, use
the
YELLOW
Action button (
Genre
) to select one.
Use the
GREEN
Action button (
Timing
) to add extra
time to the end of the recording (
+0
,
+10
,
+20
,
+30
or
VPS/PDC
2
(
V–P
)).
Press
(cursor left) to display the standard
recording options again.
Deleting a scheduled recording
1 Highlight the left tile of a scheduled recording.
2 Press the RED Action button (Delete).
The scheduled event is deleted.
Note
1• For a DVD timer recording, if
Optimized Rec
(see
Optimized Rec
on page 134) is set to
On
(and VPS/PDC is off), the recorder will adjust the
recording quality to try and fit the recording on the disc. If the recording will not fit onto the disc even on MN1 recording quality then the Re-
covery Recording feature will automatically make the recording to the HDD instead.
• If there is very little free space left on the HDD, an Auto Replace Recording may not complete successfully.
• If the HDD is being used for playback or high-speed copying when an Auto Replace Recording is due to start, the new timer recording will
not replace the old one. However, the next time the timer recording starts, both of the older two programs will be erased.
2• If you set the timer recording to use VPS/PDC, you must switch the recorder into standby before the timer recording is due to start for it to
work correctly. For non-VPS/PDC timer recordings there is no need to switch the recorder into standby.
• Optimized Recording will not work if VPS/PDC is on.
• Up to 8 timer recordings can be set with VPS/PDC.
• VPS/PDC cannot be set for recordings made from an external input, or when the recording mode is set to
AUTO
.
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 74 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:38 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide 05
75
En
English
Setting a VIDEO Plus+
®
* recording
1 Select ‘Schedule’ from the Menu bar.
2 Press the RED Action button (VIDEO Plus+).
3 Use the number buttons to enter a PlusCode
programming number.
If you live in an area not yet covered by GUIDE Plus+
you may also have to input a channel number. Follow
the on-screen display to do this.
4 Press
ENTER
to confirm.
*
is a registered trademark of Gemstar
Development Corporation.
The VIDEO Plus+ system is manufactured under license
from Gemstar Development Corporation.
Setting a manual recording
1 Select ‘Schedule’ from the Menu bar.
2 Press the GREEN Action button (Manual).
3Use the number and
///
buttons to enter
the recording date, then press the GREEN Action
button (Next).
4 In the same way, enter the recording start time,
followed by the GREEN Action button (Next) to
confirm.
5 Enter the recording end time in the same way,
followed by the GREEN Action button (Next) to
confirm.
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 75 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:38 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide
05
76
En
6 Use the number buttons to enter a channel
number, then press the GREEN Action button (Next)
to confirm.
Alternatively, you can press the
YELLOW
Action button
(
Mosaic
) and use the
///
buttons to select a
channel from the mosaic, followed by
ENTER
.
The Info Area
This area is reserved for additional information such as
news, weather reports, stock quotes, and so on, and
varies by region. (Note that this feature is not available in
all countries/regions.)
The Editor Area
The Editor Area is the central location for you to manage
your channels. Any changes you make here will affect
what is displayed in the Grid Area. The Editor Area is
mainly used when setting up the GUIDE Plus+ system to
make any manual changes as necessary.
You can also use the Editor Area if new channels become
available in your area, or if you change from cable to
satellite, say, or move house.
From the Editor Area you can:
Display/hide channels in the grid (switch the channel
on/off).
Select a channel source (
Tuner
,
Ext. Rec 1
,
Ext. Rec.
2
, etc.).
Enter a channel program number.
Switching a channel on/off
You can choose whether or not to display a channel in the
Grid Area by switching the channel on or off in the Editor
Area.
1 Select ‘Editor’ from the Menu bar.
2Highlight the left channel tile of the channel you
want to switch on or off.
3 Press the RED Action button to switch the
channel on or off.
Changing the source and program number
1 Select ‘Editor’ from the Menu bar.
2 Highlight the right channel tile of the channel
you want to make a change to.
3 Press the RED Action button to change the
channel source, or the GREEN Action button to enter
a program number.
Each press of the
RED
Action button changes the
channel source (
Tuner
,
Ext. Rec 1
, etc.). To set a
program number, use the number buttons to enter a
program number then press
ENTER
. (When set to
Tuner
,
make sure that the program number matches the preset
number of this recorder for what you want to record).
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 76 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:38 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide 05
77
En
English
The Setup Area
The Setup Area is where you can set up the GUIDE Plus+
system for your particular region, TV reception
conditions, and so on.
Making changes to your GUIDE Plus+ setup
1 Select ‘Setup’ from the Menu bar.
2 Highlight the part you want to change.
You can change the Language, Country, Postal Code
1
and the External Receiver settings.
3 Press
ENTER
to confirm.
GUIDE Plus+ FAQ and
troubleshooting
This FAQ covers only a few questions. For a complete list
please consult the GUIDE Plus+ website at:
www.europe.guideplus.com
FAQ
When I tried setting up my external receiver I could not
get any of the attempts to work, what should I do?
A: There could be several reasons why your external
receiver could not be controlled.
– The connections could be wrong. Make sure that
the G-LINK cable is connected to the G-LINK
connector on the recorder and the IR blaster is in
front of the external receiver, pointing towards the IR
receiver of your external receiver. See
Connecting to a
cable box, satellite receiver or digital terrestrial receiver
on page 49.
– The code that is listed under your brand could be
wrong. Please try other codes for your brand under
satellite, cable or terrestrial. Go to the Setup Area and
choose one of the three options (cable, satellite or
terrestrial) that you have not already tried. Follow the
on-screen prompts to make sure that GUIDE Plus+
can change channels on your external receiver. If it
does not work, repeat the process, choosing different
reception and external receiver combinations until
you have tried all the codes for your brand of receiver
that are already in the GUIDE Plus+ system. If it still
does not work, see below on how to receive new
codes overnight.
– The unit has not yet received new codes. The nightly
data downloads frequently include new codes for
controlling external receivers. Please tune your
external receiver to your local host channel and leave
it on overnight. Switch this recorder into standby. The
next morning, please perform the GUIDE Plus+
setup again to see if your external receiver can now
be controlled.
– The external receiver that you use is currently not
supported. If, after leaving your external receiver on
overnight, and doing the Reception and External
Receiver Setup again, it still does not respond, please
call Customer Support to report your brand and
model.
Note
1Making changes to the Country or Postal Code settings may require a new download of TV listings information. This can take up to 24 hours.
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 77 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:38 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide
05
78
En
My external receiver was successfully setup. However
I have found that when the GUIDE Plus+ system has
to change to a channel with a 3-digit program number
in the external receiver's preset, it does not work. It
looks like the GUIDE Plus+ system can only send two
digits.
With the number of channels increasing, the number
of digits has increased as well. While older boxes use
only 2 digits, newer boxes require up to 4. It is
possible that you selected an older code for your
brand during set-up. Please access the Setup Area,
select External Receiver and repeat the setup for your
brand. (Note: Every time you see the on-screen
question about whether the receiver has changed to
a certain channel, GUIDE Plus+ has sent a different
code). Try all the different codes until your GUIDE
Plus+ system can control your external receiver
correctly. If you have no success, try to receive new
codes overnight.
•I used to receive data through my terrestrial antenna or
analog cable without a set-top box. Now, I have
“upgraded” to a satellite system or to digital cable with
external receiver. What should I do to receive data for
the GUIDE Plus+ system?
You can try to receive your host channel through your
new reception method. If you have problems to
receive data we recommend that you keep your
analog terrestrial or cable connection only to receive
data this way. It is important that you identify your
host channel correctly in the Editor Area.
After I performed the initial set-up I found that the line-
up for all the channels received via the external set top
box is incorrect. How do I correct this?
You can change the line-up in the editor according to
your preferences. Access the Editor Area. Select the
channels that you would like to change. Change the
source and preset number according to your
preferences.
•I performed the set-up but after many hours I still have
a blank EPG what is going wrong?
There are several possibilities:
– Connections are wrong. See
Connecting up
on
page 45 to double check everything.
– The initial setup of GUIDE Plus+ was completed
incorrectly. Try setting it up again (see
Setting up the
GUIDE Plus+™ system
on page 57).
– Your cabling and setup is OK, but the recorder has
not been connected for enough time to receive the TV
listings data. Leave the recorder in standby overnight.
– For external receiver users only: The connections
and setup are OK, but the external receiver was not
tuned to the correct host channel. Check the list of
host channels (see step 5 of
Setting up the GUIDE
Plus+™ system
on page 57) and leave the recorder
in standby and the external receiver on overnight
tuned to the correct host channel.
– You live in a country/region where the GUIDE Plus+
system is not yet available. Check the list of countries
to see if you are in a region that is supported.
•I used the One-Button-Record feature (red Action
button) to set a recording, but I recorded the wrong
channel.
If the channel to be recorded is received via the
external receiver first make sure that the external
receiver was left switched on. Next, in the Editor
Area, make sure that the channel to be recorded is
correctly set: Access the Editor Area. Check the
source and program number of the channel that you
wanted to record. Change the source and preset
numbers if incorrect.
If you are recording from the recorder’s internal tuner
(the
Tuner
setting), make sure that the program
number is the same as the preset number set on this
recorder. If they are different, go to the Editor Area
and change the program number to match the
recorder’s preset number.
The TV listings information doesn’t update.
The latest TV listings information is automatically
downloaded by the recorder overnight. This only
happens if the recorder is in standby; if the recorder
is left on, it will not download. When not using the
recorder, please switch it into standby.
Data downloads can take several hours. The front
panel display shows
EPG
when downloading. If you
switch the recorder on while
EPG
is displayed, the
download will be canceled.
GUIDE Plus+ is not supported in my area, but when I
switch the recorder into standby, after a while the front
panel display shows
EPG
.. Can I stop this from
happening?
If GUIDE Plus+ is not supported in your area, please
do not set the postal code in the GUIDE Plus+ setup
(see
Setting up the GUIDE Plus+™ system
on
page 57). When GUIDE Plus+ service starts in your
area, please set the postal code again.
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 78 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:38 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Recording 06
79
En
English
Chapter 6
Recording
About DVD recording
This recorder can record on both DVD-R and DVD-RW
media. The main difference between the two is that
DVD-R discs can only be recorded once, while DVD-RW
can be recorded, erased and re-recorded many times.
Both types of disc can be initialized for Video mode or VR
mode recording. Each has its advantages, and it depends
on what you want to do with the recording which mode
you choose.
If you want to edit your recordings in any significant way,
VR mode offers greater possibilities for cutting, copying,
and changing the way the video is presented.
Video mode is less flexible when it comes to editing, but
it has the advantage that it is compatible with standard
DVD players (many of which won’t play VR mode discs1).
Once a disc is initialized for a particular mode, all
recording on that disc will be in that mode.
Important
The maximum number of titles and chapters that can
be recorded on a VR mode disc is 99 and 999
respectively; on a Video mode disc the maximum
number of titles and chapters is 99 and 99. No more
recording is possible on a disc that already contains
the maximum number of chapters/titles.
Unfinalized Video mode discs are not usable in other
DVD recorders. Likewise, unfinalized video mode
discs recorded using other recorders are not usable
in this recorder.
Pioneer takes no responsibility for recording failure
due to power cuts, defective discs, or damage to the
recorder.
Fingerprints, dirt and small scratches on a disc can
affect playback and/or recording performance.
Please take proper care of your discs.
See also Disc / content format playback compatibility
on page 42 for detailed disc compatibility
information.
Although this recorder can record PAL, SECAM,
NTSC and PAL-60, you can’t mix multiple TV line
systems on one disc. A disc can contain PAL and
SECAM recordings, or NTSC and PAL-60. See also
Additional information about the TV system settings
on page 137.
About HDD recording
Recording to the internal hard disk drive (HDD) is very
flexible; you have the full choice of recording quality
options, including manual mode, and of course you can
record, erase and re-record as many times as you like.
The capacity of the hard disk drive means that you can
store many hours of video on it, even using the higher
quality recording modes.
Important
The maximum number of titles/chapters per title that
can be recorded on the HDD is 999 and 99
respectively. No more recording is possible on the
HDD after the maximum number of titles has been
reached.
The maximum continuous recording time for one title
is 12 hours.
It is possible to record both PAL and NTSC titles on
the HDD. Before recording, you need to make sure
that the Input Line System setting (page 137)
matches the TV line system of the source you’re
recording.
HDD Video mode compatibility
When recording to the HDD you can choose to record in
one of two formats. Set the format from the HDD
Recording Format item in the Initial Setup menu (see
page 135).
When set to Video Mode On, high-speed copying from
HDD to Video mode DVD is possible. When recording a
bilingual broadcast, set which channel you want to
record from the Initial Setup menu (see Bilingual
Recording on page 132).
When HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off,
high-speed copying isn’t possible. However, both
channels of bilingual broadcasts are recorded and you
can switch the audio on playback.
Note
1.Some DVD players, such as some Pioneer models, are compatible with VR mode discs. Check the operating instructions for your player for
VR mode compatibility information.
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 79 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:48 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Recording
06
80
En
Recording time and picture quality
There are six preset recording quality modes
1
:
XP
– High quality setting, gives about one hour of
recording time on a DVD disc.
SP
(Standard Play) – Default quality, used for most
applications, gives about two hours of recording time
on a DVD.
LP
(Long Play) – Lower video quality than SP, but
doubles the recording time on a DVD to about four
hours.
EP
(Extended Play) – Lower quality than LP, but gives
about six hours of recording time on a DVD disc.
SLP
(Super Long Play) – Lower quality than EP, but
gives about eight hours of recording time on a DVD
disc.
SEP
(Super Extended Play) – Lowest video quality but
gives about ten hours of recording time on a DVD
disc.
Please note that there is a trade-off between recording
time and quality. The longer the possible recording time,
the lower the recorded picture quality.
In addition to these settings, when Manual Recording is
On (see
Manual Recording
on page 134) you can access
32 different recording quality/time settings (
MN1
MN32
), a high-quality audio mode (
LPCM
), and a super-
high quality (data transfer rate of around 15 Mbps) HDD
recording mode (
XP+
).
When setting a timer recording there is a further option,
AUTO
, which maximizes the recording quality for the
space available on the disc loaded at the time of
recording. (If recording to the HDD, the recording quality
is maximized to fit on to a DVD disc.)
Recorded audio
In all except the
LPCM
mode, sound is recorded in two
channel Dolby Digital format. When set to
LPCM
, sound
is recorded in high quality, uncompressed Linear PCM
format.
If the broadcast audio is bilingual and you are recording
in Video mode or to the HDD with the HDD Recording
Format set to Video Mode On, or on the
LPCM
setting,
use the Bilingual Recording setting (page 132) to select
the
A/L
or
B/R
audio channel to record before recording
starts. In other cases, both channels of a bilingual
broadcast will be recorded and you can switch on
playback.
Restrictions on video recording
You cannot record copy-protected video using this
recorder. Copy-protected video includes DVD-Video discs
and some satellite broadcasts. If copy-protected material
is encountered during a recording, recording will pause
automatically and an error message will be displayed on-
screen.
Video that is ‘copy-once only’ can only be recorded on the
HDD or in VR mode (see below).
When recording a TV broadcast or through an external
input, you can display copy control information on
screen. (see
Displaying disc information on-screen
on
page 65).
CPRM
CPRM is a copy protection/scrambling system developed
for the recording of ‘copy once’ broadcast programs.
CPRM stands for
Content Protection for Recordable
Media
.
This recorder is CPRM compatible, which means that
you can record copy-once broadcast programs, but you
cannot then make a copy of those recordings. CPRM
recordings can only be made on CPRM-compatible
DVD-R (ver. 2.0/8x or higher) or DVD-RW (ver. 1.1 or
higher) discs formatted in VR mode or on the HDD.
DVD CPRM recordings can only be played on players that
are specifically compatible with CPRM.
Recording equipment and copyright
Recording equipment should be used only for lawful
copying and you are advised to check carefully what is
lawful copying in the country in which you are making a
copy. Copying of copyright material such as films or
music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal exception
or consented to by the rightowners.
This product incorporates copyright protection
technology that is protected by method claims of
certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property
rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other
rights owners. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovision
Corporation, and is intended for home and other
limited viewing uses only unless otherwise
authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
Note
1.All recording times (both in this manual and those shown by the recorder) are approximate. This is because of the way that the video is re-
corded; you may get slightly more or slightly less, depending on what you’re recording.
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 80 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:48 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Recording 06
81
En
English
Setting the picture quality/recording
time
Before starting a recording, you will usually want to set
the picture quality/recording time. There are six standard
settings available, which allow you to choose a balance
between picture quality and recording time.
When Manual Recording is set to On (see
Manual
Recording
on page 134), a further option will be available
(
MN1
32
,
LPCM
or
XP+
, depending on what you set).
See also
Recording time and picture quality
on page 80 for
more information.
Press REC MODE repeatedly to select a recording
setting.
XP
– High quality
SP
– Standard play
LP
– Long play
EP
– Extended play
SLP
– Super Long play
SEP
– Super Extended play
MN
/
LPCM
1
/
XP+
2
– Manual / Linear PCM / XP+
(available only when manual recording is on)
The setting is indicated in the front panel display, and
shown on-screen together with the recording time for a
blank recordable disc. If a recordable disc is loaded, the
approximate remaining recording time for that disc is
also shown. (Note that if the On Screen Display setting
(see
On-Screen Display
on page 136) is
Off
then this
information is not displayed.)
Basic recording from the TV
Follow the instructions below to record a TV program.
Recording starts immediately and continues until the
disc is full or you stop the recording.
1Press HDD or DVD to record to the hard disk drive
or a recordable DVD respectively.
If you’re recording to DVD, load a recordable disc (if
you load a new blank DVD-RW disc, the recorder
takes a short while to initialize the disc).
2 Use the CHANNEL +/– buttons to select the TV
channel to record.
The front panel display shows the channel number:
Note
1.Audio is recorded in 16-bit Linear PCM format, video is recorded at XP quality. When recording a bilingual broadcast, select which audio chan-
nel to record (see
Bilingual Recording
on page 132).
2.Applicable only to HDD recording. (If this setting is used when recording to DVD,
MN32
is used.) When copied to DVD, XP+ recordings are
always copied in real time.
VR mode Video mode HDD
AUDIO
SURROUND ADVANCED SOUND TIMER REC
SUBTITLE ANGLE PLAY MODE
SHIFT
TV/DVD
TV DIRECT
REC
INPUTTV
TV CONTROL
CHANNEL VOLUME
REC
PREV NEXT STEP/SLOW
STOP REC
REC MODE ONE TOUCH
COPY
VR mode Video mode HDD
VOLUME
+
MUTE
RECORDER RECEIVER
TOP MENU
RDS DISP
SYSTEM
SETUP
DISPLAYTEST TONE
ST +ST –
TUNE +
TUNE –
RETURN
DISC NAVIGATOR DVD MENU
HOME
MENU
AUDIO
SURROUND ADVANCED SOUND TIMER REC
SUBTITLE ANGLE PLAY MODE
SHIFT
VIDEO INPUT
INFO
GUIDE
HDD DVD
FM/AM AUDIO INPUT
HELP
TV/DVD
TV DIRECT
REC
INPUT
TV
ENTER
CLEAR
TV CONTROL
CHANNEL VOLUME
REC
PREV NEXT STEP/SLOW
STOP REC
REC MODE ONE TOUCH
COPY
CHANNEL

SKIP
CM
BACK
Channel preset
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 81 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:48 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Recording
06
82
En
While the recorder is stopped, you can also use the
number buttons on the remote to select the channel.
(For channel 6, press
6
then
ENTER
; for channel 24,
press
2, 4
then
ENTER
)
If the recorder is stopped, you can also use the
+/–
buttons on the front panel to select the channel
number.
3 Use the REC MODE button to set the picture
quality/recording time.
See
Setting the picture quality/recording time
above
for detailed instructions.
4 Use the AUDIO button to select the audio
channel to record.
See
Changing audio channels
on page 61 for more on
this.
When recording in VR mode, if a broadcast is
bilingual, both audio channels are recorded, allowing
you to switch the audio channel on playback. The
only exception to this is when the picture quality is set
to
LPCM
, in which case you do need to select the
audio channel before recording.
5 Press
REC to start recording.
If you want to set a recording end time, press the
REC
button repeatedly. The recording time increases in 30
minute increments, up to a maximum of six hours. The
time the recording will end is shown on-screen and in the
front panel display. When the recording ends, the
recorder automatically switches into standby if no other
operation is being performed.
To cancel the set recording time, press
REC
.
If you want to pause recording at any time, press
. Press again to restart the recording. (If recording
to the HDD or in VR mode, a new chapter is started
after recording restarts)
6 To stop the recording, press
STOP REC.
If you set the recording time in the previous step, you
can still stop the recording anytime by pressing
STOP REC
.
Recording will stop automatically when there is no
more space on the HDD/DVD, or after 12 hours of
HDD recording (whichever is sooner).
If VPS/PDC is active for two timer programs that are
programmed to start at the same time, then the
program that actually starts first takes priority.
Tip
During recording you can turn on/off the SCART loop
through function. During recording, press the front
panel
+
button to switch to
SCART THRU
(loop
through on), or
to switch to
SCART NORM
(loop
though off). Note that you can’t switch loop through
on if recording from the
AV2/(INPUT 1/DECODER)
or
AV1(RGB)-TV
connectors. Also, loop through is
automatically reset to off after recording has
finished.
Direct recording from TV
If you connected this recorder to your TV using a SCART
cable, and your TV supports Direct Recording, you can
record whatever is currently being shown on the TV
without having to worry about what channel preset the
recorder is on. Check the instructions that came with
your TV if you’re not sure whether your TV supports this
feature.
1 If necessary, load a recordable disc.
2 Set the picture quality/recording time using the
REC MODE button.
3 Press TV DIRECT REC to start recording.
If you want to set a recording time, press the
REC
button repeatedly. The recording time increases in 30
minute increments, up to a maximum of six hours. You
can see the recording time on-screen and in the front
panel display. When the recording ends, the recorder
automatically switches into standby if no other operation
is being performed.
To cancel the set recording time, press
REC
.
If you want to pause recording at any time, press
. Press again to restart the recording. (If recording
to the HDD or in VR mode, a new chapter is started
after recording restarts)
4 To stop the recording, press
STOP REC.
If you set the recording time in step
3
, you can still
stop the recording anytime by pressing
STOP REC
.
Recording will stop automatically when there is no
more space on the HDD/DVD, or after 12 hours of
HDD recording (whichever is sooner).
AUDIO
SURROUND ADVANCED SOUND TIMER REC
SUBTITLE ANGLE PLAY MODE
SHIFT
TV/DVD
TV DIRECT
REC
INPUT
TV
TV CONTROL
CHANNEL VOLUME
REC
PREV NEXT STEP/SLOW
STOP REC
REC MODE ONE TOUCH
COPY
SKIP
CM
BACK
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 82 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:48 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Recording 06
83
En
English
Tip
You can press
TV DIRECT REC
while the recorder is
in standby to switch on and immediately start
recording.
Please note that you can’t record from another
component (VCR, etc.) that is connected by a SCART
cable to the
AV2/(INPUT 1/DECODER)
connector
using the TV Direct Recording feature.
Setting a timer recording
Using the timer recording features you can program up
to 32 timer recordings up to a month in advance. Timer
recording programs can be set to record just once, every
day, or every week.
There are two ways to program a timer recording; using
the GUIDE Plus+ system (see
The Schedule Area
on
page 73) or using the Easy Timer Recording feature (see
Easy Timer Recording
below).
You can set the recording quality for your timer recording
in the same way as for a regular recording, but with the
added option of an
AUTO
mode, which maximizes the
recording quality for the space available on the disc (if
recording to DVD), or to fit on to a blank DVD disc (if
recording to HDD).
You can set timer recordings to record to a recordable
DVD or to the hard disk drive. For regular (daily or weekly)
HDD timer recordings that you don’t need to keep, you
can use the Auto Replace Recording feature to
automatically replace the previous timer recording with
the new one. Note that when you use this feature, the
previous recording made on that timer program will be
replaced by the next one, regardless of whether you have
watched it yet or not.
You can also set the recorder so that it will adjust the
recording quality to try and fit the recording on to the disc
if it would not otherwise fit at the recording quality you set
(see
Optimized Rec
on page 134 for more on this).
Finally, if you set a timer recording to record to DVD but
there isn’t a recordable DVD loaded at the time of the
recording, the Recovery Recording feature will
automatically record the program to the HDD for you.
This recorder is compatible with VPS (Video
Programming System) and PDC (Program Delivery
Control) systems used by many TV stations to ensure that
a timer recording catches the whole program even when
the program is not running to schedule. Up to eight timer
programs can be set with VPS/PDC on.
Important
•A timer recording can’t be set if there are already 32
timer programs waiting to be recorded.
Timer recording will not start if:
– The recorder is already recording.
– A disc is being initialized, finalized or unfinalized.
Timer recording will start when the operation
preventing timer recording has finished.
If a recordable DVD that doesn’t support
simultaneous playback and recording (see
Simultaneous recording and playback
on page 86) is
playing when a DVD timer recording is due to start,
playback will automatically stop to allow the
recording to start.
The timer indicator ( ) lights in the front panel
display when the timer is active. If the indicator is
blinking it means that (for a DVD timer recording)
there is no disc loaded, or the disc loaded is not
recordable (for an HDD timer recording it means that
the HDD is not recordable).
Approximately two minutes before a timer recording
is set to start, the recorder will go into timer recording
standby. In timer recording standby you cannot use
some functions.
The maximum length for timer recordings made to
the HDD is 24 hours. However, because one title
(HDD) is limited to 12 hours, recordings over 12
hours will be spread over two titles. Note that there
will be a break in the recording of a few seconds
between titles.
VPS/PDC may not work with all broadcast stations in
your country/area. Check with the stations for
compatibility.
The hours between 3:00 and 5:00 in the morning are
used by GUIDE Plus+ to download program
information. During these times, VPS/PDC may not
work reliably; leave VPS/PDC off if you set a timer
recording for these times.
VR mode Video mode HDD
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 83 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:48 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Recording
06
84
En
Easy Timer Recording
As the name suggests, Easy Timer Recording makes
setting up a timer recording as simple as possible.
1
1 Press HOME MENU and select ‘Easy Timer’.
2 Set the TV channel and recording quality.
Use the
CHANNEL +/–
buttons to set the channel you
want to record.
Use the
REC MODE
button to set the recording
quality. Press repeatedly to switch between
XP
,
SP
,
LP
,
EP
,
SLP
,
SEP
and
AUTO
(and
MN
if manual
recording mode is on).
DVD recording:
The
AUTO
option automatically sets
the best recording quality for the space available on
the disc loaded at the time of recording.
HDD recording:
The
AUTO
option automatically sets
the best recording quality that would fit on to a blank
DVD disc.
Press
DVD
to record to DVD disc, or
HDD
if you want
to record to the hard disk drive.
3 Use
///
to move the cursor to the
recording start date and time on the grid.
You can move the cursor forward or back an hour at
a time using the
and
buttons.
Each row of the grid is one day (you can set the timer
recording for up to a month in advance). Each column is
a 15 minute interval.
The darker area represents time that has already passed
and can’t therefore be selected. The lighter area is time
that’s available.
4 Press ENTER to set the start time.
The start date and time is displayed in the middle of the
screen.
You can go back and reset the start time if you need
to by pressing
RETURN
.
Note
1.You can’t use VPS/PDC with Easy Timer Recording. Set a scheduled recording using GUIDE Plus+ if you want to use VPS/PDC.
VOLUME
+
MUTE
RECORDER RECEIVER
TOP MENU
RDS DISP
SYSTEM
SETUP
DISPLAYTEST TONE
ST +ST –
TUNE +
TUNE –
RETURN
DISC NAVIGATOR DVD MENU
HOME
MENU
AUDIO
SURROUND ADVANCED SOUND TIMER REC
SUBTITLE ANGLE PLAY MODE
SHIFT
VIDEO INPUT
INFO
GUIDE
HDD DVD
FM/AM AUDIO INPUT
HELP
TV/DVD
TV DIRECT
REC
INPUT
TV
ENTER
CLEAR
TV CONTROL
CHANNEL VOLUME
REC
PREV NEXT STEP/SLOW
STOP REC
REC MODE ONE TOUCH
COPY
CHANNEL

SKIP
CM
BACK
Easy Timer
Photo Viewer
Disc Navigator Disc Setup
Initial Setup
Video/Audio Adjust
Play Mode Copy
Jukebox
GUIDE Plus+
Easy Timer Recording
Pr 7
SAT 1/01 9:30
HDD
CHANNEL +/HDD/DVD
SP
REC MODE
8:00 9:00 10:00 11:00 12:00 13:00 14:00
– ––:––
1/01
2/01
3/01
Easy Timer Recording
Pr 7
SAT 1/01 11:45
HDD
CHANNEL +/HDD/DVD
SP
REC MODE
8:00 9:00 10:00 11:00 12:00 13:00 14:00
– ––:––
1/01
2/01
3/01
Current time
Recording start time
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 84 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:48 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Recording 06
85
En
English
5 Use the
/
to move the cursor to the
recording end time on the grid.
As you move the cursor around the grid, an arrow
stretches from the start time to the current cursor
position, representing the length of the recording. A
recording of up to six hours can be set.
6 Press ENTER to set the end time.
7Select ‘Yes’ to set the timer recording and exit, or
‘No’ to go back to the timer recording screen.
You can check the timer recording details you just set
from the Schedule Area in GUIDE Plus+; see
The
Schedule Area
on page 73).
Extending a timer recording in progress
You can extend a timer recording beyond the
programmed end time in two different ways. This can be
useful if a broadcast program overruns, for example.
Moving the end time by 30-minute blocks
1During timer recording, press and hold
REC for
three seconds.
The timer indicator disappears from the front panel
display.
2 Press
REC repeatedly to extend recording in 30
minute increments.
Canceling and stopping a timer recording in
progress
After a timer recording has started, you can cancel the
program (but continue recording), or stop recording
completely if you need to.
1During timer recording, press and hold
REC for
three seconds.
Only the program is canceled (the timer indicator
disappears); recording continues so that you can
manually stop recording whenever you like.
2 When you want to stop recording completely,
press
STOP REC.
Tip
You can also stop a timer recording immediately by
pressing
STOP REC
then selecting
Yes
to confirm.
Preventing use of the recorder before a
timer recording (child lock)
You can make all the front panel and remote control
buttons inoperative using the child lock feature. This is
useful when you set a timer recording and want to make
sure that the timer settings are not changed before
recording has finished.
1 If the recorder is on, switch it into standby.
2 Press and hold
on the front panel for three
seconds to lock the controls.
The front panel display briefly shows
LOCK
. If any buttons
are pressed on the remote or front panel,
LOCK
is briefly
displayed again.
To unlock the recorder, press and hold
on the front
panel for three seconds until the display shows
UNLOCK
.
To cancel a timer recording when the recorder is
locked, first unlock the recorder (see above), then
press and hold
REC
for three seconds.
Easy Timer Recording
Pr 7
SAT 1/01 11:45
HDD
CHANNEL +/HDD/DVD
SP
REC MODE
11:00 12:00 13:00 14:00 15:00 16:00 17:00
– 13:45
1/01
2/01
3/01
Recording start time
Recording end time
TOP MENU
RDS DISP
SYSTEM
SETUP
DISPLAYTEST TONE
ST +ST –
TUNE +
TUNE –
RETURN
DISC NAVIGATOR DVD MENU
HOME
MENU
AUDIO
SURROUND ADVANCED SOUND TIMER REC
SUBTITLE ANGLE PLAY MODE
INFO
GUIDE
HELP
INPUT
TV
ENTER
CLEAR
REC
PREV NEXT STEP/SLOW
STOP REC
REC MODE ONE TOUCH
COPY
SKIP
CM
BACK
AUDIO
SURROUND ADVANCED SOUND TIMER REC
SUBTITLE ANGLE PLAY MODE
INPUTTV
REC
PREV NEXT STEP/SLOW
STOP REC
REC MODE ONE TOUCH
COPY
SKIP
CM
BACK
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 85 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:48 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Recording
06
86
En
Timer recording FAQ
Frequently Asked Questions
Even though the timer is set, the recorder doesn’t start
recording!
Check that the disc loaded or HDD is recordable, not
locked (see
Lock Disc
on page 125), and that there are
fewer than 99/999 titles already on the DVD/HDD.
The recorder won’t let me enter a timer program! Why
not?
You can’t enter a timer program if the clock isn’t set.
What happens when two or more timer programs
overlap?
Basically, the program with the earlier recording start
time has priority. However, the recorder will start
recording the program with the later start time after
the earlier program is finished. If two programs have
the same times (but different channels, for example),
the program set most recently takes priority.
If VPS/PDC is active for two timer programs that are
programmed to start at the same time, then the
program that actually starts first takes priority.
Simultaneous recording and
playback
A feature called Chase Play makes it possible to watch a
recording in progress (DVD or HDD) from the start of the
recording (as in, playback is ‘chasing’ the recording). For
example, perhaps you have to miss the first 30 minutes of
a movie on TV; you can start recording, then start
watching the movie, from the beginning, while the
recorder is still recording 30 minutes ahead of you.
In fact, you’re not just limited to watching the recording
in progress; you can watch anything else already on the
DVD or HDD by selecting it from the Disc Navigator
screen (see
Using the Disc Navigator with recordable
discs and the HDD
on page 92).
Important
Note that you must use a DVD-RW Ver. 1.1 / 2x or
Ver. 1.2 disc to be able to use this feature.
You may not be able to use this feature with a
DVD-RW disc that was first initialized on another
recorder.
Chase playback is not possible using a VR mode
DVD-R disc.
During recording, press
to start playback from
the beginning of the current recording
1
, or press
DISC NAVIGATOR and select another title to play
from there.
You can use all the usual playback controls, such as
pause, slow-motion play, scan
2
and skip.
To stop playback, press
(recording will continue).
To stop recording, press
STOP REC
(playback will
continue).
During recording or in timer recording standby, you
can’t play an HDD title, DVD or Video CD/Super VCD
disc if the Input Line System setting doesn’t match
the TV line system of the disc/HDD title (see also
Additional information about the TV system settings
on page 137). Also, during simultaneous recording
and playback, if the TV line system of the playback
track/title changes then playback will automatically
stop.
Note
1.You can’t start playback immediately after recording starts. Simultaneous playback and recording doesn’t work while copying or backing up.
2.When scanning a DVD, no sound is output if the recorder is also recording the DVD (see
Scanning discs
on page 94).
VR mode HDD
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 86 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:48 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Recording 06
87
En
English
Recording from an external
component
You can record from an external component, such as a
camcorder or VCR, connected to one of the recorder’s
external inputs.
1 Make sure that the component you want to
record from is connected properly to the DVD
recorder.
See Chapter 2 (
Connecting up
) for connection options.
2 Press VIDEO INPUT repeatedly to select one of
the external inputs to record from.
There are three analog inputs and a DV digital input. The
current input is shown on-screen and in the front panel
display:
AV2/L1
– Input 1
1
L2
– Input 2 (front panel)
L3
– Input 3
DV
– DV input (front panel)
Check that the
Audio In
settings for
External Audio
,
Bilingual Recording
and
DV Input
are as you want them
(see
Audio In Settings
on page 132).
If the aspect ratio is distorted (squashed or
stretched), adjust on the source component or your
TV before recording.
3 Set up the recorder.
Use
REC MODE
to set the recording quality. See
Setting the picture quality/recording time
on page 81
for detailed information.
Press
HDD
to record to the hard disk drive, or
DVD
to
record to a DVD.
4 Press
REC when you’re ready to start
recording.
The recorder will only start recording from the
DV IN
jack if there is a valid signal. Recording will also
pause if the signal is interrupted during recording.
If your source is copy-protected using CopyGuard,
you will not be able to record it. See
Restrictions on
video recording
on page 80 for more details.
Note
1.This cannot be selected if
AV2/L1 In
is set to
Decoder
(see
AV2/L1 In
on page 132).
VR mode Video mode HDD
VOLUME
+
MUTE
RECORDER RECEIVER
TOP MENU
RDS DISP
SYSTEM
SETUP
DISPLAYTEST TONE
ST +ST –
TUNE +
TUNE –
RETURN
DISC NAVIGATOR DVD MENU
HOME
MENU
AUDIO
SURROUND ADVANCED SOUND TIMER REC
SUBTITLE ANGLE PLAY MODE
VIDEO INPUT
INFO
GUIDE
HDD DVD
FM/AM AUDIO INPUT
HELP
INPUT
TV
ENTER
CLEAR
REC
PREV NEXT STEP/SLOW
STOP REC
REC MODE ONE TOUCH
COPY
CHANNEL

SKIP
CM
BACK
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 87 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:48 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Recording
06
88
En
Recording from a DV camcorder
You can record from a DV camcorder connected to the
DV IN
jack on the front panel of this recorder. Using the
recorder’s remote, you can control both the camcorder
and this recorder.
Before recording, make sure that the audio input for the
DV IN
jack is setup (see
DV Input
on page 133).
Important
The source signal must be DVC-SD format
Some camcorders cannot be controlled using this
recorder’s remote.
If you connect a second recorder using a DV cable,
you cannot control the second unit from this one.
You can’t control this unit remotely from a
component connected to the
DV IN
jack.
You can’t record date and time information from DV
cassette.
During DV recording, if a part of the tape is blank, or
has copy-protected material on it, this recorder will
pause recording. Recording will restart automatically
when there is a recordable signal. However, if there is
more than 10 seconds of blank tape, this recorder will
stop recording and the camcorder should stop
(depending on the camcorder).
For best results when recording from a DV
camcorder to this recorder, we recommend cueing
the camcorder to the place you want to start
recording from and setting the camcorder to play-
pause.
1Make sure your digital camcorder is connected to
the front panel DV IN jack.
Also, set the camcorder to VTR mode.
2 Set up the recorder.
Use
REC MODE
to set the recording quality. See
Setting the picture quality/recording time
on page 81
for detailed information.
Make sure a recordable disc is loaded if you want to
record to DVD.
3From the Initial Settings menu, check that the DV
audio input is setup as you require.
See
DV Input
on page 133 for more on this.
Check also that the
Audio In
settings for
External
Audio
and
Bilingual Recording
are as you want
them (see
Audio In Settings
on page 132).
4 Press HOME MENU, select ‘Copy’, then ‘DV
Record’ from the menu.
DV recording only works when the digital camcorder
is in VTR mode with a tape loaded.
5 Select ‘Record to Hard Disk Drive’ or ‘Record to
DVD’ to record to the hard disk drive or a recordable
DVD respectively.
6 Find the place on the camcorder tape that you
want to start recording from.
For best results, pause playback at the point from which
you want to record.
VR mode Video mode HDD
VOLUME
+
MUTE
RECORDER RECEIVER
TOP MENU
RDS DISP
SYSTEM
SETUP
DISPLAYTEST TONE
ST +ST –
TUNE +
TUNE –
RETURN
DISC NAVIGATOR DVD MENU
HOME
MENU
AUDIO
SURROUND ADVANCED SOUND TIMER REC
SUBTITLE ANGLE PLAY MODE
SHIFT
VIDEO INPUT
INFO
GUIDE
HDD DVD
FM/AM AUDIO INPUT
HELP
TV/DVD
TV DIRECT
REC
INPUT
TV
ENTER
CLEAR
TV CONTROL
CHANNEL VOLUME
REC
PREV NEXT STEP/SLOW
STOP REC
REC MODE ONE TOUCH
COPY
CHANNEL

SKIP
CM
BACK
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 88 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:48 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Recording 06
89
En
English
Depending on your camcorder, you can use this
recorder’s remote to control the camcorder using the
,
,
,
,
,
and
buttons.
7 Use the
/
buttons to select ‘Start Rec’ and
press ENTER.
Recording is automatically paused if the recorder
detects no signal, or a copy-protected signal.
Recording restarts when there is a non-copy-
protected signal.
You can pause or stop the recording by selecting
Pause Rec
or
Stop Rec
from the on-screen display.
You cannot control the camcorder from this remote
control during recording.
If you restart recording after stopping the camcorder,
the first few seconds of the camcorder tape will not
be recorded. Use the pause button on your
camcorder instead and recording will start
immediately.
HDD and DVD-RW (VR Mode) only:
A chapter marker
is inserted every time there is a break in the timecode
on the DV tape. This happens when the recording is
stopped or paused then restarted, for example.
While recording, you cannot exit the DV recording
screen using the
HOME MENU
or
RETURN
button.
See also
DV-related messages
on page 146 if you
encounter an error while using the
DV IN
jack.
Frequently Asked Questions
•I can’t get my DV camcorder to work with the recorder!
Check that the DV cable is properly connected. Also
make sure that what you’re trying to record is not
copy-protected.
If it still doesn’t work, try switching off the camcorder
then switch back on.
There’s a picture, but no sound!
Try switching the
DV Input
setting (see
DV Input
on
page 133) between
Stereo 1
and
Stereo 2
.
1
Playing your recordings on other DVD
players
Most regular DVD players can play finalized discs
recorded in Video mode. A number of players (including
many Pioneer models) can also play DVD-RW discs
recorded in VR mode, finalized or not. Most players will
not play VR mode DVD-R discs, although some DVD-
ROM drives and DVD recorders may be able to
(finalization might be necessary). Check the manual that
came with the player to check what kinds of discs it will
play.
When you finalize a Video mode disc, a title menu is
created from which you can select titles when you play
the disc. There are a number of different styles of title
menu to choose from to suit the content of the disc.
All the title menus are navigated in the usual way,
pressing
DVD MENU
or
TOP MENU
to display the menu,
then using the
///
followed by
ENTER
to select
titles and start playback.
Finalizing a disc
Finalizing ‘fixes’ the recordings in place so that the disc
can be played on a regular DVD player or computer
equipped with a suitable DVD-ROM drive.
2
Note that the disc name will appear in the title menu after
you finalize a disc. Make sure the disc name is as you
want it before you finalize the disc as it can’t be changed
afterwards. If you want to rename the disc, see
Input Disc
Name
on page 125 before starting the steps below.
Important
Once you’ve finalized a disc recorded in Video mode,
you can’t edit or record anything else on that disc.
However, the finalization on a DVD-RW disc maybe
‘undone’; see
Undo Finalize
on page 126 for how to do
this.
•A VR mode disc can still be recorded and edited on
this recorder even after finalizing.
1 Load the disc you want to finalize.
Make sure that the recorder is stopped before
proceeding.
Note
1.If the audio subcode on the DV tape cannot be read correctly, the audio type will not switch automatically. You can switch the audio manually
from the
External Audio
setting (page 132).
Start Rec
Pause Rec
Stop Rec
SP (2h00m/DVD)
32h45m
Stop Stop
1.02.22
Control with these
buttons

Rem.
HDD
2.If the TV line system of the disc is different to the current setting of the recorder, you will not be able to finalize the disc. See
Additional infor-
mation about the TV system settings
on page 137 for how to change the recorder’s setting.
VR mode Video mode
VR mode Video mode
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 89 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:48 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Recording
06
90
En
2 Press HOME MENU and select ‘Disc Setup’.
3 Select ‘Finalize’.
4 Select ‘Finalize’ from the finalize options, then
‘Next Screen’.
5 For Video mode discs only, select a title menu
style, then select ‘Yes’ to start finalization or ‘No’ to
cancel.
The menu you select will be the one that appears when
the ‘top menu’ is selected on any DVD player.
Discs recorded partially or fully on the Pioneer
DVR-7000 DVD recorder do not support this feature.
These discs will have only a text title menu when
finalized on this recorder.
6 The recorder will now start finalizing the disc.
During finalization:
If the finalization process of a DVD-RW disc is going
to take more than around four minutes, you can
press
ENTER
to cancel. Around four minutes before
completion, the option to cancel disappears.
You can’t cancel the finalization of a VR mode DVD-R
disc.
How long finalization takes depends on the type of
disc, how much is recorded on the disc and the
number of titles on the disc. A disc recorded in VR
mode can take up to one hour to finalize. A disc
recorded in Video mode can take up to 20 minutes.
Initializing a recordable DVD disc
When you first load a blank disc, the recorder will
initialize it automatically for recording. You can also
manually initialize discs for either Video mode recording
or VR mode recording.
1
By default, the recorder initializes blank DVD-RW discs
for VR mode recording. See
DVD-RW Auto Init.
on
page 135 if you want to change the default to Video
mode.
DVD-R discs are ready for Video mode recordings out of
the box; if you want to use a DVD-R for VR mode
recording, you must do it before recording anything else
on the disc.
Important
Initializing a DVD-RW disc will erase everything
recorded on it. Make sure there is nothing on the disc
that you want to keep!
You may not be able to re-initialize a DVD-RW disc in
a different format if it was originally initialized on an
older DVD recorder.
Once initialized for VR mode recording, you can’t re-
initialize a DVD-R back to Video mode.
1 Press HOME MENU and select ‘Disc Setup’.
2 Select ‘Initialize’
3 Select ‘Video Mode’ or ‘VR Mode’ from the
initialize options.
4 Select ‘Start’.
It takes about 30 seconds to initialize the disc.
Basic
Initialize
Finalize
Optimize HDD
Disc Setup
Finalize
Undo Finalize
Next Screen
Start
Finalize
T
I
T
L
E
M
E
N
U
TITLE MENU
Finalize
Note
1.If a disc was previously finalized on an older DVD recorder, you may not be able to re-initialize and/or initialize it for Video mode recording.
Basic
Initialize
Finalize
Optimize HDD
Disc Setup
VR Mode
Video Mode
Start
Start
Initialize
Initializing Disc
1 min left
Pr 1
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 90 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:48 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Playback 07
91
En
English
Chapter 7
Playback
Introduction
Most of the features described in this chapter make use
of on-screen displays. Navigate these using the
///
and
ENTER
. To go back one level from any screen, use
the
RETURN
button. Remember also that the button
guide at the bottom of every screen shows which buttons
do what.
Many of the functions covered in this chapter apply to the
HDD, DVD discs, Video CDs, Super VCDs, WMA/MP3
discs and CDs, although the exact operation of some
varies slightly with the kind of disc loaded. The following
icons are provided to help you quickly identify which
instructions you need for which kind of disc.
Any kind of DVD, DVD-R or DVD-RW
Commercially produced DVD or finalized
Video mode DVD-R/RW
Video mode DVD-R/RW (unfinalized)
VR mode DVD-R/RW
HDD
Audio CD
Video CD
Super VCD
WMA or MP3 files
Some DVD-Video discs don’t allow certain playback
controls to operate at certain points in the disc. This
is not a malfunction.
When playing Video CDs, some functions, such as
making a program list, are not available in PBC
mode. Stop the disc first, then start playback by
pressing
.
For discs that contain JPEG picture files, see
The
PhotoViewer
on page 123.
Navigating discs and the HDD
During playback you can easily jump to another title,
chapter or track on a disc using the number buttons on
the remote.
1 During playback use the number buttons to
enter a chapter number within the current title.
For example, for chapter 6, press
6
; for chapter 24,
press
2
, then
4
.
To clear and start again, press
CLEAR
.
2 Optionally: Press ENTER.
Alternatively, just wait a few seconds and playback
will jump to the new chapter.
1 During playback, use the number buttons to
input a title number.
For example, for title 6, press
6
; for title 24, press
2
,
then
4
.
To clear and start again, press
CLEAR
.
2 Optionally: Press ENTER.
Alternatively, just wait a few seconds and playback
will jump to the new title.
DVD
DVD-Video
Video mode
VR mode
HDD
CD
Video CD
Super VCD
WMA/MP3
ALL
ENTER
DVD-Video Video mode
HDD VR mode
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 91 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:04 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Playback
07
92
En
1 During playback, use the number buttons to
input a track number.
For example, for track 6, press
6
; for track 24, press
2
,
then
4
.
To clear and start again, press
CLEAR
.
2 Optionally: Press ENTER.
Alternatively, just wait a few seconds and playback
will jump to the new track.
Using the Disc Navigator to browse
the contents of a disc.
Use the Disc Navigator to browse the contents of a disc
and start playback.
Using the Disc Navigator with recordable
discs and the HDD
You can use the Disc Navigator to browse and edit video
on recordable DVDs and the HDD, and to view
information on titles.
See also
Editing
on page 111 for more on editing
recordable discs.
1Press HDD or DVD to select the hard disk drive or
DVD.
2 Press HOME MENU and select ‘Disc Navigator’
from the on-screen display.
Alternatively, you can press
DISC NAVIGATOR
to go
straight to the Disc Navigator screen.
3Use the
/
buttons to browse up and down the
list of titles.
Use the
/
buttons to display the previous/
next page of titles, if there are more titles than can fit
on to the screen.
You can change the style and order in which titles are
displayed from the view options menu. See below for
more on this.
You can change the thumbnail picture displayed for
a title; see
Set Thumbnail
on page 114.
4 To play the highlighted title, press ENTER.
You can also select
Play
from the command menu
options.
Tip
Use the time search feature to find a particular point
on a DVD or within a title on the HDD. See
Search
Mode
on page 95 for more information.
Changing the display style of the Disc
Navigator
You can choose to display titles in the Disc Navigator in
various different ways, sorted alphabetically, by
recording date, by genre, and so on. You can also choose
whether to display four or eight titles on the screen at the
same time.
1 From the Disc Navigator’s title list, press
to
display the view options panel.
2 Use the
/
buttons to select ‘Style’, ‘Sort
Order’ or ‘Genre’, then press ENTER to see the
available view options.
Style
– Select four or eight titles per screen view
CD Video CD Super VCD WMA/MP3
VR mode Video mode HDD
Disc Navigator (HDD)
11/29 MON 7:00PM
11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP
2h00m(1.0G)
1
4 Titles
Remain
HDD
SP
Recent First
All Genres
10Titles
30h30m
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
23:00 FRI 3/12
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
9
8
7
10
Disc Navigator (HDD)
11/29 MON 7:00PM
11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP
2h00m(1.0G)
1
2
3
7
4 Titles
Remain
HDD
SP
NEW first
All Genres
10Titles
30h30m
1
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
23:00 FRI 3/12
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
4 Titles
Sort order
Recent First
Genre
All Genres
Style
The View Options panel
Disc Navigator (HDD)
11/29 MON 7:00PM
11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP
2h00m(1.0G)
1
2
3
7
4 Titles
Remain
HDD
SP
NEW first
All Genres
10Titles
30h30m
1
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
23:00 FRI 3/12
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
4 Titles
Sort order
Recent First
Genre
All Genres
Style 4 Titles
Cancel
8 Titles
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 92 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:04 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Playback 07
93
En
English
Sort Order
– Sort by date (most recent first),
unwatched first, title name or recording date (oldest
first)
Genre
– Display all genres or just a selected genre
3 Use the
/
buttons to select an option, then
press ENTER.
The title list display is updated according to the new
display preferences.
4 Press
to return to the title list.
Using the Disc Navigator with playback-only
discs
1 Press HOME MENU and select ‘Disc Navigator’
from the on-screen display.
Alternatively, for a CD, Video CD, Super VCD or WMA/
MP3 disc, you can press
DISC NAVIGATOR
, which takes
you straight to the Disc Navigator screen.
2 Select what you want to play.
Use the
///
to highlight items and
ENTER
to
select.
Depending on the type of disc you have loaded, the Disc
Navigator looks slightly different.
When a DVD is loaded, titles are shown on the left,
chapters on the right. Select a title, or a chapter
within a title.
When a CD or Video CD/Super VCD
1
is loaded, a list
of the tracks is displayed.
When a WMA/MP3 disc is loaded, a list of folders and
tracks is displayed (as shown below). Select a folder
or a track within a folder.
Playback starts after you press
ENTER
.
For discs that contain both CD-Audio tracks and
WMA/MP3 tracks, you can switch the playback area
between
CD
and
WMA/MP3
. This can only be done
while the disc is stopped.
Disc Navigator (HDD)
11/29 MON 7:00PM
11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP
2h00m(1.0G)
1
2
3
7
4 Titles
Remain
HDD
SP
NEW first
All Genres
10Titles
30h30m
1
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
23:00 FRI 3/12
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
4 Titles
Sort order
Recent First
Genre
All Genres
Style Recent first
By rec.date
New first
Cancel
By title
Disc Navigator (HDD)
11/29 MON 7:00PM
11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP
2h00m(1.0G)
1
2
3
7
4 Titles
Remain
HDD
SP
NEW first
All Genres
10Titles
30h30m
1
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
23:00 FRI 3/12
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
4 Titles
Sort order
Recent First
Genre
All Genres
Style All Genres
Free 1
Children
Movies
Other
No Category
Sport
VOLUME
+
MUTE
RECORDER RECEIVER
TOP MENU
RDS DISP
SYSTEM
SETUP
DISPLAYTEST TONE
ST +ST –
TUNE +
TUNE –
RETURN
DISC NAVIGATOR DVD MENU
HOME
MENU
VIDEO INPUT
INFO
GUIDE
HDD DVD
FM/AM AUDIO INPUT
HELP
ENTER
CLEAR
CHANNEL

Note
1.It’s not possible to use the Disc Navigator when playing a Video CD/Super VCD in PBC mode.
DVD-Video CD Video CD Super VCD WMA/MP3
Easy Timer
Photo Viewer
Disc Navigator Disc Setup
Initial Setup
Video/Audio Adjust
Play Mode Copy
Jukebox
GUIDE Plus+
CD
WMA/MP3
Folder (01-03)
01.Rock
02.Pop
03.Dance
Track(001-004)
001.Intro
002.Escape
003.Everything You Say
004.What I Do
Disc Navigator
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 93 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:04 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Playback
07
94
En
Scanning discs
You can fast scan discs at various speeds, forwards or
backward.
1
1 During playback, press
or
to start
reverse or forward scanning.
The scanning speed is shown on-screen.
2Press the same button repeatedly to increase the
scanning speed.
Forward:
SCAN 1
(1.5x Quick View)
SCAN 2
SCAN 3
SCAN 4
Reverse:
Reverse play
2
SCAN 1
SCAN 2
SCAN 3
SCAN 4
Forward/Reverse:
SCAN 1
SCAN 2
3 To resume normal playback, press
.
Playing in slow motion
You can play video at various slow motion speeds. DVDs
and video on the HDD can be played in slow motion in
either direction, while Video CD/Super VCDs can only be
played forwards in slow motion.
3
1 Press
or
to start slow motion reverse or
forward playback.
2Press the same button repeatedly to change the
slow motion speed.
3 To resume normal playback, press
.
Note
1.• Only analog audio is output when scanning audio CDs.
• No subtitles are displayed when scanning DVDs.
• Analog and digital sound is output when scanning DVDs with Dolby Digital or Linear PCM sound on forward
SCAN 1
. (Linear PCM is output
from the optical digital output, Except during chase playback and simultaneous recording/playback) No sound is output when using other
scan speeds.
• No sound is output when scanning from the HDD, except on forward
SCAN 1
. (Linear PCM is output from the optical digital output during
forward
SCAN 1
).
• Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached on a DVD disc.
2.Depending on the disc, reverse playback may not be smooth.
DISPLAYTEST TONE TUNE –
PREV NEXT STEP/SLOW
ONE TOUCH
SKIP
CM
BACK
DVD HDD
CD Video CD Super VCD WMA/MP3
3.• The picture quality during slow motion playback is not as good as during normal playback and depends on the disc being played.
• Reverse slow-motion playback may not be as smooth as forward and may be better with some discs than others.
• Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached on a DVD disc.
• No sound is output during slow-motion playback.
DVD HDD Video CD Super VCD
DISPLAYTEST TONE TUNE –
RETURN
HOME
MENU
AUDIO
SURROUND ADVANCED SOUND TIMER REC
SUBTITLE ANGLE PLAY MODE
REC
PREV NEXT STEP/SLOW
STOP REC
REC MODE ONE TOUCH
COPY
SKIP
CM
BACK
SLOW 1/16 SLOW 1/8
SLOW 1/2 SLOW 1/4
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 94 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:04 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Playback 07
95
En
English
Frame advance/frame reverse
You can advance or back up video on a DVD disc or the
HDD frame-by-frame. With Video CD/Super VCDs, you
can only use frame advance.
1
1 During playback, press
.
2 Press
or
to back up or advance one frame.
Hold down
or
for continuous frame reverse/
frame advance.
3 To resume normal playback, press
.
The Play Mode menu
The Play Mode menu gives you access to search
functions, repeat and program play functions.
Important
You can’t use the Play Mode features with Video CD/
Super VCDs playing in PBC mode, or while a DVD
disc menu is being displayed. For other restrictions,
see the following sections.
1Press PLAY MODE to display the Play Mode menu
screen.
You can also access the Play Mode menu from the
Home Menu (press
HOME MENU
).
2 Use the
///
and ENTER to navigate.
To exit the Play Mode menu, press
HOME MENU
or
PLAY MODE
.
Search Mode
The Search Mode feature lets you start playback from a
specified point in a disc by time
2
or by title/chapter/
folder/track number.
1 Select ‘Search Mode’ from the Play Mode menu.
2 Select one of the search options.
Note
1.• The picture quality when using frame reverse is not as good as frame advance.
• Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached on a DVD disc.
DVD HDD Video CD Super VCD
DISPLAYTEST TONE TUNE –
RETURN
HOME
MENU
AUDIO
SURROUND ADVANCED SOUND TIMER REC
SUBTITLE ANGLE PLAY MODE
INPUTTV
REC
PREV NEXT STEP/SLOW
STOP REC
REC MODE ONE TOUCH
COPY
SKIP
CM
BACK
ALL
2.When using time search, playback may occasionally start slightly before or after the time you input.
HOME
MENU
PLAY MODE
CLEAR
ENTER
CLEAR
PLAY
Time Search
Title Search
Chapter Search
Play Mode
Search Mode
A-B Repeat
Repeat
Program
ALL
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 95 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:04 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Playback
07
96
En
3Use the number buttons to enter a title/chapter/
folder/track number or the search time (in hours,
minutes & seconds).
Time Search (HDD, DVD):
For example, for 25 minutes
into the current title, press
2, 5, 0, 0
. For 1 hour and 15
minutes and 20 seconds into the title, press
1
,
1
,
5
,
2
,
0
.
Time Search (Video CD):
For example, for 2 minutes and
30 seconds into the current track, press
2
,
3
,
0
.
Title/Chapter/Folder/Track Search:
For example, for track 6,
press
6
. Alternatively, you can use the
/
buttons.
4Press ENTER.
Tip
You can often select what you want to watch on a
DVD disc from the disc menu. Press
DVD MENU
or
TOP MENU
to display the disc menu.
Time search doesn’t work with CDs and Super VCDs.
A-B Repeat
The A-B Repeat function allows you to specify two points
(A and B) within a track or title that form a loop which is
played over and over.
1
1 During playback, select ‘A-B Repeat’ from the
Play Mode menu.
2With ‘A (Loop Start)’ highlighted, press ENTER at
the point you want the loop to start.
After setting the loop start point, the highlight will
automatically move down to
B (Loop End)
.
3 With ‘B (Loop End)’ highlighted, press ENTER at
the point you want the loop to end.
Playback immediately jumps back to the start point and
plays the loop round and round.
When playing a DVD-Video/Video mode DVD, or from
the HDD, the start and end points of the loop must be
in the same title.
4To resume normal playback, select ‘Off’ from the
A-B Repeat menu.
You can also press
CLEAR
to cancel A-B Repeat play
if no menu OSD (such as the Play Mode menu) is
displayed.
Repeat play
There are various repeat play options, depending on the
kind of disc loaded, or if you’re using the HDD for
playback. It’s also possible to use repeat play together
with program play to repeat the tracks/chapters in the
program list (see
Program play
on page 97).
2
1 Select ‘Repeat’ from the Play Mode menu.
2 Select a repeat play mode.
For VR mode DVD discs, select
Repeat Disc
,
Repeat
Title
or
Repeat
Chapter
(or
Repeat Off
).
For HDD, DVD-Video and Video mode DVD discs,
select
Repeat Title
or
Repeat
Chapter
(or
Repeat
Off
).
For CDs and Video CD/Super VCDs, select
Repeat
Disc
or
Repeat
Track
(or
Repeat Off
).
For WMA/MP3 discs, select
Repeat
Disc
,
Repeat
Folder
or
Repeat
Track
(or
Repeat Off
).
Note
1.• If you switch camera angles during A-B repeat play, A-B repeat is canceled.
• You can’t use A-B Repeat with WMA/MP3 or Super VCD discs.
Time Search
Title Search
Chapter Search
Play Mode
Search Mode
A-B Repeat
Repeat
Program
Input Time
0.00.00
DVD CD Video CD HDD
Play Mode
Search Mode
A-B Repeat
Repeat
Program
A (Loop Start)
B (Loop End)
Off
2.If you switch the camera angle during repeat play of a DVD-Video disc, repeat play is canceled.
ALL
Play Mode
Search Mode
A-B Repeat
Repeat
Program
Repeat Disc
Repeat Title
Repeat Chapter
Repeat Off
VR mode
DVD-Video Video mode HDD
CD Video CD Super VCD
WMA/MP3
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 96 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:04 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Playback 07
97
En
English
3 To resume normal playback, select ‘Repeat Off’
from the Repeat Play menu.
You can also press
CLEAR
to cancel repeat play if no
menu OSD (such as the Play Mode menu) is
displayed.
Program play
This feature lets you program the play order of titles/
chapters
1
/folders/tracks on a disc or the HDD.
1 Select ‘Program’ from the Play Mode menu.
2 Select ‘Input/Edit Program’ from the list of
program options.
The Program edit screen that appears depends on the
kind of disc loaded.
On the left side is the program list, then to the right is a
list of titles (DVD, HDD), folders (WMA/MP3), or tracks
(CD, Video CD/Super VCDs). On the far right is a list of
chapters (DVD, HDD) or tracks (WMA/MP3).
3 Select a title, chapter, folder or track for the
current step in the program list.
DVD or HDD:
You can add a whole title, or a chapter
within a title to the program list.
To add a title, select the title.
To add a chapter, first highlight the title, then press
and select a chapter from the list.
CD or Video CD
/Super VCD
:
Select a track to add to the
program list.
WMA/MP3:
You can add a whole folder, or a track within
a folder to the program list.
To add a folder, select the folder.
To add a track, first highlight the folder, then press
and select a track from the list.
After pressing
ENTER
to add the title/chapter/folder/
track, the step number automatically moves down one.
To insert a step into the program list, highlight the
step number where you want to insert another step,
then select a chapter/title/folder/track as usual. After
pressing
ENTER
, all the subsequent steps move
down one.
To delete a step from the program list, highlight the
step you want to delete, then press
CLEAR
.
4 Repeat step 3 to build up a program list.
A program list can contain up to 24 titles/chapters/
folders/tracks.
5 To play the program list, press
.
Program play remains active until you turn off program
play (see below), erase the program list (see below), eject
the disc or switch off the recorder.
You can use repeat play with program play. Start
playback of the program list then select
Program
Repeat
from the Repeat Play Mode menu (see
Repeat play
on page 96).
Note
1.When playing a program list of DVD-Video chapters, chapters not included in the program list may be sometimes be played, depending on
the disc.
DVD-Video HDD CD Video CD Super VCD WMA/MP3
Play Mode
Search Mode
A-B Repeat
Repeat
Program
Input/Edit Program
Start Program Play
Cancel Program Play
Erase Program List
Program
Step
01.001
02.
03.
04.
05.
06.
07.
08.
Title (01-03)
Title 01
Title 02
Title 03
Chapter(001-015)
Chapter 001
Chapter 002
Chapter 003
Chapter 004
Chapter 005
Chapter 006
Chapter 007
Chapter 008
Program
Track (01-10)
Track 01
Track 02
Track 03
Track 04
Track 05
Track 06
Track 07
Track 08
Total Time 0.00.00
Step
01.04
02.
03.
04.
05.
06.
07.
08.
Program
Step
01.01
02.
03.
04.
05.
06.
07.
08.
Folder (01-03)
01.Rock
02.Pop
03.Dance
Track(001-004)
001.Intro
002.Escape
003.Everything You Say
004.What I Do
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 97 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:04 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Playback
07
98
En
Tip
To save your program list and exit the program edit
screen without starting playback, press
HOME
MENU
or
PLAY MODE
.
You can change the program list by selecting
Input/
Edit
Program
from the Play Mode Program menu.
During program play, press
to skip to the next
program step.
Press
CLEAR
during playback to switch off program
play (if no menu OSD, such as the Disc Navigator, is
displayed). Press while stopped to erase the program
list.
Other Program play functions
As well as creating and editing a program list, you can
start program play, cancel program play, and erase the
program list from the Play Mode menu.
1Press PLAY MODE and select ‘Program’ from the
list of functions on the left.
2 Select a program play function.
Input/Edit Program
– See above
Start Program Play
– Starts playback of a saved
program list
Cancel Program Play
– Turns off program play, but
does not erase the program list
Erase Program List
– Erases the program list and
turns off program play
Displaying and switching subtitles
Some DVD discs have subtitles in one or more
languages; the disc box will usually tell you which
subtitle languages are available. You can switch subtitle
language during playback.
1
Check the disc packaging for details of the subtitle
options.
1 Press SUBTITLE repeatedly to select a subtitle
option.
The current subtitle language is shown on-screen and in
the front panel display.
2 To switch off subtitles, press SUBTITLE then
CLEAR.
Note
1.• Some discs only allow you to change subtitle language from the disc menu. Press
TOP MENU
to access.
• To set subtitle preferences, see
Subtitle Language
on page 134.
DVD-Video
TOP MENU
RDS DISP
SYSTEM
SETUP
DISPLAYTEST TONE
ST +ST –
TUNE +
TUNE –
RETURN
DISC NAVIGATOR DVD MENU
HOME
MENU
AUDIO
SURROUND ADVANCED SOUND TIMER REC
SUBTITLE ANGLE PLAY MODE
VIDEO INPUT
INFO
GUIDE
HELP
INPUT
TV
ENTER
CLEAR
REC
PREV NEXT STEP/SLOW
STOP REC
REC MODE ONE TOUCH
COPY
SKIP
CM
BACK
Subtitle: 1/2 English
The toucan lives in tropical forests
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 98 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:04 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Playback 07
99
En
English
Switching DVD soundtracks
When playing a DVD disc recorded with two or more
soundtracks (often in different languages), you can
switch the soundtrack during playback.
1
Check the disc packaging for details of the soundtrack
options.
Press AUDIO repeatedly to select an audio
soundtrack.
The sound may drop out for a few seconds when
switching soundtracks.
Some discs feature both Dolby Digital and DTS
soundtracks. There is no analog audio output when
DTS is selected. To listen to the DTS soundtrack,
connect this recorder to a DTS decoder or AV amp/
receiver with built-in DTS decoder via the digital
output.
Switching audio channels
For HDD
2
and VR mode content recorded with bilingual
audio, you can switch between left (
L
) channel, right (
R
)
channel, or both (
L+R
).
3
When playing Video CDs and audio CDs you can switch
between stereo, just the left channel or just the right
channel.
Some Super VCDs have two soundtracks. With these
discs you can switch between the two soundtracks as
well as individual channels in each.
1 To display/switch the audio channel, press
AUDIO repeatedly.
The audio channel(s) currently playing are indicated on-
screen.
L+R
– Both channels (default)
L
– Left channel only
R
– Right channel only
Stereo
– Stereo (default)
1/L
– Left channel only
2/R
– Right channel only
1 Stereo
– Soundtrack 1 / Stereo (default)
1 L
– Soundtrack 1 / Left channel
Note
1.• Some discs only allow you to change audio language from the disc menu. Press
TOP MENU
to access.
• To set audio language preferences, see
Audio Language
on page 133.
DVD-Video
AUDIO
SURROUND ADVANCED SOUND TIMER REC
SUBTITLE ANGLE PLAY MODE
SHIFT
TV/DVD
TV DIRECT
REC
INPUTTV
TV CONTROL
CHANNEL VOLUME
REC STOP REC
REC MODE
ONE
TOUCH
COPY
Audio : 1/2 Dolby Digital 2/0CH
2.Only when HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off (
HDD Recording Format
on page 135).
3.• When playing a Bilingual recording on a VR mode disc, if you are listening to the Dolby Digital soundtrack via the digital output, you cannot
switch the audio channel. Set
Dolby Digital Out
to
Dolby Digital
PCM
(see
Dolby Digital Out
on page 133) or listen via the analog outputs
if you need to switch the audio channel.
• When playing a Dolby Digital source (HDD or DVD), you can also switch channels from the Dual Mono menu of the receiver subwoofer—
see
Dual mono setting
on page 30.
VR mode HDD CD Video CD Super VCD
WMA/MP3
AUDIO
SURROUND ADVANCED SOUND TIMER REC
SUBTITLE ANGLE PLAY MODE
SHIFT
TV/DVD
TV DIRECT
REC
INPUTTV
TV CONTROL
CHANNEL VOLUME
REC STOP REC
REC MODE ONE TOUCH
COPY
VR mode HDD
CD Video CD WMA/MP3
Super VCD
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 99 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:04 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Playback
07
100
En
1 R
– Soundtrack 1 / Right channel
2 Stereo
– Soundtrack 2 / Stereo
2 L
– Soundtrack 2 / Left channel
2 R
– Soundtrack 2 / Right channel
Switching camera angles
Some DVD-Video discs feature scenes shot from two or
more angles—check the disc box for details: it should be
marked with a icon if it contains multi-angle scenes.
When a multi-angle scene is playing, the same icon
appears on screen to let you know that other angles are
available (this can be switched off if you prefer—see
Angle Indicator
on page 136).
To switch the camera angle, press ANGLE.
The angle number is displayed on-screen.
If the disc was paused, playback starts again with the
new angle.
Repeat play is canceled if you change the angle while
repeat playback is active.
You can also change the angle from some DVD-Video
disc menus. Press
TOP MENU
or
DVD MENU
to
access.
DVD-Video
TOP MENU
RDS DISP
SYSTEM
SETUP
DISPLAYTEST TONE
ST +ST –
TUNE +
TUNE –
RETURN
DISC NAVIGATOR DVD MENU
HOME
MENU
AUDIO
SURROUND ADVANCED SOUND TIMER REC
SUBTITLE ANGLE PLAY MODE
SHIFT
VIDEO INPUT
INFO
GUIDE
HELP
TV/DVD
TV DIRECT
REC
INPUT
TV
ENTER
CLEAR
TV CONTROL
CHANNEL VOLUME
REC
PREV NEXT STEP/SLOW
STOP REC
REC MODE ONE TOUCH
COPY
SKIP
CM
BACK
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 100 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:04 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Copying and back-up 08
101
En
English
Chapter 8
Copying and back-up
Introduction
Use the copying features of this recorder to:
Back up important recordings stored on the HDD to
a DVD.
Make a DVD copy of a recording on the HDD to play
in another player.
Transfer video from a DVD to the HDD for editing.
Transfer edited video from the HDD to DVD.
The simplest way to copy a title is to use the One Touch
Copy feature. This copies the currently playing HDD title
to DVD, or DVD title to the HDD. See
One Touch Copy
on
page 101 for detailed instructions.
For more sophisticated copying tasks you can build a
Copy List of titles to copy, and edit titles so that you only
copy the bits you want. See
Using Copy Lists
on page 102
for detailed instructions.
Where possible, the recorder will copy your recordings at
high-speed. Depending on the recording mode, the kind
of disc loaded and various other factors, copying can be
as fast as one minute per hour of video. See
Minimum
copying times
on page 142 for more on copying times.
If you want to save disc space you can copy video at a
lower recording quality (for example, an XP recording on
the HDD copied to SP on a DVD). Copying in this way is
always done in real-time.
When real-time copying from the HDD to a Video mode
DVD, the chapter markers in the original material are not
copied. Chapter markers are put into the copy at
intervals, according to the Auto Chapter (Video) setting
(see also
Auto Chapter (Video)
on page 135).
Restrictions on copying
Some video material is copy-once protected. This means
that it can be recorded to HDD, but it can’t then be freely
copied again. If you want to transfer copy-once protected
material from HDD to DVD, you’ll need to use a VR mode
disc compatible with CPRM Ver. 1.1 or higher (see
CPRM
on page 80
for more on this). Only one instance of a copy-
once protected title can be added to the Copy List, and
after it’s been copied, the title is erased from the HDD (it
is therefore not possible to copy a locked title that is copy-
once protected).
You can identify copy-once protected material during
playback by displaying disc information on-screen. If the
current title is copy-once protected, an exclamation mark
(
!
) is shown (see
Play display 2
on page 67).
Copyright
Recording equipment should be used only for lawful
copying and you are advised to check carefully what is
lawful copying in the country in which you are making a
copy. Copying of copyright material such as films or
music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal exception
or consented to by the rightowners.
One Touch Copy
* See also
Copyright
above.
The One Touch Copy feature copies the currently playing
or selected (in the Disc Navigator) HDD title to DVD, or
DVD title to HDD. The whole title is copied, regardless of
where in the title you start the copy.
HDD to DVD copies are made in the same recording
mode. When copying DVD to HDD, the copy is made in
whatever recording mode is currently set.
Make sure that a recordable DVD-R/RW disc is loaded
when trying to copy from the HDD.
1 If you’re copying from DVD to the HDD, use the
REC MODE button to select a recording mode.
Note that selecting a recording mode higher than the title
playing will not result in a better quality recording.
2 During playback, press ONE TOUCH COPY to
copy the current title.
The front panel display indicates that the title is being
copied.
High-speed copying is used when copying from the
HDD to DVD. Playback continues while copying.
Real-time copying is used when copying from DVD to
the HDD. Playback restarts from the beginning of the
title.
AUDIO
SURROUND ADVANCED SOUND TIMER REC
SUBTITLE ANGLE PLAY MODE
SHIFT
TV/DVD
TV DIRECT
REC
INPUTTV
TV CONTROL
CHANNEL VOLUME
REC
PREV NEXT STEP/SLOW
STOP REC
REC MODE ONE TOUCH
COPY
SKIP
CM
BACK
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 101 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:04 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Copying and back-up
08
102
En
Canceling One Touch Copy
You can cancel a One Touch Copy once it’s started.
Press and hold ONE TOUCH COPY for more than
a second.
Copying is canceled and the video already copied is
erased.
If you cancel a HDD to DVD-R copy, the space
available for recording does not return to the pre-
copy figure.
Notes on copying using One Touch Copy
Copying to DVD
Title name, chapter markers, as well as thumbnail
picture markers for the Disc Navigator, are also
copied. However, if you copy to a Video mode DVD-R/
RW, only the first 40 characters of a name are copied.
The chapter markers in the copy may not be in exactly
the same positions as the original when recording on
to a Video mode disc.
You can’t use the One Touch Copy function to copy a
title if any part of the title is copy-once protected.
•A title that contains mixed aspect ratios can’t be
copied to a Video mode disc. Use a VR mode disc for
this type of material.
Low resolution (
SEP
through
LP
modes
1
) widescreen
material can’t be copied to a Video mode disc. Use a
VR mode disc for this type of material.
When HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode
Off, titles recorded in
LP
/
MN9
15
modes cannot be
high-speed copied to a Video mode DVD. Please use
a VR mode disc.
Recordings of bilingual broadcasts cannot be high-
speed copied to a Video mode DVD. Please use a VR
mode disc.
XP+
titles cannot be copied to DVD at high-speed.
Copying to the HDD
The maximum title length for copying is 12 hours.
Title name and chapter markers are also copied,
except when copying from a finalized Video mode
disc.
Thumbnail picture markers and chapter markers for
the Disc Navigator are copied, but their position in
the copy may be slightly changed from the original.
If some part of the title being copied is copy-
protected, copying will start, but the copy-protected
portions will not be copied.
Using Copy Lists
* See also
Copyright
on page 101.
At its simplest, a Copy List is just a list of HDD or DVD
titles that you want to copy. When copying HDD titles to
DVD, you can, however, edit the titles in your copy list,
erasing chapters you don’t need, or re-naming titles, for
example. Edits you make to titles in the Copy List do not
affect the actual video content; only the ‘virtual’ content
of the Copy List. So you can freely erase and modify
anything in your Copy List safe in the knowledge that the
actual content is not being altered.
Copying from HDD to DVD
Important
The recorder can only store one Copy List at a time.
The Copy List is erased if the Input Line System
setting is changed (see
Additional information about
the TV system settings
on page 137).
Resetting the recorder to its factory settings (see
Resetting the recorder
on page 139) will erase the
Copy List.
1 Press HOME MENU and select ‘Copy’.
Note
1.In manual recording mode these equate to
MN1–15
(Video Mode Off) or
MN1–11
(Video Mode On).
TOP MENU
RDS DISP
SYSTEM
SETUP
DISPLAYTEST TONE
ST +ST –
TUNE +
TUNE –
RETURN
DISC NAVIGATOR DVD MENU
HOME
MENU
AUDIO
SURROUND ADVANCED SOUND TIMER REC
SUBTITLE ANGLE PLAY MODE
INFO
GUIDE
HELP
ENTER
CLEAR
REC
PREV NEXT STEP/SLOW
STOP REC
REC MODE ONE TOUCH
COPY
SKIP
CM
BACK
Timer Recording
Photo Viewer
Disc Navigator Disc Setup
Initial Setup
Video/Audio Adjust
Play Mode Copy
TV GUIDE
Jukebox
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 102 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:04 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Copying and back-up 08
103
En
English
2 Select ‘HDD
DVD’.
If this is the first time to create a Copy List, skip to step 4
below.
3 If there is already a Copy List stored in the
recorder, choose whether to ‘Create New Copy List’
or ‘Use Existing Copy List’.
If you select
Use Existing Copy List
, skip to step 8 below.
Selecting
Create New Copy List
will erase any Copy
List already stored in the recorder.
4 Select VR mode or Video mode for the copy.
For certain kinds of material you must use VR mode; for
greater compatibility with other players, use Video mode.
5Use the
/
buttons to highlight titles you want
to copy, pressing ENTER after each one to add it to
the Copy List.
Titles you’ve added to the Copy List are highlighted in
pink.
There are some restrictions on titles that can be added to
the Copy List if you are copying to a Video mode DVD:
When adding titles that contain copy-once protected
material, the copy-once parts will not be added.
When adding titles that contain material of more
than one aspect ratio (screen size), each part with a
different aspect ratio will be added as a separate title
if high-speed copying is possible.
Depending on the title
1
, high-speed copying may not be
possible to a Video mode disc.
6 Press
to display the command menu panel.
Copy
HDD DVD
Disc Back-up
DV Record
DVD/CD HDD
Copy
Use Existng Copy List
Create New Cppy List
Copy
Select Recording Format
Please select the recording format for the disc.
HDD DVD
VR Mode
Video Mode High compatibility mode. Must be final-
ized for playback on other equipment.
Copying of bilingual broadcasts and
copy-once protected material
is possible.
Note
1.• Widescreen titles recorded at low resolution (
SEP
through
LP
/
MN1–15
(Video Mode Off) or
MN1–11
(Video Mode On).
LP
/
MN9
15
recordings when HDD Recording Mode is set to Video Mode Off.
• Bilingual recordings.
• Combined titles that were originally recorded using different recording modes.
XP+
titles.
Copy
Select Title
Recent first
All Genres
10 Title
Return
Copy List Total
Current DVD Remain
1.2G
1.2G
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
MON 29/11 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
MON 29/11 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
MON 29/11 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
MON 29/11 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
MON 29/11 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
MON 29/11 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
MON 29/11 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
MON 29/11 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
Next
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
19:00 2h00m(1.0G)
HDD DVD (Video mode)
Copy
Select Title
Recent first
All Genres
10 Title
Return
Copy List Total
Current DVD Remain
1.2G
1.2G
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
Confirm
Next
MON 29/11 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
MON 29/11 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
MON 29/11 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
MON 29/11 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
MON 29/11 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
MON 29/11 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
MON 29/11 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
MON 29/11 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
19:00 2h00m(1.0G)
HDD DVD (Video mode)
Next
The Command Menu panel
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 103 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:04 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Copying and back-up
08
104
En
7 Select ‘Next’ to move on to the Title Edit screen.
8 To edit a title, highlight it using the
/
buttons, then press ENTER.
A menu of editing commands appears:
Erase
– Erase individual titles from the Copy List (see
page 105).
Title Name
– Name or rename a title in the Copy List
(see page 105).
Erase Section
– Erase part of a title (see page 106).
Move
– Change the order of titles in the Copy List
(see page 106).
Preview
– Check the content of a title in the Copy List
(see page 107).
Divide
– Divide a title in the Copy List into two (see
page 107).
Combine
– Combine two titles in the Copy List into
one (see page 107).
Chapter Edit
– Edit chapters within a Copy List title
(see page 107):
Divide
– Divide a chapter into two.
Erase/Move
– Erase a chapter/Change the
chapter order.
Combine
– Combine two chapters into one.
Set Thumbnail
– Set the thumbnail frame for a title
(see page 108).
Recording Mode
– Set the picture quality of the copy
(see page 108).
Bilingual
– Set how bilingual audio should be copied
when copying from HDD to Video mode DVD (see
page 109).
Cancel
– Exit the Copy List screen without saving any
changes.
Repeat this step for as many titles you have that need
editing.
9 Press
to display the command menu panel.
10 Select ‘Next’ to proceed to the Start Copy screen.
Select
Recording Mode
if you want to change the
recording quality (see
Recording Mode
on page 108).
Select
Input Disc Name
if you want to change the
disc name. Input a name of up to 64 characters for a
VR mode disc or 40 characters for a Video mode disc.
(The input method is similar to that of naming titles;
see
Title Name
on page 105.)
Select
Finalize
if you want to automatically finalize a
Video mode DVD after copying.
1
Select a title menu
style from the following screen.
11 Select ‘Start Copy’ to start copying.
Copy
Edit Title
3 Title
Return
Copy List Total
Current DVD Remain
1.2G
1.2G
1
2
3
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
Next
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
HDD DVD (Video mode)
119:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
Copy
Edit Title
3 Title
Return
Copy List Total
Current DVD Remain
1.2G
1.2G
1
2
3
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
Next
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
HDD DVD (Video mode)
119:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
Erase
Title Name
Erase Section
Move
Preview
Cancel
Note
1.If a timer recording is scheduled to start during copying, the disc will not be finalized.
Copy
Edit Title
3 Title
Return
Copy List Total
Current DVD Remain
1.2G
1.2G
1
2
3
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
Confirm
Next
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
HDD DVD (Video mode)
Next
Copy HDD DVD (Video Mode)
Start Copy
Copy Time 0h00m
Recording Mode
Disc Name
Finalize
Return
Recording Mode
Input Disc Name
Finalize
Start Copy
Copy List Total
Current DVD Remain
1.2G
1.2G
DVD-RW
HDD
SP
Off
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 104 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:04 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Copying and back-up 08
105
En
English
Copying from DVD to HDD
Important
The DVD to HDD Copy screen isn’t accessible when
a finalized Video mode disc is loaded. However, you
can still use the One Touch Copy function (See
One
Touch Copy
on page 101).
The recorder can only store one Copy List at a time.
The Copy List will be erased if:
– any of the titles on the DVD disc are erased or
edited.
– the disc tray is opened.
– playback is switched between Play List and
Original.
– the DVD disc is re-initialized or finalized.
– the recorder is reset to its factory settings (see
Resetting the recorder
on page 139).
It may not be possible to copy from a DVD disc that
was recorded on a different DVD recorder or a PC.
1 Press HOME MENU and select ‘Copy’.
2 Select ‘DVD/CD
HDD’.
3 If there is already a Copy List stored in the
recorder, choose whether to ‘Create New Copy List’
or ‘Use Existing Copy List’.
Selecting
Create New Copy List
will erase any Copy
List already stored in the recorder.
4Use the
/
buttons to highlight titles you want
to copy, pressing ENTER after each one to add it to
the Copy List.
Titles you’ve added to the Copy List are highlighted in
pink.
5 Press
to display the command menu panel.
6 Select ‘Next’ to move on to the Title Edit screen.
7 To edit a title, highlight it using the
/
buttons, then press ENTER.
A menu appears of Copy List editing commands:
Erase
– Erase individual titles from the Copy List (see
page 105).
Move
– Change the order of titles in the Copy List
(see page 106).
Preview
– Check the content of a title in the Copy List
(see page 107).
Cancel
– Exit the Copy List screen without saving any
changes.
Repeat this step for as many titles you have that need
editing.
8 Press
to display the command menu panel.
9Select ‘Next’ to proceed to the Start Copy screen.
Select
Recording Mode
if you want to change the
recording quality (see
Recording Mode
on page 108).
10 Select ‘Start Copy’ to start copying.
Erase
Use this command to erase individual titles from the
Copy List.
1 Highlight the title you want to erase.
2 Select ‘Erase’ from the command menu panel.
3 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel, then
press ENTER.
Tip
You can erase a title quickly by pressing
CLEAR
when
the title is highlighted. Confirm the edit by pressing
ENTER
.
Title Name
Use this command to name or rename titles in the Copy
List (the names of the original titles remain unchanged).
When copying to a Video mode disc, the name length is
limited to 40 characters; for a VR mode disc, the limit is
64 characters.
1 Highlight the title you want to name (or
rename).
2 Select ‘Title Name’ from the command menu
panel.
3 Input a name for the selected title.
Use the
///
and
ENTER
to select characters.
•A name generated automatically by the recorder will
already be in the name input section of the screen.
Use the
/
buttons to change the cursor
position.
Yes
Erase ?
No
!
Input Title Name
CAPS
small
OK Clear Space
A B C D E F G H I J K L M . , ? !
N
O
P
Q
R S T U V W X Y Z ( ) : ;
A A A A A A
Æ
ç E E E E I I I I #
2 3
´ µ ¶ ·
1
¿ `
D
N
O
O
O
O
O
ø
U U U U Y ß $
%
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
<
=
>
_ &
£ \ § ¨ © ¬ – ® _ ˚
+ / @ [ ¥ ] ˆ ÷ x ± { | } ~ ¡
c
a
o
<<
<<
1
/41
/23
/4
¸
12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 105 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:04 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Copying and back-up
08
106
En
Select
CAPS
or
small
to change to upper or lower-
case, or use the
/
buttons.
You can also use the
CLEAR
button to delete
characters directly (press and hold for two seconds
to delete the whole name).
For discs formatted on a different DVD recorder, you
will see only a limited character set.
4 Highlight ‘OK’ then press ENTER to enter the
name and return to the Copy List.
To return to the main Copy List screen without saving
changes to the title name, press
RETURN
.
Erase Section
Using this command you can delete a part of a Copy List
title, ideal for cutting out the commercial breaks in a
recording made from the TV.
1 Highlight the title containing the section you
want to erase.
2 Select ‘Erase Section’ from the command menu
panel.
The Erase Section screen appears from which you can
mark the start and end points of the section to erase.
3 Select the type of edit.
Video Mode Compatible Editing
– Edit points
cannot be set with absolute precision, but high-
speed copying to Video mode DVD will be possible.
Frame Accurate Editing
– Exact edit points are
preserved, but high-speed copying to Video mode
DVD will not be possible.
For more information about these options, see
Editing accuracy
on page 112
4 Highlight ‘From’ then use the playback controls
(
,
,
,
, etc.) to find the start of the section
to erase, then press ENTER.
The bar at the bottom of the screen indicates the current
play position in the title. After pressing
ENTER
, a marker
shows the start of the section.
5 Highlight ‘To’ then, in the same way, find the
end of the section to erase, then press ENTER.
After pressing
ENTER
, another marker indicates the end
of the section, with the section itself marked in red.
6 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel, then
press ENTER.
In the thumbnail viewer you can see a few seconds of
video either side of the marked section to see how the
edit will look.
Move
Use this command to change the order of titles in the
Copy List.
1 Highlight the title you want to move and press
ENTER.
2 Select ‘Move’ from the command menu panel.
3 Move the insert bar to the new position for the
title and press ENTER.
!
Video Mode Compatible Editing
Frame Accurate Editing
DVD RECORDER
Please select the type of editing.
Video Mode Compatible Editing is
recommended for compatibility with
high-speed copying.
Erase Section (HDD Copy)
Play Pause
Rec. time 0h01m
5-1
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
Exit
From
To
00.00.09.15
Yes
Erase ?
No
!
Copy
Edit Title
3 Title
Return
Copy List Total
Current DVD Remain
1.2G
1.2G
1
2
3
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
Next
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
HDD DVD (Video mode)
Insertion positionTitle to move
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 106 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:04 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Copying and back-up 08
107
En
English
Preview
Use this command to check what’s in a title.
1 Highlight the title you want to preview.
2 Select ‘Preview’ from the command menu panel.
The selected title starts to play. Use any of the usual
playback controls to scan, skip, play in slow-motion, etc.
3 To get back to the Copy List, press RETURN.
Divide
Use this command to make two titles from a title already
in the Copy List.
1 Highlight the title you want to divide.
2 Select ‘Divide’ from the command menu panel.
3 Select the type of edit.
Video Mode Compatible Editing
– Edit points
cannot be set with absolute precision, but high-
speed copying to Video mode DVD will be possible.
Frame Accurate Editing
– Exact edit points are
preserved, but high-speed copying to Video mode
DVD will not be possible.
For more information about these options, see
Editing accuracy
on page 112
4Use the playback controls (
,
,
,
, etc.) to
find the place you want to divide the title.
5 Press ENTER to divide the title at the current
playback position.
Combine
Use this command to make a single title from two titles
in the Copy List. The second title selected will be
appended to the first.
1 Highlight the title you want to combine with
another, then press ENTER.
This title will not move. The next title you select will be
appended to this one.
2Select ‘Combine’ from the command menu panel.
3 Select the title you want to append to the first,
then press ENTER.
This title will effectively move to be added to the end of the
first title. In the example below, title 3 will be appended to
title 1.
4 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel, then
press ENTER.
Chapter Edit
The Chapter Edit option gives you access to several
commands that you can use to edit chapters within a
Copy List title.
1Highlight the title that contains the chapters you
want to edit.
2 Select ‘Chapter Edit’ from the command menu
panel.
3 Select the type of editing.
!
Video Mode Compatible Editing
Frame Accurate Editing
DVD RECORDER
Please select the type of editing.
Video Mode Compatible Editing is
recommended for compatibility with
high-speed copying.
Divide Title (HDD Copy)
Play Pause
Rec. time 0h01m
5–1
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
Cancel
00.00.09.15
Divide
Copy
Edit Title
3 Title
Return
Copy List Total
Current DVD Remain
1.2G
1.2G
1
2
3
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
Next
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
HDD DVD (Video mode)
This title will not move This title will be appended
Yes
OK to combine titles
1 and 3 ?
No
!
!
Video Mode Compatible Editing
Frame Accurate Editing
DVD RECORDER
Please select the type of editing.
Video Mode Compatible Editing is
recommended for compatibility with
high-speed copying.
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 107 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:04 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Copying and back-up
08
108
En
Video Mode Compatible Editing
– Edit points
cannot be set with absolute precision, but high-
speed copying to Video mode DVD will be possible.
Frame Accurate Editing
– Exact edit points are
preserved, but high-speed copying to Video mode
DVD will not be possible.
For more information about these options, see
Editing accuracy
on page 112
4 Select the command you want:
Divide
– Divide a chapter into two or more parts: Use
the playback controls (
,
,
,
, etc.) to find the
point at which you want to divide the chapter, then
press
ENTER
.
You can keep dividing the chapter as many times as
you wish (up to 99 per title).
Erase/Move
– Erase or move chapters: Select the
chapter you want to erase/move and press
ENTER
.
Select whether you want to erase or move the
chapter.
Move command only:
Select the destination for the
chapter, and press
ENTER
.
Combine
– Combine two adjacent chapters into one:
Highlight the bar divider between two adjacent
chapters and press
ENTER
.
5 Select ‘Exit’ to get back to the main Copy List
screen.
Set Thumbnail
You can change the thumbnail picture that appears in
the four-title display of the Disc Navigator for a title to any
frame that appears in that title.
1 Highlight the title you want to change the
thumbnail picture for.
2Select ‘Set Thumbnail’ from the command menu
panel.
The thumbnail setting screen appears from which you
can find the frame you want.
3Use the playback controls (
,
,
,
, etc.) to
find a suitable frame, then press ENTER to set.
You can also use the chapter and time search features
(press
PLAY MODE
), and the
CM SKIP
buttons.
4 Select ‘Exit’ to return to the Copy List screen.
Recording Mode
1 Select ‘Recording Mode’ from the command
menu panel.
2Use the
/
buttons to select a recording mode
for the copy.
High-Speed Copy
1
– The Copy List is copied at the
same recording quality as the original.
XP
,
SP
,
LP
,
EP
,
SLP
,
SEP
,
MN
2
– The Copy List is
copied at the specified recording quality in real-time.
(Note that if you copy at a higher quality setting than
the original, the copy will not be better quality than
the original.)
If you select
MN
above, you can also change the level
setting (
MN1
MN32
,
LPCM
or
XP+
3
) from the
Recording Quality box that appears.
Optimized
2,4
– The recording quality is automatically
adjusted so that the Copy List fits on to the space
available on the disc. Copying is carried out in real-
time.
Edit Chapter (HDD Copy)
Rec. time
Chapters
1–1
Play
0.00.00
18:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 1 XP
1h00m
10
Exit
Erase/Move
Combine
Divide
Edit Chapter (HDD Copy)
002 003 005004001
Rec. time
Chapter
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
1h00m
0h01m
Exit
Erase/Move
Combine
Divide
Move
Cancel
Erase
Edit Chapter (HDD Copy)
002 003 005004001
Rec. time
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
1h00m
Exit
Erase/Move
Divide
Erase/Move
Combine
Note
1.When copying to a Video mode DVD, the chapter markers in the copy may not be in exactly the same position as the original.
2.When the copy mode is set to something other than High-Speed Copy for copying to a Video mode DVD, the chapter markers of the original
are not copied. Chapter markers are put into the copy at regular intervals, according to the Auto Chapter setting (see also
Auto Chapter (Video)
on page 135).
3.XP+ mode available only when copying to HDD.
4.Optimized mode only available when copying to DVD.
Set Thumbnail (HDD Copy)
Play Pause
Rec. time 0h01m
5-1
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
Exit
00.00.09.15
OK
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 108 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:04 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Copying and back-up 08
109
En
English
When you change the recording mode setting, you can
see how much disc space it will require. If this is more
than is available, it shows up in red and you won’t be able
to start copying. In this case, either change the recording
quality, or press
RETURN
to go back to the Copy List
screen and erase one or more titles from the Copy List.
3Press ENTER.
Bilingual
1Select the title containing the audio you want to
change.
2Select ‘Bilingual’ from the command menu panel.
3 Use the
/
buttons to select a bilingual audio
option.
4Press ENTER.
Using disc back-up
* See also
Copyright
on page 101.
This feature offers a simple way to make a back-up copy
of a finalized Video mode disc. The data is copied first to
the hard disk drive
1
, then on to another recordable DVD
disc.
1Press HOME MENU, select ‘Copy’, then ‘Disc Back-
up’.
2 Select a back-up option.
There are three back-up options:
Start new disc back-up
– Start making a back-up of
a disc.
Resume writing data
– Record the back-up data
already on the HDD to a recordable DVD.
Erase back-up data
– Erase the back-up data on the
HDD.
3 Press
OPEN/CLOSE on the front panel to open
the disc tray and load the disc you want to make a
back-up of, then close the disc tray.
You can only make back-up copies of finalized Video
mode discs.
4 Select ‘Start’.
To see the progress of the back-up, press
SHIFT
and
DISPLAY
.
You can cancel the back-up process by pressing
ONE
TOUCH COPY
for more than one second.
5 When the data has been copied, press
OPEN/
CLOSE on the front panel to open the disc tray. Take
out the disc and load a blank* recordable DVD.
* If you’re using a DVD-RW, the disc doesn’t have to be
blank, although the previous contents of the disc will be
erased in the back-up process.
You can use a DVD-R Ver. 2.0 or 2.1 disc, or DVD-RW Ver.
1.1 or Ver. 1.2 disc for the back-up.
If you back-up a DVD-R disc to DVD-RW, you cannot
undo the finalization later.
Actual recordable capacity of discs vary so there may
be cases where the contents of the disc you’re
backing-up will not fit on to a particular blank disc. If
this happens, please try another brand of disc.
Note
1.It is not possible to play this material directly from the HDD.
Disc Back-up
Start new disc back-up
Resume writing date
Erase back-up date
No Disc.
Please load a disc to be backed-up.
Start Cancel
Disc Back-up
Read from disc and save to HDD.
Start reading?
Start Cancel
Disc Back-up
Disc content saved to Hard Disk Drive.
Please eject the disc and load a
recordable disc
Start Cancel
Disc Back-up
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 109 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:04 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Copying and back-up
08
110
En
6Select ‘Start’ to start writing the backed-up data
to the blank disc.
To see the progress of the back-up, press
SHIFT
and
DISPLAY
.
You can cancel the back-up process by pressing
ONE
TOUCH COPY
for more than one second. However,
this will make the disc unusable (although if you are
using a DVD-RW disc you can re-initialize it in order
to make it usable again—see
Initializing a recordable
DVD disc
on page 90.)
7 After the recorder has finished recording the
back-up disc, you can select whether to make
another back-up of the same data or exit.
Select
Start
to make another back-up copy or
Cancel
to finish. If you want to make another back-up copy,
return to step
6
above.
8 If you don’t need to keep the back-up data on
the HDD, you can delete it now.
Select
Yes
to delete the data from the HDD; select
No
to
keep it (you can delete it later if you want to).
If you decide to leave the back-up data on the HDD,
you can make back-up copies to recordable DVD
discs anytime from the Disc Back-up menu.
Write back-up data from Hard Disk Drive.
The disc contents will be overwritten.
OK to start?
Start Cancel
Disc Back-up
Disc back-up finished.
To make another back-up copy, please load
a recordable disc.
Start Cancel
Disc Back-up
The backed-up data is still on the HDD.
Erasing it will increase the free space
available. OK to Erase?
Yes No
Disc Back-up
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 110 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:04 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Editing 09
111
En
English
Chapter 9
Editing
The Disc Navigator screen
The Disc Navigator screen is where you can edit video
content on unfinalized Video mode and VR mode DVD
discs
1
, as well as video content on the internal hard disk
drive.
Important
Titles that have been recorded with a Line Input
setting different to the current setting of the recorder
are shown in the Disc Navigator with a blank
thumbnail image. See also
Additional information
about the TV system settings
on page 137.
During recording, if you display the Disc Navigator
for the HDD, some of the titles may appear with a
mark. These titles were recorded with a Line Input
setting different to the current setting of the recorder.
During recording, these titles cannot be played.
1Press HDD or DVD to select the hard disk drive or
the DVD.
2 Press DISC NAVIGATOR to display the Disc
Navigator screen.
Playback will automatically stop when you do this.
You can also access the Disc Navigator from the
Home Menu (press
HOME MENU
, select
Disc
Navigator
then press
ENTER
).
From the title list, press
to display the command
menu panel. Use the
/
and
ENTER
buttons to
navigate the menus.
When in the title list, use the
PREV
(
) and
NEXT
(
) buttons to display the previous/next page if
there are more titles than can be displayed.
Press
SHIFT
and
DISPLAY
to change the title
information displayed in the title list.
If you are editing a VR mode disc you can display the
Play List by selecting
Play List
from the view options
panel (press
, then select
Play List
from the view
options, then
Play List
).
You can switch between the HDD and the DVD Disc
Navigator screens using the
HDD
and
DVD
buttons
(front panel or remote).
Titles on the HDD marked with a icon are timer
recordings set to Auto Replace Recording (see
Editing a
scheduled recording
on page 73).
Titles on the HDD marked with a icon are recently
recorded titles that haven’t yet been played.
3 To exit the Disc Navigator, press HOME MENU
.
Note
1.It isn’t possible to edit video on DVD-RAM discs using this recorder.
VOLUME
+
MUTE
RECORDER RECEIVER
TOP MENU
RDS DISP
SYSTEM
SETUP
DISPLAYTEST TONE
ST +ST –
TUNE +
TUNE –
RETURN
DISC NAVIGATOR DVD MENU
HOME
MENU
AUDIO
SURROUND ADVANCED SOUND TIMER REC
SUBTITLE ANGLE PLAY MODE
VIDEO INPUT
INFO
GUIDE
HDD DVD
FM/AM AUDIO INPUT
HELP
ENTER
CLEAR
REC
PREV NEXT STEP/SLOW
STOP REC
REC MODE ONE TOUCH
COPY
CHANNEL

SKIP
CM
BACK
Disc Navigator (HDD)
4 Titles
Remain
HDD
SP
Recent First
All Genres
10Titles
30h30m
11/29 MON 7:00PM
11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP
2h00m(1.0G)
1
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
23:00 FRI 3/12
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
9
8
7
10
View options panel
Title list style Selected
title
Command
menu panel
Title thumbnail Title information
Title list
Title list order
Genre
selection
Available
recording time
Disc Navigator (DVD)
4 Titles
10Titles
Original
11/29 MON 7:00PM
11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP
2h00m(1.0G)
1
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
23:00 FRI 3/12
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
9
10
Style
4 Titles
PlayList
Original
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 111 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:04 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Editing
09
112
En
Command menu panel options
The table below shows which commands you can use with which video type.
Editing accuracy
Some editing (and Copy List) commands ask you
whether you want to keep Video mode compatibility or
frame accuracy (
Video mode compatible editing
, or
Frame
accurate editing
).
Frame accurate editing is very precise. The edit point is
accurate to the exact frame you choose. However, this
accuracy is not preserved in any copy you make if you use
the high-speed copy function to make a Video mode DVD.
Video mode compatible editing is less precise. The edit
point you choose will only be accurate to within 0.5–1
second. On the other hand, these edit points will be
preserved if you use high-speed copy to make a Video
mode DVD.
HDD genres
The large capacity of the HDD means that there may be
many hours of video in the recorder. To help you organize
your HDD video content you can assign different genres
to titles. There are nine genres in total, including five
user-definable ones that you can name as you like.
HDD Video mode VR mode
(Original)
VR mode
(Play List)
Create
(page 113)
Play
(page 113)

Erase
(page 113)

Edit > Title Name
(page 113)

Edit > Set Thumbnail
(page 114)

Edit > Erase Section
(page 115)

Edit > Divide
(page 115)

Edit > Chapter Edit
(page 116)

Edit > Set Genre
(page 117)
Edit > Lock
(page 117)

Edit > Move
(page 117)
Edit > Combine
(page 118)
Genre Name
(page 118)
Multi-Mode
(page 118)
Undo
(page 119)

DVR-530H_EU.book Page 112 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:04 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Editing 09
113
En
English
Create
Play List only
Use this function to create a Play List and add titles to it.
Before you can use this command, make sure that the
Play List is switched on in the view options panel on the
left.
1 Select ‘Create’ from the command menu panel.
2 Select a title to add to the Play List.
Use the
/
buttons to highlight an Original title then
press
ENTER
to add it and display the Play List.
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to add as many titles as
necessary to the Play List.
Play
Use this function to start playback of a title.
1 Highlight the title you want to play.
2 Select ‘Play’ from the command menu panel.
Playback of the title you selected starts.
Erase
Use this function to erase unwanted titles.
When you erase titles from the HDD or Original titles
from a VR mode DVD-RW, the available recording space
increases accordingly. Erasing a title from a Video mode
DVD-RW disc increases the available recording time only
if it is the last title on the disc.
Erasing Play List titles, or titles from a DVD-R, VR mode
or Video mode, will not result in any more free space on
the disc.
1 Highlight the title you want to erase.
2 Select ‘Erase’ from the command menu panel.
3 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel, then
press ENTER.
Tip
You can erase a title quickly by pressing
CLEAR
when
the title is highlighted. Confirm the edit by pressing
ENTER
.
Title Name
You can give titles new names of up to 64 characters long
for VR mode and HDD recordings, and up to 40
characters for Video mode recordings.
1 Highlight the title you want to name (or
rename).
2 Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Title Name’ from the command
menu panel.
VR mode
Disc Navigator (DVD)
2h00m(1.0G)
1h00m(1.0G)
4 Titles
Remain
10Titles
0h30m
DVD
VR Mode
2h00m(1.0G)
Play List
Play
Erase
Edit
Create
Undo
No title
HDD Video mode VR mode
Disc Navigator (HDD)
4 Titles
Remain
HDD
SP
Recent First
All Genres
10Titles
30h30m
11/29 MON 7:00PM
11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP
2h00m(1.0G)
1
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
23:00 FRI 3/12
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
9
8
7
10
Play
Erase
Edit
Genre Name
Multi-Mode
HDD Video mode VR mode
HDD Video mode VR mode
Disc Navigator (HDD)
4 Titles
Remain
HDD
SP
All Genres
10Titles
30h30m
Recent First
11/29 MON 7:00PM
11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP
2h00m(1.0G)
1
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
23:00 FRI 3/12
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
9
8
7
10
Play
Erase
Edit
Multi-Mode
Genre Name
Cancel
Title name
Erase Section
Cancel
Set Thumbnail
Set Genre
Lock
Divide
Chapter Edit
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 113 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:04 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Editing
09
114
En
3 Input a name for the selected title.
Use the
///
and
ENTER
to select characters.
•A name generated automatically by the recorder will
already be in the name input section of the screen.
Use the
/
buttons to change the cursor
position.
Select
CAPS
or
small
to change to upper or lower-
case, or use the
/
buttons.
You can also use the
CLEAR
button to delete
characters directly (press and hold for two seconds
to delete the whole name).
For discs formatted on a different DVD recorder, you
will see only a limited character set.
4 Highlight ‘OK’ then press ENTER to enter the
name and return to the main Disc Navigator screen.
To return to the main Disc Navigator screen without
saving changes to the title name, press
RETURN
.
Using the remote key shortcuts to input a name
The table below shows the remote control key shortcuts
that you can use to input characters in the name input
screen. Pressing a button repeatedly cycles through the
characters shown.
If you want to enter two characters in succession that are
both on the same button (for example a
P
and an
R
),
press
to advance the cursor one space manually
between inputting the two characters.
*1
lower-case: ÿ; upper-case: ß
Set Thumbnail
You can change the thumbnail picture that appears in
the Disc Navigator for a title to any frame that appears in
that title.
1 Highlight the title you want to change the
thumbnail picture for.
2Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Set Thumbnail’ from the command
menu panel.
The thumbnail setting screen appears from which you
can find the frame you want.
Input Title Name
CAPS
small
OK Clear Space
A B C D E F G H I J K L M . , ? !
N
O
P
Q
R S T U V W X Y Z ( ) : ;
A A A A A A
Æ
ç E E E E I I I I #
2 3
´ µ ¶ ·
1
¿ `
D
N
O
O
O
O
O
ø
U U U U Y ß $
%
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
<
=
>
_ &
£ \ § ¨ © ¬ – ® _ ˚
+ / @ [ ¥ ] ˆ ÷ x ± { | } ~ ¡
c
a
o
<<
<<
1
/41
/23
/4
¸
12:30 Wed 4/01 Pr 1 SP
Key Characters Key Characters
1
. , ’ ? ! – & 1
6
m n o 6 ö ô ò ó ø ñ
2
a b c 2 ä à á â ã
æ ç
7
p q r s 7 $
ÿ/ß
*1
3
d e f 3 è é ë ê
8
t u v 8 ü ù û ú
4
g h i 4 î ï ì í ¡
9
w x y z 9
5
j k l 5 £
0
0
[cursor back]
[cursor forward]
/
[change case]
CLEAR
[clear character]
<space>
[finish name input]
+
~
( ) _ / : ; ” ` ^ @ #
% ¥ | + =
{ } [ ] < >
HDD Video mode VR mode
Disc Navigator (HDD)
4 Titles
Remain
HDD
SP
All Genres
10Titles
30h30m
Recent First
11/29 MON 7:00PM
11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP
2h00m(1.0G)
1
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
23:00 FRI 3/12
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
9
8
7
10
Play
Erase
Edit
Multi-Mode
Genre Name
Cancel
Title name
Erase Section
Divide
Cancel
Set Thumbnail
Set Genre
Lock
Chapter Edit
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 114 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:04 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Editing 09
115
En
English
3Use the playback controls (
,
,
,
, etc.) to
find a suitable frame, then press ENTER to set.
You can also use the chapter and time search features
(press
PLAY MODE
), and the
CM SKIP
buttons.
4 Select ‘Exit’ to return to the Edit screen.
Erase Section
Using this command you can delete a part of a title, ideal
for cutting out the commercial breaks in a recording
made from the TV.
1 Highlight the title containing the section you
want to erase.
2Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Erase Section’ from the command
menu panel.
3
HDD only:
Select the type of edit.
Video Mode Compatible Editing
– Edit points
cannot be set with absolute precision, but high-
speed copying to Video mode DVD will be possible.
Frame Accurate Editing
– Exact edit points are
preserved, but high-speed copying to Video mode
DVD will not be possible.
For more information about these options, see
Editing accuracy
on page 112
4 Highlight ‘From’ then use the playback controls
(
,
,
,
, etc.) to find the start of the section
to erase, then press ENTER.
The bar at the bottom of the screen indicates the current
play position in the title. After pressing
ENTER
, a marker
shows the start of the section.
5 Highlight ‘To’ then, in the same way, find the
end of the section to erase, then press ENTER.
After pressing
ENTER
, another marker indicates the end
of the section, with the section itself marked in red.
6 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel, then
press ENTER.
In the thumbnail viewer you can see a few seconds of
video either side of the marked section to see how the
edit will look.
When editing VR mode Original content, you may not
be able to erase very short sections (less than five
seconds).
Divide
Play List only
Use this command to divide a title into two. Note that
once divided, the two new HDD titles cannot be
recombined into one again.
1 Highlight the title you want to divide.
2 Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Divide’ from the command menu
panel.
3
HDD only:
Select the type of edit.
Video Mode Compatible Editing
– Edit points
cannot be set with absolute precision, but high-
speed copying to Video mode DVD will be possible.
Set Thumbnail (HDD)
Play Pause
Rec. time 0h01m
5-1
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
00.00.09.15
Exit
OK
Exit
OK
HDD VR mode
!
Video Mode Compatible Editing
Frame Accurate Editing
DVD RECORDER
Please select the type of editing.
Video Mode Compatible Editing is
recommended for compatibility with
high-speed copying.
Erase Section (HDD)
Play Pause
Rec. time 0h01m
5-1
18:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 1 XP
Exit
From
To
00.00.09.15
HDD VR mode
!
Video Mode Compatible Editing
Frame Accurate Editing
DVD RECORDER
Please select the type of editing.
Video Mode Compatible Editing is
recommended for compatibility with
high-speed copying.
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 115 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:04 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Editing
09
116
En
Frame Accurate Editing
– Exact edit points are
preserved, but high-speed copying to Video mode
DVD will not be possible.
For more information about these options, see
Editing accuracy
on page 112
4Use the playback controls (
,
,
,
, etc.) to
find the place you want to divide the title.
5 Press ENTER to divide the title at the current
playback position.
6 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm you want to divide the
title, or ‘No’ to cancel.
Chapter Edit
When editing a VR mode DVD or video on the HDD you
can edit individual chapters within a title, with
commands for erasing, combining and dividing.
1Highlight the title that contains the chapters you
want to edit.
2 Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Chapter Edit’ from the command
menu panel.
3
HDD only:
Select the type of edit.
Video Mode Compatible Editing
– Edit points
cannot be set with absolute precision, but high-
speed copying to Video mode DVD will be possible.
Frame Accurate Editing
– Exact edit points are
preserved, but high-speed copying to Video mode
DVD will not be possible.
For more information about these options, see
Editing accuracy
on page 112
4 Select the command you want:
Divide
– Divide a chapter into two or more parts: Use
the playback controls (
,
,
,
, etc.) to find the
point at which you want to divide the chapter, then
press
ENTER
.
You can keep dividing the chapter as many times as
you wish (up to 999 chapters per DVD disc or 99
chapters per HDD title).
Erase
1
/Move
2
– Erase or move chapters: Select the
chapter you want to erase/move and press
ENTER
.
Select whether you want to erase or move the
chapter.
Move command only:
Select the destination for the
chapter, and press
ENTER
.
Combine
3
– Combine two adjacent chapters into
one: Highlight the bar divider between two adjacent
chapters and press
ENTER
.
5 Select ‘Exit’ to get back to the main Disc
Navigator screen.
Divide Title (HDD)
Play Pause
Rec. time 0h01m
5–1
18:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 1 XP
Cancel
00.00.09.15
Divide
Yes
Divided titles cannot
be combined.
OK?
No
!
HDD VR mode
!
Video Mode Compatible Editing
Frame Accurate Editing
DVD RECORDER
Please select the type of editing.
Video Mode Compatible Editing is
recommended for compatibility with
high-speed copying.
Note
1.When editing VR mode Original content, it may not be possible to erase chapters less than five seconds long.
2.VR mode Play List only.
3.It may not always be possible to combine two chapters, even though they are adjacent. If a chapter has been divided into three, then the middle
chapter erased, it is not possible to combine the two remaining chapters into one.
Chapter Edit (DVD VR mode Play List)
Rec. time
1–1
Play
0.00.00
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
1h00m
Chapters 5
Exit
Erase/Move
Combine
Divide
Chapter Edit (DVD VR mode Play List)
002 003 005004001
Rec. time
Chapter
1h00m
0h01m
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
Exit
Erase/Move
Combine
Divide
Move
Cancel
Erase
Chapter Edit (DVD VR mode Play List)
002 003 005004001
Rec. time
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
1h00m
Exit
Erase/Move
Divide
Combine
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 116 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:04 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Editing 09
117
En
English
Set Genre
Use this command to assign a genre to a title.
1Highlight the title you want to assign a genre to.
2 Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Set Genre’ from the command
menu panel.
3 Use the
/
buttons to select a genre for the
title, then press ENTER.
Lock
Original only
You can lock a title so that it can’t be edited or erased
accidently. If you do need to edit it, you can always unlock
it later.
Important
You can’t undo any edits made before changing the
lock status. You also can’t undo a lock/unlock
command using the
Undo
option from the Disc
Navigator menu.
1 Highlight the title you want to lock (or unlock).
2 Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Lock’ from the command menu
panel.
An unlocked title will become locked; a locked title will be
unlocked. Locked titles are shown in the Disc Navigator
with a padlock icon.
Move
Play List only
Use this function to re-arrange the playing order of Play
List titles.
1 Highlight the title you want to move.
2 Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Move’ from the command menu
panel.
3Select a new position in the Play List for the title,
then press ENTER.
After pressing
ENTER
, the new, updated Play List is
displayed.
HDD
Disc Navigator (HDD)
11/29 MON 7:00PM
11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP
2h00m(1.0G)
1
4 Titles
Remain
HDD
SP
All Genres
10Titles
30h30m
Recent First
9
8
7
10
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
23:00 FRI 3/12
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
Play
Erase
Edit
Multi-Mode
Genre Name
Cancel
Title name
Erase Section
Divide
Cancel
Set Thumbnail
Set Genre
Lock
Chapter Edit
Disc Navigator (HDD)
11/29 MON 7:00PM
11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP
2h00m(1.0G)
1
4 Titles
Remain
HDD
SP
All Genres
10Titles
30h30m
Recent First
9
8
7
10
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
23:00 FRI 3/12
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
Play
Erase
Edit
Multi-Mode
Genre Name
Cancel
Title name
Erase Section
Edit Chapter
Cancel
Set Thumbnail
Set Genre
Lock
Divide
Other
Movies
Free1
Free2
Children
No Category
Sport
HDD Video mode VR mode
Disc Navigator (HDD)
11/29 MON 7:00PM
11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP
2h00m(1.0G)
1
4 Titles
Remain
HDD
SP
All Genres
10Titles
30h30m
Recent First
9
8
7
10
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
23:00 FRI 3/12
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
Play
Erase
Edit
Multi-Mode
Genre Name
Cancel
Title name
Erase Section
Divide
Cancel
Set Thumbnail
Set Genre
Lock
Chapter Edit
VR mode
Disc Navigator (DVD)
4 Titles
Remain
10Titles
0h30m
11/29 MON 7:00PM
11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP
2h00m(1.0G)
12/2 THU 10:00PM
12/2Thu 10:00PM 7ch SP
2h00m(1.0G)
12/3 FRI 8:00PM
12/3Fri 8:00PM 9ch SP
1h00m(1.0G)
12/3 FRI 11:00PM
12/3Fri 11:00PM 9ch SP
1h00m(1.0G)
1
2
3
4
DVD
VR Mode
Play List
11/29 MON 7:00PM
11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP
2h00m(1.0G)
1
Play
Erase
Edit
Multi-Mode
Genre Name
Cancel
Title name
Erase Section
Divide
Cancel
Set Thumbnail
Move
Combine
Chapter Edit
Disc Navigator (DVD)
4 Titles
Remain
10Titles
0h30m
Play List
11/29 MON 7:00PM
11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP
2h00m(1.0G)
1
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
23:00 FRI 3/12
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
2
1
3
4
DVD
VR Mode
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 117 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:04 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Editing
09
118
En
Combine
Play List only
Use this function to combine two Play List titles into one.
1 Highlight the title you want to combine.
This title will remain in the same place after combining
with another title.
2 Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Combine’ from the command
menu panel.
3 Select another title to combine with the first.
This title will be appended to the first title selected.
After pressing
ENTER
, the new, updated Play List is
displayed.
Genre Name
Use this command to rename one of the five user-
definable genres (
Free 1
5
).
1 Select ‘Genre Name’ from the command menu
panel.
2 Use the
/
buttons to select one of the user-
definable genre names, then press ENTER.
3 Input a name for the genre.
The name can be up to 12 characters long.
For information on remote control key short cuts, see
Using the remote key shortcuts to input a name
on
page 114.
4 To finish entering the name, highlight ‘OK’ and
press ENTER.
Multi-Mode
Multi-Mode allows you to select several titles, then select
a command that will be applied to all of them. In this way
you can select multiple titles and then erase them all at
once, for example.
1 Select ‘Multi-Mode’ from the command menu
panel.
2 Select titles from the title list.
Use the
/
and
ENTER
buttons to select. Selected
titles are marked with a
.
VR mode
Disc Navigator (DVD)
4 Titles
Remain
10Titles
0h30m
DVD
VR Mode
Play List
11/29 MON 7:00PM
11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP
2h00m(1.0G)
1
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
23:00 FRI 3/12
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
2
1
3
4
Play
Erase
Edit
Multi-Mode
Genre Name
Cancel
Title name
Erase Section
Divide
Cancel
Set Thumbnail
Move
Combine
Chapter Edit
Disc Navigator (DVD)
4 Titles
Remain
10Titles
0h30m
DVD
VR Mode
Play List
11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP
1
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
23:00 FRI 3/12
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
2
1
3
4
HDD
Disc Navigator (HDD)
4 Titles
Remain
HDD
SP
All Genres
10Titles
30h30m
Recent First
11/29 MON 7:00PM
11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP
2h00m(1.0G)
1
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
Multi-Mode
0G)
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
23:00 FRI 3/12
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
9
8
7
10
Play
Erase
Edit
Genre Name
Multi Mode
Disc Navigator (HDD)
4 Titles
Remain
HDD
SP
All Genres
10Titles
30h30m
Recent First
11/29 MON 7:00PM
11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP
2h00m(1.0G)
1
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
23:00 FRI 3/12
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
9
8
7
10
Play
Erase
Edit
Multi-Mode
Genre Name
Cancel
Free1
Free2
Free3
Free4
Free5
Cancel
Input Genre Name
CAPS
small
OK Clear Space
Free 1
A B C D E F G H I J K L M . , ? !
N
O
P
Q
R S T U V W X Y Z ( ) : ;
A A A A A A
Æ
ç E E E E I I I I #
2 3
´ µ ¶ ·
1
¿ `
D
N
O
O
O
O
O
ø
U U U U Y ß $
%
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
<
=
>
_ &
£ \ § ¨ © ¬ – ® _ ˚
+ / @ [ ¥ ] ˆ ÷ x ± { | } ~ ¡
c
a
o
<<
<<
1
/41
/23
/4
¸
HDD
Disc Navigator (HDD)
4 Titles
Remain
HDD
SP
All Genres
10Titles
30h30m
Recent First
11/29 MON 7:00PM
11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP
2h00m(1.0G)
1
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
23:00 FRI 3/12
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
9
8
7
10
Play
Erase
Edit
Genre Name
Multi-Mode
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 118 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:04 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Editing 09
119
En
English
3 Select ‘Next’ from the command menu panel.
4Select the command that you want applied to all
the marked titles.
For example, select
Erase
to erase all the marked titles.
Once the command is completed, Multi-Mode is
automatically exited.
Undo
If you make a mistake while editing, you can generally
undo it. There are three levels of undo (in other words,
you can undo the last three edits you made).
1 Select ‘Undo’ from the command menu panel.
You can’t undo anything after exiting the Disc
Navigator screen.
Frequently asked questions
Why doesn’t the available recording time increase
when I erase titles from a VR mode DVD-R?
When you erase titles from a DVD-R, the titles are no
longer displayed, but the content remains on the
disc. DVD-R is a write-once medium; it can’t be
erased or rewritten.
•I can’t edit my disc!
You may find that as the available recording time is
reduced on a VR mode DVD-R disc, editing is no
longer possible. This is because information about
your edits requires a certain amount of disc space.
As you edit, this information builds up, eventually
preventing you from editing further.
Disc Navigator (HDD)
4 Titles
Remain
HDD
SP
All Genres
10Titles
30h30m
Recent First
2h00m(1.0G)
20:00 FRI 3/12
20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP
2h00m(1.0G)
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
23:00 FRI 3/12
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP
9
Next
Single Mode
Multi-Mode
Disc Navigator (HDD)
4 Titles
Remain
HDD
SP
All Genres
3Titles
30h30m
Recent First
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
22:00 THU 2/12
22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
19:00 MON 29/11
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
1h00m(1.0G)
23:00 FRI 3/12
23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP
8
7
10
Next Comfirm
Cancel
Multi-Mode
Change Genre
Lock
Unlock
Single Mode
Cancel
Erase
Video mode VR mode
Disc Navigator (DVD)
11/29 MON 7:00PM
11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP
2h00m(1.0G)
2h00m(1.0G)
1h00m(1.0G)
1
4 Titles
Remain
10Titles
0h30m
DVD
VR Mode
2h00m(1.0G)
Play List
Play
Erase
Edit
Create
Undo
No title
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 119 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:04 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Using the Jukebox
10
120
En
Chapter 10
Using the Jukebox
The Jukebox feature allows you to use the recorder’s
HDD to store and playback music from up to 999 of your
CDs. Once on the HDD, you can name albums, assign
them a genre, and set tracks that you don’t want to play
to Jump.
Copying CDs to the HDD
The first step is to copy some CDs to your HDD. This is
done in real-time. All tracks are copied from each CD
1
as
an album. Although album and track names are not
copied, you can add these later (see
Editing Jukebox
albums
on page 121).
Usually, the tracks are copied to the HDD in the order
they appear on the CD. If you want to copy them in some
other order, set the CD to play in program play mode. See
Program play
on page 97 for how to do this.
Note that once copied to the HDD, audio tracks cannot
be recorded back to a DVD-R/RW disc.
Important
During copying, no other recorder operation is
possible.
Scheduled timer recordings will not start until
copying is complete.
Copy protected CDs may not copy successfully.
1Press DVD.
2 Load the CD you want to copy to the HDD.
If you want to copy the CD with a different track order, set
the program play mode here.
3 Press
to starts CD playback.
4 Press ONE TOUCH COPY.
Alternatively, you can select
DVD/CD
HDD
from the
Copy submenu of the Home Menu.
The CD can be playing or stopped when you press
ONE
TOUCH COPY
. If the CD is playing, playback (and
copying) will start from the beginning of the CD.
Note
1.The recorder can copy up to 999 CDs; a CD can contain up to 99 tracks. The recorded audio format is 256 kbps Dolby Digital.
VOLUME
+
MUTE
RECORDER RECEIVER
TOP MENU
RDS DISP
SYSTEM
SETUP
DISPLAYTEST TONE
ST +ST –
TUNE +
TUNE –
RETURN
DISC NAVIGATOR DVD MENU
HOME
MENU
AUDIO
SURROUND ADVANCED SOUND TIMER REC
SUBTITLE ANGLE PLAY MODE
SHIFT
VIDEO INPUT
INFO
GUIDE
HDD DVD
FM/AM AUDIO INPUT
HELP
TV/DVD
TV DIRECT
REC
INPUT
TV
ENTER
CLEAR
TV CONTROL
CHANNEL VOLUME
REC
PREV NEXT STEP/SLOW
STOP REC
REC MODE ONE TOUCH
COPY
CHANNEL

SKIP
CM
BACK
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 120 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:11 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Using the Jukebox 10
121
En
English
Playing music from the Jukebox
You can select albums or individual tracks from the
Jukebox to play.
1
1 Press Home Menu and select ‘Jukebox’.
The album list is displayed.
2 Use the
/
buttons to select the album you
want to play and press ENTER.
The album always plays from the first track. Once all
tracks on the selected album have played, the next
album in the list will play (excluding tracks that have
been set to Jump—see
Editing Jukebox albums
on
page 121).
Selecting a track from an album to play
1 Use the
/
buttons to select the album
containing the track you want to play, then press
.
2 Use the
/
buttons to select the track you
want to play and press ENTER.
You can play tracks that are set to Jump like this
(after the track has played, the next track that doesn't
have Jump set will be played).
Editing Jukebox albums
A number of commands are available for editing and
changing the playback behaviour of albums.
1 Use the
///
buttons to select the album/
track you want to edit.
2 Press
to display the command menu panel.
3Use the
/
buttons to select a menu command
and press ENTER.
Erase
– Erase the selected track (if all tracks in an
album are selected, the whole album is erased).
Edit > Edit Title
– Enter a name of up to 64
characters for the album. See page
Title Name
on
page 113 for how to enter names.
Edit > Set Genre
– Set or change the genre for the
album.
Edit > Jump Set
2
– Set a track to jump so that it
doesn't play (choose this command again to cancel
the Jump setting).
Play Mode
– Change the playback order for albums
and tracks.
Genre Name
– Enter a name of up to 12 characters
for a genre. See page
Title Name
on page 113 for how
to enter names.
Note
1.The digital audio output contains a copy-prohibit signal when albums are playing from the HDD.
Easy Timer
Photo Viewer
Disc Navigator Disc Setup
Initial Setup
Video/Audio Adjust
Play Mode Copy
Jukebox
GUIDE Plus+
12/1
1
HDD
New First
21:00 FRI 25/03 Total 12 1.14.58
Repeat Off
10Albums
Jukebox
60h30m
Remain
9Album2
8Album3
7Album4
6Album5
5Album6
4Album7
3Album8
10 Album1
All Genres
Play
Erase
Edit
Play Mode
Genre Name
1-10
0.03.58
ALL
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Album name
Info for selected album Playback status
2.Tracks set to Jump will be skipped during consecutive track playback.
12/1
1
HDD
New First
Jukebox
60h30m
Remain
9Album2
8Album3
7Album4
6Album5
5Album6
4Album7
3Album8
10 Album1
All Genres
Play
Erase
Edit
Play Mode
Genre Name
1-10
0.03.58
21:00 FRI 25/03 Total 12 1.14.58
Repeat Off
10Albums
ALL
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
All tracks set to
play
Track set to Jump
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 121 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:11 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Using the Jukebox
10
122
En
Changing the album view
1From the album list, press
to display the view
options menu panel.
2 Select the view option you want, then press
ENTER.
Sort order
New First
– Most recently copied CDs appear at the
top of the album list.
Most Listened
– Most often listened to CDs appear
at the top of the list.
Album Name
– Albums are listed alphabetically.
Recording Date
– Albums are listed by the recording
date (oldest first).
Genre
All Genres
– All albums are displayed.
Genre
– Only albums in the selected genre are
displayed.
12/1
1
HDD
New First
21:00 FRI 25/03 Total 12 1.14.58
Repeat Off
10Albums
Jukebox
60h30m
Remain
2Album2
3Album3
4Album4
5Album5
6Album6
7Album7
8Album8
1Album1
All Genres
1-10
0.03.58
Display order
New First
Genre
All Genres
Play
Erase
Edit
Play Mode
Genre Name
ALL
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
New first
Recording Date
Most Listened
Cancel
Album Name
12/1
1
HDD
New First
21:00 FRI 25/03 Total 12 1.14.58
Repeat Off
10Albums
Jukebox
60h30m
Remain
2Album2
3Album3
4Album4
5Album5
6Album6
7Album7
8Album8
1Album1
All Genres
1-10
0.03.58
Display order
New First
Genre
All Genres
Play
Erase
Edit
Play Mode
Genre Name
ALL
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
All Genres
No Category
Jazz
Classical
Pops
Rock
Best
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 122 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:11 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
The PhotoViewer 11
123
En
English
Chapter 11
The PhotoViewer
From the PhotoViewer you can view JPEG photos and picture files stored on a CD-ROM/R/RW
1
on your TV.
Playing a slideshow
1 Press HOME MENU and select ‘PhotoViewer’ to
display the PhotoViewer screen.
The PhotoViewer is only accessible when a disc
containing JPEG files is loaded.
If you encounter a disc that will not play, check that
the disc and file formats are compatible with this
recorder (see
JPEG file compatibility
and
PC-created
disc compatibility
on page 43).
2Use the
/
buttons to select a folder from the
folder list.
The first nine images from the selected folder are
displayed as thumbnails in the main part of the screen.
The larger the file size, the longer it takes the recorder
to load the file.
3Press ENTER or
to move to the thumbnail view
area.
The first thumbnail image is highlighted.
To get back to the folder list, press
RETURN
(or
when the leftmost thumbnail is highlighted).
4 Use the
///
to select a thumbnail.
Use the
and
buttons to display the previous/
next page of thumbnails.
5Press ENTER or
to start playing a slideshow
from the selected thumbnail.
Use the
PREV
/
NEXT
buttons to display the
previous/next picture, or the
button to pause the
slideshow.
Depending on the aspect ratio, some pictures may be
displayed with black bars top and bottom, or left and
right.
Large picture files may take a few seconds to display.
This is normal.
6 Press
or RETURN to return to the thumbnail
view area.
7To return to the folder view area, press RETURN
(or
when the leftmost thumbnail is highlighted).
To exit the PhotoViewer, press
HOME MENU
.
Note
1.Up to 999 files or 99 folders are viewable, but if there are more files/folders than this on the disc it is still possible to view them all using the
Reload function (see the following page).
PhotoViewer
1/2 1/3
01. 12/12 TUE
02. 12/13 WED
03. 12/14 THU
04. 12/15 FRI
05. 12/16 SAT
06. 12/17 SUN
07. 12/18 MON
08. 12/19 TUE
1
4
7
2
5
8
3
6
9
File
Date/Time
Chair No. 2
10:00 MON 24/1 1920 x 1440
Currently selected thumbnail
Incompatible/unknown file
File information
Pages in file
view
Pages in
folder list
Currently selected
folder in folder list
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 123 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:11 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
The PhotoViewer
11
124
En
Reloading files from a disc
If you have a disc with a large number of files and/or
folders, you can still view all the images using the reload
function.
1Use the
button to navigate to the last entry in
the folder list (‘Read next: ...’).
2 Press ENTER to load the next batch of up to 999
files/99 folders from the disc.
It will take a moment (at most a minute) to load in the
images.
1
Zooming the image
During a slideshow you can zoom in to enlarge a portion
of the picture by a factor of two or four. You can also move
the area of the picture displayed.
1 During a slideshow, use the CHANNEL + button
to zoom the picture.
Repeated presses cycle between zoom off, 2x zoom and
4x zoom. The zoom factor is displayed on-screen.
2 Use the
///
to move the zoomed area
within the picture.
Rotating an image
You can rotate the displayed picture during a slideshow
so you can always view pictures the right way up,
whichever way they were taken.
During a slideshow, press ANGLE to rotate the
displayed picture clockwise by 90º.
Press
ANGLE
repeatedly to continue rotating the picture
in increments of 90º.
Note
1.You can press
HOME MENU
to exit the PhotoViewer screen while the recorder is reloading images. (If you enter the PhotoViewer again, it will
resume reloading.)
2x Zoom
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 124 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:11 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
The Disc Setup menu 12
125
En
English
Chapter 12
The Disc Setup menu
Introduction
From the Disc Setup menu you can name discs, lock the
contents to prevent accidental recording and erasure,
initialize and finalize discs. The Disc Setup menu is
accessed from the Home menu:
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Disc Setup’.
Basic settings
Input Disc Name
When you initialize a disc for recording, the recorder
automatically assigns a name for the disc ranging from
DISC 1
to
DISC 99
. You can use the Input Disc Name
function
1
to change the default disc name to something
more descriptive. This name appears when you load the
disc and when you display disc information on-screen.
1 Select ‘Input Disc Name’ from the Basic options,
then ‘Next Screen’.
2Input a name for the disc up to 64 characters long
for a VR mode disc, or 40 for a Video mode disc.
Use the
///
and
ENTER
to select characters.
Use the
/
buttons to change the cursor
position.
Select
CAPS
or
small
to change to upper or lower-
case, or use the
/
buttons.
You can also use the
CLEAR
button to delete
characters directly (press and hold for two seconds
to delete the whole name).
For discs formatted on a different DVD recorder, you
will see only a limited character set.
Lock Disc
Default setting:
Off
Set to
On
to prevent accidental recording, editing or
erasing of the disc loaded
2
. If you need to unlock the disc
to make edits, select
Off
.
Important
•A locked disc can still be initialized (which will
completely erase the disc).
Initialize settings
You can initialize a recordable DVD disc for either VR
mode or Video mode recording.
The first time you load a new DVD-RW disc, it will be
automatically initialized for recording according to the
DVD-RW Auto Init. setting in the Initial Setup menu (see
page 135).
Note
1.You cannot input a name for a disc if the TV line system of the disc is different to the current setting of the recorder. See
Additional information
about the TV system settings
on page 137 for how to change the recorder’s setting.
VR mode Video mode
Basic
Initialize
Finalize
Optimize HDD
Disc Setup
Input Disc Name
Lock Disc
Basic Input Disc Name Next ScreenInput Disc Name
Input Disc Name
CAPS
small
OK Clear Space
A B C D E F G H I J K L M . , ? !
N
O
P
Q
R S T U V W X Y Z ( ) : ;
A A A A A A
Æ
ç
E E E E I I I I
#
2 3
´ µ ¶ ·
1
¿ `
D
N
O
O
O
O
O
ø
U U U U Y
ß $
%
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
<
=
>
_ &
£ \ § ¨ © ¬ – ® _ ˚
+ / @ [ ¥ ] ˆ ÷ x ± { | } ~ ¡
c
a
o
<<
<<
1
/
41
/
23
/
4
¸
DISC7
2.You cannot change the lock setting for a disc if the TV line system of the disc is different to the current setting of the recorder. See
Additional
information about the TV system settings
on page 137 for how to change the recorder’s setting.
VR mode
Basic
Initialize
Finalize
Optimize HDD
Disc Setup
Input Disc Name
Lock Disc
Basic On
Off
Lock Disc
DVD-R DVD-RW
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 125 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:11 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
The Disc Setup menu
12
126
En
New DVD-R discs are ready for Video mode recording
when you load them, but it is also possible to initialize
them for VR mode recording.
The initialize menu here lets you reinitialize a disc, for
example if you want to change the recording format of
the disc. See
Initializing a recordable DVD disc
on page 90
for detailed instructions.
Finalize settings
1
Finalize
Finalizing ‘fixes’ the recordings in place so that the disc
can be played on a regular DVD player or computer
equipped with a suitable DVD-ROM drive.
See
Playing your recordings on other DVD players
on
page 89 for detailed instructions.
Undo Finalize
You can undo the finalization on DVD-RW discs recorded
on this recorder in Video mode. You need to do this if you
want to record more material or edit material already on
the disc.
You can also undo the finalization of VR mode discs
which have been finalized on other DVD recorders. If
when you load a disc the message
This disc cannot be
recorded. Undo the finalization
is displayed, use this
command to be able to record on the disc using this
recorder.
1From the Disc Setup menu, select ‘Finalize’, then
‘Undo Finalize’ from the finalize options.
2 Select ‘Start’.
Optimize HDD
Occassionally, you’ll see a message appear on-screen
recommending you optimize the HDD.
As you record, erase and edit recordings, the HDD file
system gradually becomes fragmented. Periodically, the
HDD will need optimizing to ‘clean up’ all the fragmented
files.
Important
Optimizing the HDD can take as long as eight hours.
During optimization, playback and recording are not
possible.
Canceling optimization mid-way does not undo the
optimization already done, so the HDD will be partly
optimized.
Select ‘Optimize HDD’ from the disc Setup menu.
Select ‘Start’ to optimize.
A progress bar indicates how long there is left to go.
Initialize HDD
When your DVD recorder is working without a problem
this option is not visible in the Disc Setup menu.
However, if the HDD file system becomes corrupted for
some reason, you initialize the HDD to fix the problem.
Note that initializing the HDD will erase all the data on it.
Select ‘Initialize HDD’ from the disc Setup menu.
Select ‘Start’ to initialize.
Note
1.You cannot finalize a disc or use the Undo Finalize command if the TV line system of the disc is different to the current setting of the recorder.
See
Additional information about the TV system settings
on page 137 for how to change the recorder’s setting.
DVD-R DVD-RW
DVD-RW
HDD
Basic
Initialize
Finalize
Optimize HDD
Disc Setup
Start Optimization
Optimize HDD
Start
Optimize HDD
HDD
Basic
Initialize
Finalize
Optimize HDD
Disc Setup
Initialize
Optimize HDD
Start
Initialize HDD
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 126 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:11 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
The Video/Audio Adjust menu 13
127
En
English
Chapter 13
The Video/Audio Adjust menu
Using the Video/Audio Adjust menu you can set up the picture quality for the built-in tuner and external inputs, for disc
playback, and for recording.
Setting the picture quality for TV and
external inputs
Picture Creation lets you choose a set of picture quality
settings for the built-in TV tuner and for each external
input. There are several preset settings that suit various
sources, or you can create up to three of your own sets.
Choosing a preset
1 With the recorder stopped, press HOME MENU
and select ‘Video/Audio Adjust’.
2 Select ‘Video Adjust’.
3 Use the
/
buttons to change the preset.
Use the
VIDEO INPUT
button to switch between the
built-in TV tuner and the external inputs.
Use the
CHANNEL +/–
buttons to change the
channel of the built-in TV tuner.
There are six presets available:
Tuner
– suitable for general TV broadcasts
VCR
– suitable for video cassettes
LDP
– suitable for Laserdiscs
Memory1
– user preset 1
Memory2
– user preset 2
Memory3
– user preset 3
You can press
SHIFT
and
DISPLAY
to see the individual
settings for the current preset (
Tuner
,
VCR
or
LDP
).
4 Press ENTER to select the preset.
Creating your own set
There are three user presets in which you can save your
own set of picture quality settings.
1 Follow
Choosing a preset
above and select one of
the user presets (Memory 1, 2 or 3).
2 Select ‘Detailed Settings’.
3Use the
/
buttons to select the picture quality
setting you want to adjust.
You can adjust the following settings:
1
Prog. Motion
– Adjusts the motion and still picture
quality when video output is set to progressive.
PureCinema
– This setting optimizes the picture for
film material when the video output is set to
progressive. Usually this is best left set to
Auto
; try
switching to
Off
if the picture appears unnatural.
YNR
– Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR)
applied to the Y (brightness) component.
CNR
– Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR)
applied to the C (colour) component.
Detail
– Adjusts how sharp edges appear.
Easy Timer
Photo Viewer
Disc Navigator Disc Setup
Initial Setup
Video/Audio Adjust
Play Mode Copy
Jukebox
GUIDE Plus+
Detailed Settings
Pr 1
Tuner
Note
1.When the DV input is selected, only
Prog. Motion
and
PureCinema
settings can be adjusted.
Detailed Settings
Pr 1
Memory1
Memory1
White Level
CNR
YNR
Motion Still
Detail
PureCinma
Prog. Motion
White AGC
Auto1
Off
Max
Max
Off
Off
Min
Max
MaxMin
Pr 1
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 127 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:11 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
The Video/Audio Adjust menu
13
128
En
White AGC
– Turn on for automatic white level
adjustment.
1
White Level
– Adjusts the intensity of white.
Black Level
– Adjusts the intensity of black.
Black Setup
– Corrects the standard reference black
level (NTSC video input only).
Gamma Correction
– Adjusts the brightness of
darker images.
Hue
– Adjusts overall balance between red and
green.
Chroma Level
– Adjusts how rich the colours
appear.
4 Use the
/
buttons to adjust the currently
selected picture quality setting.
5 When you have all the settings as you want
them, press HOME MENU to exit.
You can now use the preset for any other input or the
built-in TV tuner.
Tip
To see more of the picture as you adjust different
settings, press
ENTER
after selecting the setting you
want to adjust.
Setting the picture quality for disc
playback
This setting determines how the picture will look when
playing discs.
Choosing a preset
1 With a disc playing (or paused), press HOME
MENU and select ‘Video/Audio Adjust’.
2 Select ‘Video Adjust’
3 Use the
/
buttons to change the setting.
There are six presets available:
TV(CRT)
– suitable for standard cathode-ray tube TVs
PDP
– suitable for plasma display screens
Professional
– suitable for professional monitors
Memory1
– user preset 1
Memory2
– user preset 2
Memory3
– user preset 3
You can press
SHIFT
and
DISPLAY
to see the individual
settings for the current preset (
TV(CRT)
,
PDP
or
Professional
).
4 Press ENTER to select the preset.
Creating your own set
There are three user presets in which you can save your
own set of picture quality settings for disc playback.
1 Follow
Choosing a preset
above and select one of
the user presets (Memory 1, 2 or 3).
2 Move the cursor down and select ‘Detailed
Settings’.
3 Select the picture quality setting you want to
adjust.
You can adjust the following settings:
Prog. Motion
– Adjusts the motion and still picture
quality when video output is set to progressive.
PureCinema
– This setting optimizes the picture for
film material when the video output is set to
progressive. Usually this is best left set to
Auto 1
; try switching to
Auto 2
,
On
or
Off
if the
picture appears unnatural.
YNR
– Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR)
applied to the Y (brightness) component.
BNR
– Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR)
applied to the block noise (artefacts visible in areas of
flat colour, caused by MPEG compression).
Detail
– Adjusts how sharp edges appear.
White Level
– Adjusts the intensity of white.
Note
1.When
White AGC
is
On
, the
White Level
setting can’t be adjusted.
Detailed Settings
TV(CRT)
Detailed Settings
Memory1
Memory1
YNR
Detail
BNR
Motion Still
Off Max
White Level
PureCinma
Prog. Motion
Black Level
Auto1
Max
Max
Off
Off
Min
Max
MaxMin
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 128 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:11 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
The Video/Audio Adjust menu 13
129
En
English
Black Level
– Adjusts the intensity of black.
Black Setup
– Corrects the standard reference black
level (NTSC video playback only).
Gamma Correction
– Adjusts the brightness of
darker images.
Hue
– Adjusts overall balance between red and
green.
Chroma Level
– Adjusts how rich the colours
appear.
4 Use the
/
buttons to adjust the currently
selected picture quality setting.
5 When you have all the settings as you want
them, press HOME MENU to exit.
Tip
To see more of the picture as you adjust different
settings, press
ENTER
after selecting the setting you
want to adjust.
Audio DRC
Default setting:
Off
When watching Dolby Digital material at low volume via
the analog audio outputs (or via the digital output when
the Dolby Digital Out setting is set to
Dolby Digital
PCM
), low level sounds—including some of the dialog—
can be difficult to hear properly. Switching on Audio DRC
(Dynamic Range Control) can help by bringing up the low
level sounds, while controlling high level peaks.
1 During playback or when paused, press HOME
MENU and select ‘Video/Audio Adjust’.
2 Select ‘Audio Adjust’.
3Use the
/
buttons to adjust DRC from ‘Off‘ to
‘Max’.
Exactly how much difference you can hear between the
settings will depend on the material.
Tip
Audio DRC is not effective when listening to a disc via
the digital output when
Dolby Digital Out
is set to
Dolby Digital
. In this case adjust the dynamic range
from the receiver subwoofer—see
Dynamic Range
Control
on page 30.
Audio DRC MaxOff
Audio DRC
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 129 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:11 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
The Initial Setup menu
14
130
En
Chapter 14
The Initial Setup menu
Using the Initial Setup menu
The Initial Setup menu is where you can set various recorder options for sound, picture, language and so on.
Some settings can only be changed when the recorder is stopped. During playback and recording these settings are
grayed out in the Initial Setup menu.
Except for the Setup Navigator, menu screens are exited automatically after 20 minutes of inactivity.
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Initial Setup’.
In the table below, the default option is marked with a •.
Setting Options Explanation
Basic Settings
Clock Setting Auto
Set the channel that broadcasts a clock signal and the clock will be set
automatically.
Manual •
If there is no channel that broadcasts a clock signal in your area, you
can set the time and date manually.
The clock must be set in order to use timer recording.
Input Line System 525 System
Use for NTSC or PAL-60 recording from an external input.
625 System •
Use for standard PAL or SECAM recording.
See also About the input line system on page 137 for more information on this setting.
Power Save Mode 1
Only signals arriving at the antenna input are passed through to the
antenna output when the recorder is in standby.
Mode 2
No input signals are passed through to the outputs when the recorder
is in standby.
Off •
When the recorder is in standby, all signals arriving at the SCART and
antenna inputs are passed along to the outputs.
Help Setting On •
Switches on the automatic Help screens for GUI displays.
Off
Switches off the automatic Help screens for GUI displays. (Press
HELP
on the remote to manually display the Help screen.)
Setup Navigator Start
Select to start the Setup Navigator. See also
Switching on and setting
up
on page 55
.
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 130 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:11 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
The Initial Setup menu 14
131
En
English
Tuner Settings
Auto Channel Setting Auto Scan
Select your country and then wait for the recorder to auto tune into
channels in your area. After auto scan has finished, the channel map-
ping screen appears showing which channels have been assigned to
which program numbers. You can skip unwanted channels using the
Manual Channel Setting option below.
Press
HOME MENU
to exit the channel mapping screen.
Download from TV
If your TV supports this feature you can download all the channels that
your TV is tuned to via the SCART input. Select your country and then
wait for the download to complete. After the download is complete, the
channel mapping screen appears, as above.
See also the operating instructions that came with your TV for more
information.
Manual CH Setting Next Screen
Proceed to the next screen if you need to adjust any of the settings
made by auto tuning. Select your country, then proceed to the manual
channel setting screen:
• Change channel presets using the
CHANNEL +/–
buttons.
• To skip the displayed channel (because there is no station assigned
to that channel), change the
Skip
setting to
On
.
• Set the
CH SYSTEM
setting to match the channel system of your
country or region.
• Set the
CHANNEL
setting to the channel you want to assign to the
current channel preset.
• To manually fine tune the channel, change the
AFT
setting to
Off
then adjust the
Level
setting.
• The
Name
field allows you to input a name of up to five characters
for the current channel preset.
• If the currently selected channel is scrambled requiring a decoder
connected to the
AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
, set the
Decoder
setting
to
On
.
Channel Swapping Next Screen
Proceed to the next screen to swap channel assignments of different
presets so that you can group together presets that naturally go
together. Select two presets to swap then press
ENTER
.
Video In/Out Settings
Input Colour System Next Screen
Proceed to the next screen to set the input colour system for each
channel preset. Use the
CHANNEL +/–
buttons to change the preset.
On the default
Auto
setting the recorder can generally correctly detect
whether the input signal is PAL, SECAM, 3.58 NTSC or PAL-60, but in
some cases you may have to set it manually if the picture is displayed
incorrectly.
See also About the input colour system on page 137 for more information on this setting.
Component Video Out Interlace •
Select if your monitor/TV is not compatible with progressive-scan
video.
Progressive
Select if your monitor/TV is progressive-scan compatible. Check the
operating instructions that came with your monitor/TV if you’re not
sure.
For Component Video Out to be effective, the AV1 Out setting (see page 132) must be set to something other than
RGB
.
Setting Options Explanation
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 131 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:11 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
The Initial Setup menu
14
132
En
AV1 Out Video •
Sets the
AV1(RGB)-TV
SCART output to standard composite video
(compatible with all TVs).
S-Video
Sets the
AV1(RGB)-TV
SCART output to S-video. Recommended if you
are using a long SCART cable.
RGB
Sets the
AV1(RGB)-TV
SCART output to RGB. Good quality but check
your TV for compatibility.
If you choose a setting that is incompatible with your TV you may not be able to see any picture at all. In this case either switch off and reconnect
using the supplied video cable, or reset the recorder (see Resetting the recorder on page 139).
The Component Video Out setting (see page 131) has no effect when AV1 Out is set to
RGB
.
AV2/L1 In Video •
Sets the
AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
SCART input to standard compos-
ite video.
S-Video
Sets the
AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
SCART input to S-video.
RGB
Sets the
AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)
SCART input to RGB.
Decoder
Use this setting if you connected a decoder to the
AV2 (INPUT 1/
DECODER)
SCART connector. For scrambled channels, make sure that
the channel
Decoder
setting is set to
On
. (See
Manual CH Setting
page 131.)
NTSC on PAL TV On •
NTSC discs will play correctly on PAL-only TVs.
Off
Use if your TV is already NTSC-compatible.
Many recent PAL TVs are compatible with NTSC input and so this setting can be switched off. Check the operating instructions that came with
your TV. See also About NTSC on PAL TV on page 137 for related information.
Audio In Settings
Nicam Select NICAM •
Record the NICAM audio in a NICAM broadcast.
Regular Audio
Record the non-NICAM audio in a NICAM broadcast. (You can still
switch the audio to record using the
AUDIO
button before recording.)
Tuner Level Normal •
Standard setting.
Compression
Use if the audio level from the built-in tuner is excessive, causing dis-
tortion.
External Audio Stereo •
Select if the audio from the currently selected external input is stan-
dard stereo.
Bilingual
Select if each channel carries a separate soundtrack.
When the external audio is from the DV input, an audio subcode channel within the DV audio tells the recorder whether the audio is stereo or
bilingual. This has priority over the setting you make here.
Bilingual Recording A/L •
Record the left (A) channel of a bilingual source when recording to
HDD with HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode ON, to DVD in
Video mode or in
LPCM
mode, from an external source.
B/R
As above, but for right (B) channel recording.
When recording bilingual audio to DVD in VR mode (except in
LPCM
mode), or to HDD with HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode Off (except
in
LPCM
mode), both audio channels are recorded and you can switch to the one you want on playback.
Setting Options Explanation
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 132 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:11 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
The Initial Setup menu 14
133
En
English
DV Input Stereo 1 •
Select to use the ‘live’ audio track (recorded during the video shoot)
from a camcorder that supports two stereo audio tracks.
Stereo 2
Select to use the overdubbed audio track from a camcorder that sup-
ports two stereo audio tracks.
Mix
Select one of the three settings to use a mix of the two stereo audio
tracks.
Input Level (L1–L2) –6dB – +6dB
(default: 0 dB)
Adjust the input level separately for each of the external inputs from
–6dB to +6dB in steps of 3dB.
Audio Out Settings
Digital Out On •
Activates the digital audio output.
Off
Deactivates the digital audio output.
When set to
Off
, all the following Audio Out settings are grayed out.
Dolby Digital Out Dolby Digital •
Output a Dolby Digital signal when a Dolby Digital source is being
played.
Dolby Digital
PCM
Convert Dolby Digital sources to Linear PCM output. Use if your con-
nected equipment doesn’t have a Dolby Digital decoder.
DTS Out On •
Output a DTS signal when a DTS source is being played.
Off
Switch off the digital output when a DTS source is being played. Use
when your connected equipment doesn’t have a DTS decoder. In this
case, use the analog audio outputs.
96 kHz PCM Out 96 kHz
48 kHz •
Convert 96 kHz digital audio sources to 48 kHz output. Use if your con-
nected equipment doesn’t support 96 kHz sampling rate.
96 kHz
Output 96 kHz digital audio when a 96 kHz source is being played.
MPEG Out MPEG
Output an MPEG audio signal when a source using MPEG audio is
being played.
MPEG
PCM •
Convert sources with MPEG audio to Linear PCM output. Use if your
connected equipment doesn’t have an MPEG audio decoder.
Language Settings
OSD Language English •
Sets the language of the on-screen displays to English.
available languages
Choose from the languages displayed for the on-screen displays.
Audio Language English •
Sets the default audio language for DVD-Video playback to English.
available languages
Choose from the languages displayed to set the default audio lan-
guage for DVD-Video playback.
Other
Select to set the default audio language to something other than the
ones listed. See
Selecting other languages for language options
on
page 138.
Discs do not necessarily have audio in your selected language. Also, some discs override the Audio Language preference.
Setting Options Explanation
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 133 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:11 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
The Initial Setup menu
14
134
En
Subtitle Language English •
Sets the default subtitle language for DVD-Video playback to English.
available languages
Choose from the languages displayed to set the default subtitle lan-
guage for DVD-Video playback.
Other
Select to set the default subtitle language to something other than the
ones listed. See
Selecting other languages for language options
on
page 138.
Discs do not necessarily have subtitles in your selected menu language. Also, some discs override the Subtitle Language preference.
Auto Language On •
On this setting:
• DVD-Video discs whose main audio track is in your default language
will play using that language, without subtitles.
• Discs whose main audio track is not in your default language but
that have a subtitle track in your default language will play the original
audio track with subtitles.
Off
Select to play DVD-Video discs according to your audio and subtitle
language preferences.
For Auto Language to be effective, the Audio Language and Subtitle Language options must be set to the same language.
DVD Menu Language w/Subtitle Language
Sets the language of DVD-Video menus to the same as that set for the
subtitle language.
English
Sets the language of DVD-Video menus to English.
available languages
Choose from the displayed languages to set the default language for
DVD-Video menus.
Other
Select to set the DVD menu language to something other than the
ones listed. See
Selecting other languages for language options
on
page 138.
Discs do not necessarily have menus in your selected menu language.
Subtitle Display On •
Select to have discs display subtitles according to your Subtitle Lan-
guage and Auto Language preferences.
Off
Select to switch off subtitle display.
Assist Subtitle
Select to display special additional assistive subtitles, where available.
Some discs may override these settings.
Recording Settings
Manual Recording On (go to setup)
All the standard recording modes, plus
MN1
32
,
LPCM
and
XP+
modes can be set.
Off •
Just the standard recording modes (
XP
,
SP
,
LP
,
EP
,
SLP
and
SEP
) can be
set.
See also Manual recording modes on page 147 for detailed information on manual recording levels.
Optimized Rec On
The recording quality of timer recordings is automatically adjusted to
fit on to the selected media if it will not fit at the selected quality set-
ting. If the recording will not fit even at
MN1
, then the recording will
start at
MN1
and stop when all the available space is used up.
Off •
When a timer recording is set that won’t fit on to the selected media,
the recording starts but is cut off when no more recording is possible.
Optimized Rec will only compensate for the next scheduled timer recording if more than one is set. It cannot be used together with VPS/PDC.
Setting Options Explanation
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 134 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:11 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
The Initial Setup menu 14
135
En
English
Set Thumbnail 0 seconds •
Sets the default thumbnail picture in the Disc Navigator to the first
frame of the title.
30 seconds
Sets the default thumbnail picture to 30 seconds into the title.
3 minutes
Sets the default thumbnail picture to 3 minutes into the title.
Auto Chapter (Video) No Separation
Automatic chapter marking is switched off.
10 minutes •
When recording in Video mode, chapter markers are inserted every 10
minutes.
15 minutes
Chapter markers are inserted every 15 minutes.
DVD-RW Auto Init. VR Mode •
Blank DVD-RW discs are initialized for VR mode recording when
loaded into the recorder for the first time.
Video Mode
Blank DVD-RW discs are initialized for Video mode recording.
HDD Recording Format Video Mode Off
Recordings made to the HDD are made in VR mode. Use this setting if
you don’t need to transfer the recording later to a Video mode DVD.
Video Mode On •
Recordings made to the HDD are compatible with Video mode record-
ings. This setting is convenient if you want to transfer the recording to
a Video mode DVD as high-speed copy can be used.
When Video Mode On is used, you must select the audio channel you want to record when recording a bilingual broadcast. On the Video Mode Off
setting, both channels will be recorded and you can switch between them on playback. See also Bilingual Recording on page 132.
Playback Settings
TV Screen Size 4:3 (Letter Box) •
Select if you have a standard 4:3 TV and prefer the letter box format
presentation for widescreen material.
4:3 (Pan & Scan)
Select if you have a standard 4:3 TV and prefer the pan and scan pre-
sentation for widescreen material.
16:9
Select if you have a widescreen 16:9 TV. Your TV settings determine
how 4:3 material will look.
Selecting
4:3 (Letter Box)
or
4:3 (Pan & Scan)
does not guarantee that all video material will be presented in that format as some discs override
this setting.
Still Picture Field
Produces a stable, generally shake-free image.
Frame
Produces a sharper image, but more prone to shake than Field stills.
Auto •
The recorder automatically selects Field or Frame type still, according
to the material playing.
Seamless Playback On
Playback is smooth, but with a trade-off against the accuracy of the
edit points.
Off •
You may notice momentary interruption at edited points during play-
back of a VR mode Play List.
Setting Options Explanation
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 135 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:11 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
The Initial Setup menu
14
136
En
Parental Lock Set Password
In order to change the parental lock level or change the country/area
code, set the password using this option. From the following screen,
enter a four-digit number that will be your password.
Change Password
In order to change the password, first enter your existing password
and then a new one from the following screen.
Change Level
From the following screen, first enter your password and then set a
parental lock level.
Country/Area Code
From the following screen, first enter your password and then set a
country/area code.
Only certain discs have parental lock and country code features. Check the disc packaging to see what features the disc has. If you forget your
password you can reset it by resetting the recorder to its factory settings. See Resetting the recorder on page 139.
Angle Indicator On •
A camera icon appears on-screen during multi-angle scenes on a
DVD-Video disc.
Off
Nothing is indicated on-screen when a multi-angle scene is showing.
Options
On-Screen Display On •
The recorder displays operation displays (
Stop
,
Play
, etc.) on-screen.
Off
Switches off the on-screen operation displays.
Front Panel Display On •
The time is shown in the front panel display when the recorder is in
standby.
Off
The front panel display is switched off in standby (although it still lights
dimly when setting a timer recording).
Remote Control Mode Recorder 1–3
(default: Recorder 1)
If you are using more than one recorder in the same room, set them to
different IDs. This setting sets the recorder ID; to change the remote
controller ID, press and hold
RETURN
then press
1
,
2
or
3
to set. The
remote will only control a recorder with the same ID.
AV. Link This Recorder Only •
Signals received through the AV input when the recorder is in standby
are not passed through to the AV output.
Pass Through
Signals received when in standby are passed though to the output for
connected devices. (Note that during EPG data download, the EPG
data is not passed through.)
When set to
Pass Through
, make sure to set Power Save (page 130) to
Off
.
Setting Options Explanation
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 136 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:11 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
The Initial Setup menu 14
137
En
English
Additional information about the TV system
settings
About the input line system
This recorder is compatible with PAL, SECAM, 3.58 NTSC
and PAL-60 TV systems. The Input Line System and Input
Colour System settings determine how the recorder
treats incoming video signals from an external input or
the built-in TV tuner.
Please note the following points when changing the
input line system:
When the current input is a built-in tuner channel
preset, changing the input line system will usually
also affect the input line system of the
AV2 (INPUT 1/
DECODER)
input. However if the
AV2/L1 In
setting is
set to
Decoder
, then the L2 input is affected instead.
If, when the Input Line System setting is changed, the
screen goes blank (due to incompatibility with your
TV), you can switch back by pressing and holding the
front panel
button then pressing
OPEN/CLOSE
(also front panel) while the recorder is stopped.
When you switch the Input Line System setting the
Copy List is erased. If you switch the setting using the
button and
OPEN/CLOSE
buttons as described
above, there is no confirmation, so please use with
care.
You can’t mix recordings of different TV line systems
on the same disc.
When you change this setting, the
Input Colour
System
setting also changes (see below).
About NTSC on PAL TV
Depending on the Input Line System setting and the
NTSC on PAL TV setting, the signal format output when
the recorder is stopped varies as shown in the table
below.
About the input colour system
The available options of the Input Colour System setting
depend on the Input Line System setting. The table below
shows the different options available.
Additional information about component
video output
If you switch the Component Video Out setting to
Progressive
when using a TV that is not compatible
with progressive-scan video, you will not be able to see
anything displayed on your TV. If this happens, press and
hold the
button on the front panel, then press
. This will set the recorder’s video output back to
Interlace.
Input Line System NTSC on PAL
TV
Output when
stopped
625 System Off PAL
On PAL
525 System Off NTSC
On PAL–60
Input Line System Built-in tuner External input
625 System Auto Auto
PAL PAL
SECAM SECAM
525 System
n/a
Auto
3.58 NTSC
PAL–60
Compatibility of this unit with progressive-scan TVs
Consumers should note that not all high-definition television sets
are fully compatible with this product and may cause artifacts to
be displayed in the picture. In case of 525 progressive scan
picture problems, it is recommended that the user switch the
connection to the ‘standard definition’ output (
Interlace
). If there
are questions regarding our TV set compatibility with this model,
please contact our customer service center.
This recorder is compatible with the following Pioneer displays
and monitors
Plasma display
•PDP-503HDE, PDP-433HDE, PDP-434HDE, PDP-504HDE, PDP-
435XDE, PDP-435HDE, PDP-435FDE, PDP-505XDE, PDP-
505HDE, PDP-615EX
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 137 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:11 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
The Initial Setup menu
14
138
En
Selecting other languages for language
options
1 Select ‘Other’ from the language list.
This option appears in the settings for DVD Menu
Language, Audio Language, and Subtitle Language.
2 Select the language you want.
Select by language name: Use the
/
buttons to
change the language.
Select by code number: Press
then use the
number buttons to enter the four-digit language
code.
See
Language code list
on page 148 for a list of available
languages and corresponding codes.
3 Press ENTER to confirm and exit the screen.
Basic
Tuner
Video In/Out
Audio In
Audio Out
Language
Recording
Playback
Initial Setup
OSD
Audio Language
Subtitle Language
Auto Language
DVD Menu Language
Subtitle Display
DVD Menu Language
DVD Menu Language
Language
Number
English
051 4
Language
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 138 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:11 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Additional information 15
139
En
English
Chapter 15
Additional information
Resetting the recorder
If you need to, you can reset the recorder to all its factory
settings.
1 Make sure that the recorder is on.
2 Press and hold
and press
STANDBY/ON.
The recorder turns off with all settings reset.
Setting up the remote to control your
TV
You can use the supplied remote to control your TV. To be
able to use this feature you first have to program the
remote with a maker code from the table on the following
page.
1 Switch on your TV.
2 Press and hold down the CLEAR button, then
enter the maker code for your TV.
See the table on the next page for the list of maker codes.
If there is more than one code given for your make, input
the first one in the list.
If the maker’s name of your TV doesn’t appear in the
table, you will not be able to use this remote to
control your TV.
3 Point the remote towards your TV and press
TV to check that the remote works with your TV.
If the remote is set up correctly, the TV should switch off.
If it doesn’t and there is another code given for your
maker, repeat step
1
with a new code.
Using the TV remote control buttons
The table below shows how to use this remote control
with your TV.
Button What it does
TV
Press to switch the TV on/off (standby)
INPUT
Press to change the TV’s video input
TV VOLUME
Use to adjust the TV volume
TV CHANNEL
Use to change TV channels
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 139 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:11 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Additional information
15
140
En
TV Preset code list
Please note that there are cases where only certain functions may be controllable after assigning the proper preset
code, or the codes for the manufacturer in the list will not work for the model that you are using.
ACURA
644
ADMIRAL
631
AIWA
660
AKAI
632, 635, 642
AKURA
641
ALBA
607, 639, 641, 644
AMSTRAD
642, 644, 647
ANITECH
644
ASA
645
ASUKA
641
AUDIOGONIC
607, 636
BASIC
LINE
641, 644
BAUR
631, 607, 642
BEKO
638
BEON
607
BLAUPUNKT
631
BLUE
SKY
641
BLUE
STAR
618
BPL
618
BRANDT
636
BTC
641
BUSH
607, 641, 642, 644, 647,
656
CASCADE
644
CATHAY
607
CENTURION
607
CGB
642
CIMLINE
644
CLARIVOX
607
CLATRONIC
638
CONDOR
638
CONTEC
644
CROSLEY
632
CROWN
638, 644
CRYSTAL
642
CYBERTRON
641
DAEWOO
607, 644, 656
DAINICHI
641
DANSAI
607
DAYTON
644
DECCA
607, 648
DIXI
607, 644
DUMONT
653
ELIN
607
ELITE
641
ELTA
644
EMERSON
642
ERRES
607
FERGUSON
607, 636, 651
FINLANDIA
635, 643, 655
FINLUX
632, 607, 645, 648,
653, 654, 655
FIRSTLINE
640, 644
FISHER
632, 635, 638, 645
FORMENTI
632, 607, 642
FRONTECH
631, 642, 646
FRONTECH
/
PROTECH
632
FUJITSU
648, 629
FUNAI
640, 646, 658
GBC
632, 642
GE
601, 608, 607, 610, 617, 602, 628, 618
GEC
607, 634, 648
GELOSO
632, 644
GENEXXA
631, 641
GOLDSTAR
610, 623, 621, 602, 607, 650
GOODMANS
607, 639, 647, 648, 656
GORENJE
638
GPM
641
GRAETZ
631, 642
GRANADA
607, 635, 642, 643, 648
GRADIENTE
630, 657
GRANDIN
618
GRUNDIG
631, 653
HANSEATIC
607, 642
HCM
618, 644
HINARI
607, 641, 644
HISAWA
618
HITACHI
631, 633, 634, 636, 642, 643, 654,
606, 610, 624, 625, 618
HUANYU
656
HYPSON
607, 618, 646
ICE
646, 647
IMPERIAL
638, 642
INDIANA
607
INGELEN
631
INTERFUNK
631, 632, 607, 642
INTERVISION
646, 649
ISUKAI 641
ITC 642
ITT 631, 632, 642
JEC 605
JVC 613, 623
KAISUI 618, 641, 644
KAPSCH 631
KENDO 642
KENNEDY 632, 642
KORPEL 607
KOYODA 644
LEYCO 607, 640, 646, 648
LIESENK&TTER 607
LOEWE 607
LUXOR 632, 642, 643
M-ELECTRONIC 631, 644, 645, 654, 655,
656, 607, 636, 651
MAGNADYNE 632, 649
MAGNAFON 649
MAGNAVOX 607, 610, 603, 612, 629
MANESTH 639, 646
MARANTZ 607
MARK 607
MATSUI 607, 639, 640, 642, 644, 647, 648
MEDIATOR 607
MEMOREX 644
METZ 631
MINERVA 631, 653
MITSUBISHI 609, 610, 602, 621, 631
MULTITECH 644, 649
NEC 659
NECKERMANN 631, 607
NEI 607, 642
NIKKAI 605, 607, 641, 646, 648
NOBLIKO 649
NOKIA 632, 642, 652
NORDMENDE 632, 636, 651, 652
OCEANIC 631, 632, 642
ORION 632, 607, 639, 640
OSAKI 641, 646, 648
OSO 641
OSUME 648
OTTO VERSAND 631, 632, 607, 642
PALLADIUM 638
PANAMA 646
PANASONIC 631, 607, 608,642, 622
PATHO CINEMA 642
PAUSA 644
PHILCO 632, 642
PHILIPS 631, 607, 634, 656
PHOENIX 632
PHONOLA 607
PROFEX 642, 644
PROTECH 607, 642, 644, 646, 649
QUELLE 631, 632, 607, 642, 645, 653
R-LINE 607
RADIOLA 607
RADIOSHACK 610, 623, 621, 602
RBM 653
RCA 601, 610, 615, 616, 617, 618, 661, 662,
609
REDIFFUSION 632, 642
REX 631, 646
ROADSTAR 641, 644, 646
SABA 631, 636, 642, 651
SAISHO 639, 644, 646
SALORA 631, 632, 642, 643
SAMBERS 649
SAMSUNG 607, 638, 644, 646
SANYO 635, 645, 648, 621, 614
SBR 607, 634
SCHAUB LORENZ 642
SCHNEIDER 607, 641, 647
SEG 642, 646
MCMICHAEL 634
SEI 632, 640, 649
SELECO 631, 642
SHARP 602, 619, 627
SIAREM 632, 649
SIEMENS 631
SINUDYNE 632, 639, 640, 649
SKANTIC 643
SOLAVOX 631
SONOKO 607, 644
SONOLOR 631, 635
SONTEC 607
SONY 604
SOUNDWAVE 607
STANDARD 641, 644
STERN 631
SUSUMU 641
SYSLINE 607
TANDY 631, 641, 648
TASHIKO 634
TATUNG 607, 648
TEC 642
TELEAVIA 636
TELEFUNKEN 636, 637, 652
TELETECH 644
TENSAI 640, 641
THOMSON 636, 651, 652, 663
THORN 631, 607, 642, 645, 648
TOMASHI 618
TOSHIBA 605, 602, 626, 621, 653
TOWADA 642
ULTRAVOX 632, 642, 649
UNIVERSUM 631, 607, 638, 642, 645, 646,
654, 655
VESTEL 607
VICTOR 613
VOXSON 631
WALTHAM 643
WATSON 607
WATT RADIO 632, 642, 649
WHITE
WESTINGHOUSE 607
YOKO 607, 642, 646
ZENITH 603, 620
PIONEER 600, 631, 632, 607, 636, 642, 651
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 140 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:11 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Additional information 15
141
En
English
Screen sizes and disc formats
When viewing on a standard TV or monitor
Screen format of disc Setting Appearance
16:9 4:3 (Letter Box)
The program is shown in
widescreen with black bars at
the top and bottom of the
screen.
4:3 (Pan & Scan)
The sides of the program are
cropped so that the picture
fills the whole screen.
4:3 16:9
The program appears
squashed. Set to either
4:3
(Letter Box)
or
4:3 (Pan &
Scan)
.
4:3 (Letter Box)
4:3 (Pan & Scan)
The program is presented
correctly on either setting.
When viewing on a widescreen TV or monitor
Screen format of disc Setting Appearance
16:9 16:9
The program is presented in
widescreen.
4:3 16:9
Your TV will determine how the
picture is presented—check
the manual that came with the
TV for details.
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 141 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:11 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Additional information
15
142
En
Minimum copying times
The table below shows the minimum HDD to DVD copying time for one hour of video.
Please note that not all discs are compatible with high-speed copying.
1
Check with the disc manufacturer for
compatibility.
Note that all times in the above table are approximate.
*1
Compatible with single speed recording only
*2
Compatible with 2x speed recording
*3
Compatible with 4x speed recording
*4
Compatible with 8x speed recording.
*5
Compatible with 12x speed recording.
Note that actual copy speed varies with the part of the disc being
recorded.
The table below shows 16x DVD-R and 6x DVD-RW disc brands that have been tested for high-speed writing
compatibility with this recorder.
*1
Compatible with 12x speed recording
*2
Compatible with 6x speed recording
Note
1.There may be cases where even 2x/4x/6x/8x/16x compatible discs do not copy at full speed. High speed copying is not possible when using
discs initialized on another recorder.
DVD disc type
Rec
mode
DVD-RW Ver. 1.0, 1.1
*1
DVD-R Ver. 2.0
DVD-RW Ver. 1.1/2x
*2
DVD-R Ver. 2.0/4x
*3
DVD-RW Ver. 1.2/4x
*3
DVD-RW Ver. 1.2/6x DVD-R Ver. 2.0/8x
*4
DVD-R Ver. 2.1/8x
*4
DVD-R Ver. 2.0/16x
*5
DVD-R Ver. 2.1/16x
*5
SEP
6 mins. 3 mins. 1.5 mins. 1.25 mins. 1.1 mins. 1 min.
SLP
7.5 mins. 4 mins. 2 mins. 1.5 mins. 1.25 mins. 1.1 mins.
EP
10 mins. 5 mins. 2.5 mins. 2 mins. 1.5 mins. 1.25 mins.
LP
15 mins. 7.5 mins. 4 mins. 2.5 mins. 2 mins. 1.5 mins.
SP
30 mins. 15 mins. 7.5 mins. 5 mins. 4 mins. 3 mins.
XP
60 mins. 30 mins. 15 mins. 10 mins. 8 mins. 6 mins.
16x DVD-R
*1
6x DVD-RW
*2
Maker Manufacturer ID Maker Manufacturer ID
Sony
That’s
TDK
Maxell
“SONY16D1”
“TYG03”
“TTH02”
“MXL RG04”
JVC
MCC (MKM)
“JVC1Victord7”
“MKM01RW6x”
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 142 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:11 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Additional information 15
143
En
English
Troubleshooting
Incorrect operation is often mistaken for trouble and malfunction. If you think there is something wrong with this
component, please check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the
other components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after checking the
points below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repair work.
General
Problem Remedy
The disc is automatically ejected
after closing the disc tray
• Check that the disc is not a DVD+R/RW, DVD-RAM or other incompatible format
disc (page 42).
• Check that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and label-side up).
• Take out the disc and clean it (page 150).
• Check that the disc has a region code compatible with the recorder (page 153).
No picture
• Check that everything is connected properly (page 45).
• Check that the connected TV and/or the AV amp/receiver is set to the correct
input.
• The recorder may be set to progresive scan with an incompatible TV.
Reset to interlace by pressing and holding the front panel
button then pressing
.
Can’t play a disc
• Check that the disc is a compatible format disc (page 42).
• Take out the disc and clean it (page 150).
• Check that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and label-side up).
• There may be condensation in the recorder. Leave the recorder for an hour or so
for the condensation to evaporate.
• During HDD recording, you can’t play discs that are recorded with a Line System
different to the current recorder setting.
Can’t record a disc
• Check that the disc is not a DVD+R/RW, DVD-RAM or other incompatible format
disc (page 42).
All settings are reset
• If the recorder is unplugged (or there is a power failure) while the recorder is on,
all the settings will be lost.
• Make sure that you switch the recorder into standby before unplugging the
power cord.
Remote control does not work
• If you connected this recorder to the receiver subwoofer using the
CONTROL
IN
jack, point the remote control at the display unit of the receiver subwoofer to use
(page 16). Also make sure that the analog audio outputs are connected (directly or
via your TV) to the receiver subwoofer.
• Set the remote control to the same ID number as the recorder (page 136). (When
the batteries run down, the remote mode is automatically reset to
Recorder1
.)
• Use the remote within its operating range (page 16).
• Replace the batteries (page 16).
No sound or sound is distorted
• Make sure that the receiver subwoofer or TV is set to the correct input and the
volume turned up.
• There is no sound when the picture is paused, or during scanning or slow
motion play. Press
to resume regular playback.
• DTS audio can only be played back if the recorder’s digital output is connected
to the receiver subwoofer. If connected to your TV, your TV must have a DTS
decoder for you to be able to enjoy DTS sound.
• Some 96kHz discs do not output audio through the digital jack.
• Check the optical and analog audio cable connections (page 45).
• If the sound is distorted, try cleaning the cable plugs.
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 143 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:11 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Additional information
15
144
En
The picture from the external input
is distorted
• If the video signal from the external component is copy-protected, you cannot
connect via this recorder. Connect the component directly to your TV.
The picture is distorted
• Change the Input Line System setting (page 137). (You can also change it by
pressing the
button and
OPEN/CLOSE
on the front panel simultaneously with
the recorder stopped.)
Screen is stretched vertically or hori-
zontally
• Make sure that the
TV Screen Size
setting (page 135) is correct for the kind of TV
you have (see also page 141).
• If you have a widescreen TV, check its aspect ratio settings.
• This recorder’s input switches into wide mode automatically according to the
input signal. When the unit connected is not compatible with VIDEO ID-1
(widescreen signalling), set the connected component to output 4:3 aspect ratio
(standard) video.
Can’t play a disc recorded using this
recorder on another player
• If the disc was recorded in Video mode, make sure that it’s finalized (page 89).
•Some players will not play recordable DVD discs, even when recorded in Video
mode and finalized.
• If the disc was recorded in VR mode, the other player must be specifically RW
compatible in order to play it (page 42).
• Discs recorded with copy-once material cannot be played on non-CPRM
compatible players (page 80).
During playback the picture is dark
or distorted
• When a copy-protected disc is played via a VCR, the picture will not display
correctly. Connect the recorder directly to your TV.
Can’t control your TV using this
remote control
• If there is more than one code listed for your make of TV, try each one in turn
(page 139).
• It is possible that none of the codes listed will work with your particular model of
TV, even if the maker appears in the remote control code list.
Can’t record or does not record suc-
cessfully
• Check that there is some remaining blank space on the DVD/HDD.
• For a Video mode disc, check that the disc isn’t already finalized.
• The HDD may contain up to 999 titles; one DVD disc 99 (Original) titles and 999
chapters (VR mode), or 99 chapters (Video mode). Check that these limits have not
been reached.
• Check that the source you are trying to record is not copy protected.
• For a VR formatted disc, check that the disc isn’t locked (page 125).
• Check that you are recording with the same TV system (PAL, NTSC, etc.) as the
disc has already been recorded in. All recordings on a disc must be in the same TV
system. When recording to the HDD, it is also necessary to set the Input Line
System setting to match what you want to record (page 137).
• The power may have failed during recording.
Timer program doesn’t record suc-
cessfully
• When setting the recording channel, make sure you set the recorder’s built-in TV
tuner, not the TV’s built-in tuner.
• When recording to a Video mode disc, programs that are copy-once protected
cannot be recorded. Use a VR mode formatted disc for copy-once material
(page 80).
• Two timer programs may have overlapped, in which case only the earlier one will
record completely.
• The power may have failed during recording.
After briefly unplugging or after a
power failure the front panel dis-
play shows ‘--:--’
• A backup battery inside the recorder keeps the clock and other settings from
being reset when there is no power to the recorder. This battery should last
approximately five years from factory shipping.
Reset the clock and other recorder settings to use the recorder again. To have the
battery replaced, contact your dealer or a Pioneer Service Center.
Problem Remedy
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 144 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:11 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Additional information 15
145
En
English
If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity, disconnect the power plug from the
outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions.
Frequently asked questions
In this section you can find answers to frequently asked
questions on how to use your DVD recorder and what it
can do.
How do I make a high-quality copy?
We recommend that you use the high-speed copy
mode. Although the copy is faster than real time,
there is no loss of picture or sound quality compared
to the original.
If there is not enough space on the disc to make a
copy at the same picture quality as the original, we
recommend that you change the recording mode to
‘Optimized’. This will fit the recording on to the
available space on the disc.
See also
Copying and back-up
on page 101.
Can I make a DVD copy of, say, a movie that has had
the commercials edited out?
Yes. There are two ways to do this. You can either edit
the video on the HDD then copy the edited version to
DVD, or you can assemble a Copy List that cuts out
the commercials, then record that to DVD.
See also
Copying and back-up
on page 101.
•I have a two-hour recording on the HDD made in
XP
mode. Can I copy this to DVD in high-speed mode?
A standard DVD disc can hold only an hour of
XP
mode material, so you wouldn’t be able to make a
high-speed copy of this on to one disc. You could
divide up the recording on the HDD into two titles of
an hour each and copy these to two DVDs (using
high-speed copy). Alternatively, you could copy the
material in
SP
(or Optimized) mode so as to fit it all on
to one disc (note that there will be a loss in picture
quality if you do this).
See also
Copying and back-up
on page 101.
Can I record a bilingual broadcast to the HDD, keeping
both audio channels and switch them on playback?
Yes. When HDD Recording Format is set to Video
Mode Off (see
HDD Recording Format
on page 135) ,
both channels of the broadcast are recorded (unless
you set the recording mode to LPCM, in which case
only the channel set using the Bilingual Recording
setting will be recorded; see
Using the built-in TV
tuner
on page 61).
Can I record continuously on the HDD for more than
12 hours?
Yes, timer recordings made to the HDD can by set for
up to 24 hours . However, because the maximum
length of a title is 12 hours, the recording will be
spread over two titles. Note that there will be a short
break in the recording between titles.
Front panel display shows ‘LOCK’
when a button is pressed
• The Child Lock is on; turn off in order to use the recorder (page 85).
Can’t use One Touch Copy (HDD to
DVD)
• Make sure that there is a recordable DVD loaded with some free space for
recording and fewer than 99 titles already on the disc. Also make sure that for a
Video mode disc, the disc isn’t finalized.
• If the title currently playing contains material that is copy-once protected, One
Touch Copy will not work.
• If the currently playing HDD content was recorded in XP+ mode, the One Touch
Copy feature can’t be used.
• One Touch Copy doesn’t work if the recorder is already recording to DVD.
Can’t use One Touch Copy (DVD to
HDD)
• Make sure that there is space available on the HDD and that there are fewer than
999 titles on the HDD.
• One Touch Copy doesn’t work if the recorder is already recording to the HDD.
The picture freezes and the front
panel and remote control buttons
stop working
• Press
then try restarting playback.
• Press the front panel
STANDBY/ON
button to switch the power off, then
switch back on and restart playback. If the power fails to switch off, press and hold
STANDBY/ON
for 10 seconds until the power switches off.
Problem Remedy
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 145 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:11 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Additional information
15
146
En
See also
Setting a timer recording
on page 83.
Can I copy a finalized Video mode disc (DVD-R or DVD-
RW) to the HDD?
Yes. Start playing the Video mode disc and use the
One Touch Copy button to copy the currently playing
title to the HDD. Repeat for as many titles on the disc
as you want to copy.
See also
Copying from DVD to HDD
on page 105.
Can I use high-speed copy to copy from DVD to HDD?
You can only use high-speed copy from DVD to HDD
when copying Original titles from a VR mode DVD-R
or DVD-RW disc.
See also
Copying from DVD to HDD
on page 105.
Can I copy a copy-once protected program from a
subscription satellite or cable channel to a DVD from
the HDD?
Yes, you can use high-speed copy to copy to a VR
mode disc. You can also divide the recording on the
HDD into a number of smaller titles if the whole
recording won’t fit on to one disc.
See also
Copying from HDD to DVD
on page 102.
Can I play a DVD I recorded on this recorder on another
DVD player?
Yes, you can generally play finalized Video mode
discs recorded on this recorder on any standard DVD
player. You may find, however, that some players will
not play some recordable media.
For VR mode DVD-RW discs, look for the ‘RW
Compatible’ mark to see if it will play the disc.
About DV
Using DV, also known as i.LINK, you can connect a DV-
equipped camcorder to this recorder using a single DV
cable for input of audio, video, data and control signals.
The i.LINK interface is also known as IEEE 1394-1995.
“i.LINK” and the “i.LINK” logo are trademarks.
This recorder is only compatible with DV-format
(DVC-SD) camcorders. Digital satellite receivers and
Digital VHS video recorders are not compatible.
You cannot connect more than one DV camcorder at
a time to this recorder.
You cannot control this recorder from external
equipment connected via the
DV IN
jack.
It may not always be possible to control the
connected camcorder via the
DV IN
jack.
Digital camcorders can usually record audio as
stereo 16-bit/48kHz, or twin stereo tracks of 12-bit/
32kHz. This recorder can only record one stereo
audio track. Set the
DV Input
setting as required (see
DV Input
on page 133).
Audio input to the
DV IN
jack should be 32 or 48kHz
(not 44.1kHz).
Picture disturbance in the recording may occur if the
source component pauses playback or plays an
unrecorded section of tape, or if the power fails in the
source component, or the DV cable becomes
disconnected.
The
DV IN
jack is an input only. There is no output
functionality.
DV-related messages
You may see the following messages appear on your TV
screen when using the
DV IN
jack.
No DV camcorder connected.
– The camcorder is
not connected properly, or the camcorder is switched
off.
The DV camcorder is recording.
– The camcorder is
recording, so you cannot start recording from the
camcorder to this recorder.
You cannot connect more than one DV
camcorder at the same time.
– The DV jack on this
recorder supports connection to just one camcorder.
No tape in the DV camcorder.
– There is no
cassette loaded into the connected equipment.
The DV camcorder is in record-pause mode.
– The
camcorder is in record-pause mode.
DV camcorder playback canceled.
Recording has been paused.
– Recording was
paused because the camcorder is not in playback
mode.
Cannot operate the DV camcorder.
– This recorder
cannot control the camcorder. Try switching off the
camcorder then switching it back on.
Could not operate the DV camcorder.
– This
recorder was not able to control the camcorder.
Recording has stopped because the recorded
material on the tape finished.
– When the recorded
part of the DV tape comes to an end, this recorder
automatically stops recording.
Recording has stopped because DV camcorder
playback stopped.
– Recording stopped because
DV camcorder playback was stopped or the
camcorder was disconnected.
The DV camcorder is not set for playback. Please
select playback mode on the DV camcorder.
– The
camcorder is in camera mode.
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 146 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:11 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Additional information 15
147
En
English
Manual recording modes
The table below shows the approximate recording times for a VR mode and Video mode DVD in each manual recording
mode, as well as the standard recording mode equivalents. Levels separated by a bold line show where there is a
noticeable change in picture quality.
Audio recording in all manual recording modes is in Dolby Digital 2ch format, except for LPCM mode, which is in
Linear PCM format.
* The first figure refers to when the Input Line System is set to 525 System; the second when set to 625 System.
** XP+ mode is available for HDD recording only. If set for a DVD recording, the DVD will be recorded in MN32 mode.
When recording to the HDD, recording for the times given will use approximately 4.7 GB of HDD space (equivalent to
one recordable DVD).
See also
Recording
on page 79.
Video mode Off (HDD)
VR mode (DVD)
Video mode On (HDD)
Video mode (DVD)
Resolution*
Level Rec. time Level Rec. time
Resolution*
352 x 240 /
352 x 288
MN 1 802 mins. MN 1 802 mins.
352 x 240 /
352 x 288
MN 2 720 mins. MN 2 720 mins.
MN 3 600 mins.
SEP
MN 3 600 mins.
MN 4 480 mins.
SLP
MN 4 480 mins.
MN 5 420 mins. MN 5 420 mins.
MN 6 360 mins.
EP
MN 6 360 mins.
352 x 480 /
352 x 576
MN 7 300 mins. MN 7 300 mins.
352 x 480 /
352 x 576
MN 8 270 mins. MN 8 270 mins.
480 x 480 /
480 x 576
MN 9 240 mins.
LP
MN 9 240 mins.
MN 10 230 mins. MN 10 230 mins.
MN 11 220 mins. MN 11 220 mins.
544 x 480 /
544 x 576
MN 12 210 mins. MN 12 210 mins.
720 x 480 /
720 x 576
MN 13 200 mins. MN 13 200 mins.
MN 14 190 mins. MN 14 190 mins.
MN 15 180 mins. MN 15 180 mins.
720 x 480 /
720 x 576
MN 16 170 mins. MN 16 170 mins.
MN 17 160 mins. MN 17 160 mins.
MN 18 150 mins. MN 18 150 mins.
MN 19 140 mins. MN 19 140 mins.
MN 20 130 mins. MN 20 130 mins.
MN 21 120 mins.
SP
MN 21 120 mins.
MN 22 110 mins. MN 22 110 mins.
MN 23 105 mins. MN 23 105 mins.
MN 24 100 mins. MN 24 100 mins.
MN 25 95 mins. MN 25 95 mins.
MN 26 90 mins. MN 26 90 mins.
MN 27 85 mins. MN 27 85 mins.
MN 28 80 mins. MN 28 80 mins.
MN 29 75 mins. MN 29 75 mins.
MN 30 70 mins. MN 30 70 mins.
MN 31 65 mins. MN 31 65 mins.
MN 32 61 mins.
XP
MN 32 61 mins.
LPCM 61 mins. LPCM 61 mins.
XP+** 41 mins. XP+** 41 mins.
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 147 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:11 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Additional information
15
148
En
Language code list
Language (Language code letter),
Language code
Country/Area code list
Country/Area,
Country/Area code
,
Code letter
Japanese (ja),
1001
English (en),
0514
French (fr),
0618
German (de),
0405
Italian (it),
0920
Spanish (es),
0519
Chinese (zh),
2608
Dutch (nl),
1412
Portuguese (pt),
1620
Swedish (sv),
1922
Russian (ru),
1821
Korean (ko),
1115
Greek (el),
0512
Afar (aa),
0101
Abkhazian (ab),
0102
Afrikaans (af),
0106
Amharic (am),
0113
Arabic (ar),
0118
Assamese (as),
0119
Aymara (ay),
0125
Azerbaijani (az),
0126
Bashkir (ba),
0201
Byelorussian (be),
0205
Bulgarian (bg),
0207
Bihari (bh),
0208
Bislama (bi),
0209
Bengali (bn),
0214
Tibetan (bo),
0215
Breton (br),
0218
Catalan (ca),
0301
Corsican (co),
0315
Czech (cs),
0319
Welsh (cy),
0325
Danish (da),
0401
Bhutani (dz),
0426
Esperanto (eo),
0515
Estonian (et),
0520
Basque (eu),
0521
Persian (fa),
0601
Finnish (fi),
0609
Fiji (fj),
0610
Faroese (fo),
0615
Frisian (fy),
0625
Irish (ga),
0701
Scots-Gaelic (gd),
0704
Galician (gl),
0712
Guarani (gn),
0714
Gujarati (gu),
0721
Hausa (ha),
0801
Hindi (hi),
0809
Croatian (hr),
0818
Hungarian (hu),
0821
Armenian (hy),
0825
Interlingua (ia),
0901
Interlingue (ie),
0905
Inupiak (ik),
0911
Indonesian (in),
0914
Icelandic (is),
0919
Hebrew (iw),
0923
Yiddish (ji),
1009
Javanese (jw),
1023
Georgian (ka),
1101
Kazakh (kk),
1111
Greenlandic (kl),
1112
Cambodian (km),
1113
Kannada (kn),
1114
Kashmiri (ks),
1119
Kurdish (ku),
1121
Kirghiz (ky),
1125
Latin (la),
1201
Lingala (ln),
1214
Laothian (lo), 1215
Lithuanian (lt), 1220
Latvian (lv), 1222
Malagasy (mg), 1307
Maori (mi), 1309
Macedonian (mk), 1311
Malayalam (ml), 1312
Mongolian (mn), 1314
Moldavian (mo), 1315
Marathi (mr), 1318
Malay (ms), 1319
Maltese (mt), 1320
Burmese (my), 1325
Nauru (na), 1401
Nepali (ne), 1405
Norwegian (no), 1415
Occitan (oc), 1503
Oromo (om), 1513
Oriya (or), 1518
Panjabi (pa), 1601
Polish (pl), 1612
Pashto, Pushto (ps), 1619
Quechua (qu), 1721
Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813
Kirundi (rn), 1814
Romanian (ro), 1815
Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823
Sanskrit (sa), 1901
Sindhi (sd), 1904
Sangho (sg), 1907
Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908
Sinhalese (si), 1909
Slovak (sk), 1911
Slovenian (sl), 1912
Samoan (sm), 1913
Shona (sn), 1914
Somali (so), 1915
Albanian (sq), 1917
Serbian (sr), 1918
Siswati (ss), 1919
Sesotho (st), 1920
Sundanese (su), 1921
Swahili (sw), 1923
Tamil (ta), 2001
Telugu (te), 2005
Tajik (tg), 2007
Thai (th), 2008
Tigrinya (ti), 2009
Turkmen (tk), 2011
Tagalog (tl), 2012
Setswana (tn), 2014
Tonga (to), 2015
Turkish (tr), 2018
Tsonga (ts), 2019
Tatar (tt), 2020
Twi (tw), 2023
Ukrainian (uk), 2111
Urdu (ur), 2118
Uzbek (uz), 2126
Vietnamese (vi), 2209
Volapük (vo), 2215
Wolof (wo), 2315
Xhosa (xh), 2408
Yoruba (yo), 2515
Zulu (zu), 2621
Argentina, 0118, ar
Australia, 0121, au
Austria, 0120, at
Belgium, 0205, be
Brazil, 0218, br
Canada, 0301, ca
Chile, 0312, cl
China, 0314, cn
Denmark, 0411, dk
Finland, 0609, fi
France, 0618, fr
Germany, 0405, de
Hong Kong, 0811, hk
India, 0914, in
Indonesia, 0904, id
Italy, 0920, it
Japan, 1016, jp
Korea, Republic of, 1118, kr
Malaysia, 1325, my
Mexico, 1324, mx
Netherlands, 1412, nl
New Zealand, 1426, nz
Norway, 1415, no
Pakistan, 1611, pk
Philippines, 1608, ph
Portugal, 1620, pt
Russian Federation, 1821, ru
Singapore, 1907, sg
Spain, 0519, es
Sweden, 1905, se
Switzerland, 0308, ch
Taiwan, 2023, tw
Thailand, 2008, th
United Kingdom, 0702, gb
USA, 2119, us
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 148 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:11 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Additional information 15
149
En
English
On-screen displays and recorder displays
The table below shows a list of error messages that you may encounter when using the recorder and an explanation
of their meaning.
Message Explanation/Action
• Initializing disc. Please wait a moment.
When you load a blank DVD-RW disc, the recorder automatically
initializes it.
• Incompatible region number.
The disc loaded has an incompatible region number for the
recorder and so will not play.
• Cannot record any more titles.
• No more space for file management data.
• Cannot add any more chapter marks.
The disc control data limit has been reached, or the maximum
number of chapters and/or titles has been reached. Erase titles/
chapters or combine chapters.
• This disc cannot be recorded. Undo the final-
ization.
The disc was finalized on a non-Pioneer DVD recorder. Undo the
finalization in order to recording/editing.
• Cannot play this disc.
• This disc cannot be recorded.
• Cannot read the CPRM information.
• Could not record the information to the disc.
• Cannot edit.
• Could not initialize disc.
• Could not complete finalization successfully.
• Could not undo finalization successfully.
• Could not successfully unlock the disc.
The disc may be dirty or damaged. Take out the disc, clean it and
retry. If the error persists, use a new disc. If the error appears even
with a new disc, please consult a Pioneer Service Center.
• Incompatible or unreadable disc.
The disc loaded is a DVD+R/RW, DVD-RAM or some other
incompatible disc type. This display may also appear if the disc is
dirty or damaged.
• Cannot record to a disc that is not CPRM com-
patible.
• Cannot record this content using Video mode
recording.
The video source is copy-once protected. Use a VR mode DVD-R/
RW disc with CPRM for recording.
• This content is copy protected.
The video source is copy-protected and cannot be recorded.
• Incorrect CPRM information.
The recorder could not read the CPRM information. The recorder
may be damaged—please consult a Pioneer Service Center.
• The audio will conform to the [Bilingual
Recording] setting.
When recording from an external input in Video mode (DVD), Video
Mode On (HDD), or in LPCM mode, you can only record the left or
right channel; not both.
• Repairing disc.
During recording, the power was cut. This display appears when
the power is restored.
• Could not repair the disc.
The recorder was unable to repair the disc after a power cut. The
contents of the recording will be lost.
• Overheating has stopped operation.
Press SHIFT and DISPLAY to clear this message.
The internal temperature of the recorder has exceeded the
operating limit. If this message reappears, please contact a
Pioneer authorized service center.
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 149 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:11 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Additional information
15
150
En
Handling discs
When holding discs of any type, take care not to leave
fingerprints, dirt or scratches on the disc surface. Hold
the disc by its edge or by the center hole and edge.
Damaged or dirty discs can affect playback and
recording performance. Take care also not to scratch the
label side of the disc. Although not as fragile as the
recorded side, scratches can still result in a disc
becoming unusable.
Should a disc become marked with fingerprints, dust,
etc., clean using a soft, dry cloth, wiping the disc lightly
from the center to the outside edge. Do not wipe with a
circular motion.
If necessary, use a cloth soaked in alcohol, or a
commercially available CD/DVD cleaning kit to clean a
disc more thoroughly. Never use benzine, thinner or
other cleaning agents, including products designed for
cleaning vinyl records.
Storing discs
Although CDs and DVD discs are more durable than vinyl
records, you should still take care to handle and store
discs correctly. When you're not using a disc, return it to
its case and store upright. Avoid leaving discs in
excessively cold, humid, or hot environments (including
under direct sunlight).
Don't glue paper or put stickers onto the disc, or use a
pencil, ball-point pen or other sharp-tipped writing
instrument. These could all damage the disc.
For more detailed care information see the instructions
that come with discs.
Do not load more than one disc into the recorder.
Damaged discs
Discs spin at high speed inside the recorder. If you can
see that a disc is cracked, chipped, warped, or otherwise
damaged, don't risk using it; you could end up damaging
the recorder.
• There is no DV input or the input signal is unre-
cordable.
• Cannot preview because there is no DV input
or the input signal is unrecordable.
No signal was detected at the
DV IN
jack. This may appear if a
blank section of DV tape is playing in the connected camcorder.
• HDD optimization is recommended. This can be
done using Disc Setup.
The HDD should be optimized (basically, HDD housekeeping) to
maintain playback and recording performance.
• Please perform HDD optimization. This can be
done using Disc Setup.
The HDD is in more urgent need of optimization in order to
maintain performance.
• The HDD has not been sufficiently optimized.
Please optimize again.
If this message appears repeatedly after optimizing the HDD it is
likely that there is not enough free space on the HDD for
optimization to complete properly. Please erase some titles from
the HDD and optimize again.
• This channel’s TV system is different from the
recorder’s setting.
The TV system (PAL, NTSC, etc.) of the current channel is different
from the TV system settings of this recorder.
• Recording failed due to a TV system mismatch.
Press SHIFT and DISPLAY to clear message.
The timer recording failed because the TV system of the channel
set for recording was different from the setting of the recorder.
• Playback has stopped because the TV system is
different than the recording.
During recording or timer recording standby, the TV System (PAL,
NTSC, etc.) of the playback video changed, causing playback to
stop automatically.
Message Explanation/Action
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 150 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:11 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Additional information 15
151
En
English
This recorder is designed for use with conventional, fully
circular discs only. Use of shaped discs is not
recommended for this product. Pioneer disclaims all
liability arising in connection with the use of shaped
discs.
Cleaning the pickup lens
The DVD recorder’s lens should not become dirty in
normal use, but if for some reason it should malfunction
due to dust or dirt, consult your nearest Pioneer-
authorized service center. Although lens cleaners are
commercially available, we do not recommend using
them since some may damage the lens.
Condensation
Condensation may form inside the recorder if it is
brought into a warm room from outside, or if the
temperature of the room rises quickly. Although the
condensation won’t damage the recorder, it may
temporarily impair its performance. For this reason you
should leave it to adjust to the warmer temperature for
about an hour before switching on and using.
Hints on installation
We want you to enjoy using this unit for years to come, so
please bear in mind the following points when choosing
a suitable location for it:
Do...
Use in a well-ventilated room.
Place on a solid, flat, level surface, such as a table,
shelf or stereo rack.
Don’t...
Use in a place exposed to high temperatures or
humidity, including near radiators and other heat-
generating appliances.
Place on a window sill or other place where the
recorder will be exposed to direct sunlight.
Use in a dusty or damp environment or in a room
where it will be exposed to excessive cigarette smoke.
Place directly on top of an amplifier, or other
component in your stereo system that becomes hot in
use.
Use near a television or monitor as you may
experience interference—especially if the television uses
an indoor antenna.
Use in a kitchen or other room where the recorder
may be exposed to smoke or steam.
Use on a thick rug or carpet, or cover with cloth—this
may prevent proper cooling of the unit.
Place on an unstable surface, or one that is not large
enough to support all four of the unit’s feet.
Moving the recorder
If you need to move the recorder, first remove the disc, if
there’s one loaded, and close the disc tray. Next, press
STANDBY/ON
to switch the power to standby, checking
that the
POWER OFF
indication in the display goes off.
Wait at least two minutes. Lastly, disconnect the power
cord. Never lift or move the unit during playback or
recording—discs rotate at a high speed and may be
damaged.
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 151 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:11 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Additional information
15
152
En
Glossary
Analog audio
An electrical signal that directly represents sound.
Compare this to digital audio which can be an electrical
signal, but is an indirect representation of sound. See
also
Digital audio
.
Aspect ratio
The width of a TV screen relative to its height.
Conventional TVs are 4:3 (in other words, the screen is
almost square); widescreen models are 16:9 (the screen
is almost twice as wide as it is high).
Chapter
Just as a book is split up into several chapters, a title on
the HDD/a DVD disc is usually divided into chapters. See
also
Title
.
Digital audio
An indirect representation of sound by numbers. During
recording, the sound is measured at discrete intervals
(44,100 times a second for CD audio) by an analog-to-
digital converter, generating a stream of numbers. On
playback, a digital-to-analog converter generates an
analog signal based on these numbers. See also
Sampling frequency
and
Analog audio
.
Dolby Digital
Dolby
®
Digital Stereo Creator enables consumers to
create stereo DVD-Videos with stunning Dolby Digital
sound tracks at home. The technology, when utilized
instead of PCM recording, also saves recordable disc
space, allowing for higher video resolution or extended
recording time on each DVD. DVDs mastered using
Dolby Digital Stereo Creator will play back on all DVD-
Video players.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
"Dolby" and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
DRM (Digital Rights Management)
DRM (Digital Rights Management) copy protection is a
technology designed to prevent unauthorized copying by
restricting playback, etc. of material on devices other the
PC (or other WMA recording equipment) used to record
it. For detailed information, please see the instruction
manuals or help files that came with your PC (or other
WMA recording equipment) and/or software.
DTS
DTS stands for Digital Theater System. DTS is a surround
system different from Dolby Digital that has become a
popular surround sound format for movies.
“DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are registered trademarks of
Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
Dynamic range
The difference between the quietest and loudest sounds
possible in an audio signal (without distorting or getting
lost in noise). Dolby Digital and DTS soundtracks are
capable of a wide dynamic range, delivering dramatic
cinema-like effects.
EXIF (Exchangeable Image File)
A file format developed by Fuji Photo Film for digital still
cameras. Digital cameras from various manufacturers
use this compressed file format which carries date, time
and thumbnail information, as well as the picture data.
File extension
A tag added to the end of a filename to indicate the type
of file. For example, “.mp3” indicates an MP3 file.
ISO 9660 format
International standard for the volume and file structure of
CD-ROM discs.
JPEG
A file format used for still images, such as photographs
and illustrations. JPEG files are identified by the file
extension “.jpg” or “.JPG”. Most digital cameras use this
format.
MP3
MP3 (MPEG1 audio layer 3) is a compressed audio file
format. Files are recognized by their file extension “.mp3”
or “.MP3”.
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 152 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:11 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Additional information 15
153
En
English
MPEG audio
An audio format used on Video CDs and some DVD
discs. This unit can convert MPEG audio to PCM format
for wider compatibility with digital recorders and AV
amp/receivers. See also
PCM
.
MPEG video
The video format used for Video CDs and DVDs. Video CD
uses the older MPEG-1 standard, while DVD uses the
newer and much better quality MPEG-2 standard.
Optical digital output
A jack that outputs digital audio in the form of light
pulses. Connect components with optical digital jacks
using a special optical cord, available from specialist
audio dealers.
PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)
The most common system of encoding digital audio,
found on CDs and DAT. Excellent quality, but requires a
lot of data compared to formats such as Dolby Digital
and MPEG audio. For compatibility with digital audio
recorders (CD, MD and DAT) and AV amp/receivers with
digital inputs, this unit can convert Dolby Digital and
MPEG audio to PCM. See also
Digital audio
.
PBC (PlayBack Control) (Video CD/Super VCD only)
A system of navigating a Video CD/Super VCD through
on-screen menus recorded onto the disc. Especially good
for discs that you would normally not watch from
beginning to end all at once—karaoke discs, for example.
Regions (DVD only)
(example region code marks)
Regions associate discs and players with particular
areas of the world. This unit will only play discs that have
compatible region codes. You can find the region code of
your unit by looking on the rear panel. Some discs are
compatible with more than one region (or all regions).
Sampling frequency
The rate at which sound is measured to be turned into
digital audio data. The higher the rate, the better the
sound quality, but the more digital information is
generated. Standard CD audio has a sampling frequency
of 44.1kHz, which means 44,100 samples
(measurements) per second. See also
Digital audio
.
Title
A collection of chapters on a the HDD/DVD disc. See also
Chapter
.
Track
Audio CDs and Video CDs use tracks to divide up the
content of a disc. The DVD equivalent is called a chapter.
See also
Chapter
.
WMA
WMA is short for Windows Media Audio and refers to an
audio compression technology developed by Microsoft
Corporation. WMA data can be encoded by using
Windows Media Player version 9 or 10, or Windows
Media Player for Windows XP. Files are recognized by
their file extension “.wma” or “.WMA”.
Microsoft, Windows Media, and the Windows logo are
trademarks, or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
2ALL
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 153 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:11 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Additional information
15
154
En
Specifications
General
System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HDD, DVD-Video, DVD-R/RW,
Video-CD, Super VCD, CD,
CD-R/RW (WMA, MP3, JPEG, CD-DA)
Power requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220–240 V, 50/60 Hz
Power consumption. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 W
Power consumption in standby mode 0.93 W
(Front panel display: off)
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.1 kg
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 (W) x 59 (H) x 273 (D) mm
Operating temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +5°C to +35°C
Operating humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5% to 85%
(no condensation)
TV system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAL/SECAM/
NTSC (external input only)
Recording
Recording format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DVD Video Recording
DVD-VIDEO
Recordable discs
DVD-RW (DVD Re-recordable disc)
DVD-R (DVD Recordable disc)
Video recording format
Sampling frequency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.5MHz
Compression format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MPEG
Audio recording format
Sampling frequency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48kHz
Compression format . . . . . . . .Dolby Digital or Linear PCM
(uncompressed)
Recording time
HDD (160GB)
XP+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 23 hours
Fine (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 34 hours
Standard Play (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 68 hours
Long Play (LP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 136 hours
Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 204 hours
Super Long Play (SLP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 272 hours
Super Extended Play (SEP) . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 340 hours
Manual Mode (MN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 23–455 hours
DVD-R/DVD-RW
Fine (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 hour
Standard Play (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 2 hours
Long Play (LP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 4 hours
Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 6 hours
Super Long Play (SLP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 8 hours
Super Extended Play (SEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 10 hours
Manual Mode (MN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1–13 hours
Tuner
Receivable channels
Timer
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 month/32 programs
Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quartz lock (24-hour digital display)
Power off memory . . . . Approx. 5 years (after manufacture)
Input/Output
VHF/UHF antenna input/output terminal . . . . VHF/UHF set
75
(IEC connector)
Video input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Input 1,3 (rear), 2 (front)
Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75
)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector 2 (Input 1),
RCA jack (Input 2, 3)
Video output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV1, Output
Output level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75
)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector (AV1)
RCA jack (Output)
S-Video input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input 1, 3 (rear), 2 (front)
Y (luminance) - Input level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75
)
C (colour) - Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 mVp-p (75
)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector 2 (Input 1),
4 pin mini DIN (Input 2, 3)
S-Video output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV1, Output
Y (luminance) - Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75
)
C (colour) - Output level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 mVp-p (75
)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector 1 (AV1),
4 pin mini DIN (Output)
VHF (low)
VHF (high)
Hyper
UHF
VHF (low)
VHF (high)
Hyper
UHF
STEREO
B/G - A2
I - NICAM
L - NICAM
B/G - NICAM
D/K - NICAM
Channel
E2 - E4
X - Z
E5 - E12
S1 - S20
M1 - M10
U1 - U10
S21 - S41
E21 - E69
Frequency
47 - 89 MHz
104 - 300 MHz
302 - 470 MHz
470 - 862 MHz
Channel
A - C
X - Z
D - J
11, 13
S1 - S20
S21 - S41
E21 - E69
Frequency
44 - 89 MHz
104 - 300 MHz
302 - 470 MHz
470 - 862 MHz
SECAM B/G
PAL B/G PAL I
Channel
FB, FC1, FC
F1 - F6
B - Q
S21 - S41
21 - 69
Frequency
49 - 65 MHz
104 - 300 MHz
300 - 470 MHz
470 - 862 MHz
Channel
R1 - R5
R6 - R12
S1 - S20
S21 - S41
E21 - E69
Frequency
49 - 94 MHz
104 - 300 MHz
302 - 470 MHz
470 - 862 MHz
SECAM L SECAM D/K
PAL D/K
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 154 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:11 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Additional information 15
155
En
English
Component video output
Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Y: 1.0 Vp-p (75
)
P
B
, P
R
: 0.7 Vp-p (75
)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .RCA jacks
RGB input
Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.7 Vp-p (75
)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV connector 2 (Input 1)
RGB output
Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.7 Vp-p (75
)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector 1 (AV1)
Audio input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input 1, 3 (rear), 2 (front) L/R
Input level
During audio input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2V rms
(Input impedance: more than 22 k
)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector 2 (Input 1),
RCA jacks (Input 2, 3)
Audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV1, Output
During audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2V rms
(Output impedance: less than 1.5 k
)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV connector 1 (AV1),
RCA jacks (Output)
Control input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Mini jack
DV input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 pin (front)
(i.LINK/IEEE 1394 standard)
G-LINK™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Mini jack
AV Connectors (21-pin connector assignment)
AV connector input/output . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-pin connector
This connector provides the video and audio signals for
connection to a compatible colour TV or monitor.
PIN no. AV1(RGB)-TV / AV2(INPUT 1)
1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio 2/R out / Audio 2/R out
2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . – / Audio 2/R in
11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G out / G in
3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio 1/L out / Audio 1/L out
6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . – / Audio 1/L in
15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R or C out / R or C in
4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GND
17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GND
7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B out / B in
19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Video out or Y out / Video out
20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . – / Video in or Y in
8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status
21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GND
Supplied accessories
Audio / Video cable (red/white/yellow) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
G-LINK™ cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
RF antenna cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Note: The specifications and design of this product are subject
to change without notice, due to improvement.
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 155 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:11 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Published by Pioneer Corporation.
Copyright © 2005 Pioneer Corporation.
All rights reserved
<ARB7342-A>Printed in China
PIONEER CORPORATION
4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.
P. O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90810-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R OP2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901
PIONEER EUROPE NV
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11
PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.
253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.
178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V.
Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D.F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270 K002_A_En
If you want to dispose this product, do not mix it with general household waste. There is a separate collection system for used
electronic products in accordance with legislation that requires proper treatment, recovery and recycling.
Private households in the 25 member states of the EU, in Switzerland and Norway may return their used electronic products free of charge to
designated collection facilities or to a retailer (if you purchase a similar new one).
For countries not mentioned above, please contact your local authorities for the correct method of disposal.
By doing so you will ensure that your disposed product undergoes the necessary treatment, recovery and recycling and thus prevent potential
negative effects on the environment and human health.
DVR-530H_EU.book Page 156 Friday, May 13, 2005 3:11 PM
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
82


Need help? Post your question in this forum.

Forumrules


Report abuse

Libble takes abuse of its services very seriously. We're committed to dealing with such abuse according to the laws in your country of residence. When you submit a report, we'll investigate it and take the appropriate action. We'll get back to you only if we require additional details or have more information to share.

Product:

For example, Anti-Semitic content, racist content, or material that could result in a violent physical act.

For example, a credit card number, a personal identification number, or an unlisted home address. Note that email addresses and full names are not considered private information.

Forumrules

To achieve meaningful questions, we apply the following rules:

Register

Register getting emails for Pioneer SX-SW77 at:


You will receive an email to register for one or both of the options.


Get your user manual by e-mail

Enter your email address to receive the manual of Pioneer SX-SW77 in the language / languages: English as an attachment in your email.

The manual is 7.3 mb in size.

 

You will receive the manual in your email within minutes. If you have not received an email, then probably have entered the wrong email address or your mailbox is too full. In addition, it may be that your ISP may have a maximum size for emails to receive.

Others manual(s) of Pioneer SX-SW77

Pioneer SX-SW77 User Manual - Dutch - 156 pages


The manual is sent by email. Check your email

If you have not received an email with the manual within fifteen minutes, it may be that you have a entered a wrong email address or that your ISP has set a maximum size to receive email that is smaller than the size of the manual.

The email address you have provided is not correct.

Please check the email address and correct it.

Your question is posted on this page

Would you like to receive an email when new answers and questions are posted? Please enter your email address.



Info